Runner Series - Crow Electronic Engineering Ltd.

ELECTRONIC ENGINEERING LTD.

Runner Series

8/16 ZONE WIRELESS AND WIRED CONTROL PANEL

COVERS:

RUNNER-16 (16 ZONE IN POLY BOX)

&

RUNNER-8 (8 ZONE IN POLY BOX)

&

Runner-Plus (16 Zone in Compact Box)

Installation and Configuration Guide

(Covers Panel Ver:9.02+)

by by by by CROW Electronic Engineering Ltd.CROW Electronic Engineering Ltd.CROW Electronic Engineering Ltd.CROW Electronic Engineering Ltd.

Version 9.08.9A/L

IMPORTANT NOTICEIMPORTANT NOTICEIMPORTANT NOTICEIMPORTANT NOTICE

All information and data contained in this document is proprietary and confidential.

CROW Electronic Engineering Ltd. shall not be liable, in any event, for any claims for damages or

any other remedy in any jurisdiction whatsoever, whether in an action in contract, tort (including

negligence and strict liability) or any other theory of liability, whether in law or equity including,

without limitation, claims for damages or any other remedy in whatever jurisdiction, and shall not

assume responsibility for patent infringements or other rights to third parties, arising out of or in

connection with this document. Further, CROW Electronic Engineering Ltd. reserves the right to

revise this publication and to make changes to its content, at any time, without obligation to notify

any person or entity of such revision changes. These materials are copyrighted and any

unauthorized use of these materials may violate copyright, trademark, and other laws. Therefore,

no part of this publication may be reproduced, photocopied, stored on a retrieval system, or

transmitted without the express written consent of CROW Electronic Engineering Ltd. Any new

issue of this document invalidates previous issues.

©CROW Electronic Engineering Ltd. 2005, 2006, 2009. All rights reserved.

Information in this document is subject to change without notice in the course of product development. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or

mechanical, without express written permission of CROW Electronic Engineering Ltd..

Tech Support:

Dear Crow Products Installer,

Please contact your Crow Products Supplier for Technical Assistance. In the rare occasion that your supplier is unable to

assist you, they will contact Crow for Technical assistance specific to your concerns and will then be able to assist you themselves.

Warning:

This equipment must only be installed and

maintained by qualified service personnel.

Designed & Manufactured to Meet:

AS/NZS:4301/93 + AS/NZS:3260 (A:1-4) + CISPR-22 (2006) + AS/ACIF S001 +

AS/ACIF S002:2005 + AS/ACIF S004:2004

N345 - Product # CRPW08G

Document Version 1.00.066

Runner Series Version 9.08.9A/L

(Updated) 14-Mar-2011

i

CONTENTS

OVERVIEW........................................................................................................................... 6

CONNECTION DIAGRAMS ...........................................................................................................6

RUNNER-16 IN MINI BOX SPECIFICATION : ...................................................................... 7

RUNNER-8 IN MINI BOX SPECIFICATION : ........................................................................ 9

RUNNER - PLUS SPECIFICATION : .................................................................................... 11

INPUT OPTIONS ................................................................................................................ 12

DIFFERENT INPUT CONFIGURATIONS ..........................................................................................12

ZONE WIRING EXAMPLES (ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS)........................................................................13

OTHER INPUTS .....................................................................................................................15

OUTPUTS............................................................................................................................ 16

DESCRIPTION OF OUTPUTS ......................................................................................................16

KEYPAD PORT.......................................................................................................................16

EXPANSION PORT ..................................................................................................................17

ACCESSORIES .................................................................................................................... 18

RADIO RECEIVER...................................................................................................................18

VOICE BOARD.......................................................................................................................18

NIGHT ARM STATION (MONITOR KEYPAD)...................................................................................25

KEYPAD INDICATORS........................................................................................................ 27

LED KEYPAD........................................................................................................................27

LCD KEYPAD......................................................................................................................32

KEYPAD ADDRESS ASSIGNMENT & INSTALLATION.......................................................... 34

LED KEYPAD........................................................................................................................34

LCD KEYPAD......................................................................................................................35

ADJUSTING BACKLIGHTING AND BUZZER TONE..............................................................................36

LCD KEYPAD “LOCAL EDIT” MODE .................................................................................... 37

LCD KEYPAD........................................................................................................................37

PROGRAM MODE ACCESS .................................................................................................. 44

ACCESSING PROGRAM MODE ....................................................................................................44

EXITING PROGRAM MODE........................................................................................................45

SPECIAL KEYPAD FUNCTIONS........................................................................................... 55

RUNNER - Installation & Config. Guide CONTENTS

ii

ARMING OR DISARMING TWO AREAS AT A KEYPAD .........................................................................55

LCD QUICK VIEW MODE .........................................................................................................55

TOGGLE CHIME MODE ON/OFF .................................................................................................56

SEND MANUAL TEST CALL .......................................................................................................56

MANUALLY ANSWER AN INCOMING CALL ......................................................................................56

PROGRAMMING USERS ..................................................................................................... 57

USER CODES ........................................................................................................................57

USER CODE TYPE ..................................................................................................................57

USER AREAS ........................................................................................................................58

USER ACCESS OPTIONS...........................................................................................................59

USER CODE PRIVILEGES - USER PROGRAM OPTIONS .......................................................................60

RADIO USER TYPE - PENDANT TYPE............................................................................................60

RADIO USER PRIVILEGES – PENDANT OPTIONS ..............................................................................61

USER TIME ZONE ASSIGNMENTS................................................................................................61

USER TO KEYPAD ASSIGNMENT – USER DEVICES ............................................................................62

RADIO PENDANT PANIC BEEPS TO KEYPAD...................................................................................62

USER TO OUTPUT MASK ..........................................................................................................63

USER CAN TURN AN OUTPUT ON AND OFF..................................................................................63

RADIO PENDANT PANIC ALARM TO OUTPUT..................................................................................64

LEARN FIND AND DELETE RADIO KEY CODES AND TAGS ..................................................................64

MISCELLANEOUS PANEL & CLOCK SETTINGS ................................................................... 67

INSTALLER CODE...................................................................................................................67

DURESS DIGIT......................................................................................................................67

DIAL REPORTING DELAY..........................................................................................................67

RADIO ZONE SUPERVISED TIMER...............................................................................................67

TWO TRIGGER TIMER .............................................................................................................68

MAINS FAIL REPORTING DELAY.................................................................................................68

RECEIVER FAIL DELAY/TIMER ...................................................................................................68

UPLOAD/DOWNLOAD SITE CODE NUMBER ...................................................................................68

TEMPORARY OUTPUT DISABLE ..................................................................................................68

MISCELLANEOUS INSTALLER AND PANEL OPTIONS ..........................................................................69

HIDE USER CODES - USER OPTIONS .......................................................................................70

SETTING TIME, DATE AND DAYLIGHT SAVING ..............................................................................72

DAYLIGHT SAVING (DLS) SETTINGS ..........................................................................................72

OUTPUTS............................................................................................................................ 73

OUTPUT OPTIONS .............................................................................................................73

OUTPUT ON DELAY, PULSE, RESET AND CHIME TIMES ....................................................................76

iii

OUTPUT VOICE BOARD REMOTE CONTROL START MESSAGES............................................................77

UN-MAP AN OUTPUT ..............................................................................................................77

ASSIGNING A TIME-ZONE TO AN OUTPUT ....................................................................................77

AREAS ................................................................................................................................ 78

AREA ARM AND SPECIAL FUNCTION OPTIONS ...............................................................................78

AREA ARM/STAY PULSE & CHIRPS TO OUTPUTS ............................................................................80

MONITORING ACCOUNT CODE NUMBER.......................................................................................84

REMOTE ARM/DISARM DTMF CODE & START VOICE MESSAGE.........................................................84

AREA DELINQUENCY DELAY......................................................................................................85

AUTOMATIC ARM/DISARM TIME ZONE ........................................................................................85

KEYPADS............................................................................................................................ 86

KEYPAD AREA ASSIGNMENT......................................................................................................86

KEYPAD BUTTON OPERATIONS, MISC. BEEPS AND LED CONTROL ......................................................86

KEYPAD ARM, STAY, A AND B BUTTON OPTIONS ...........................................................................88

KEYPAD TO OUTPUT MASK.......................................................................................................92

<CONTROL> BUTTON TO OUTPUT MASK ....................................................................................92

KEYBOARD PANIC, FIRE AND MEDICAL ALARMS TO OUTPUTS AND KP BUZZER.......................................94

KEYPAD CHIME TIMER ............................................................................................................96

PROXIMITY READER OPTIONS ...................................................................................................96

KEY-SWITCHES.................................................................................................................. 98

KEY-SWITCH AREA ASSIGNMENT ...............................................................................................98

KEY-SWITCH ARM/DISARM OPTIONS..........................................................................................98

ZONES.............................................................................................................................. 100

ZONE AREA ASSIGNMENT ......................................................................................................100

ZONE ALARM TYPE OPTIONS ..................................................................................................100

ZONE EOL (END-OF-LINE) OPTIONS AND VIBRATION SETTINGS .....................................................103

RADIO ZONE DETECTOR TYPE ................................................................................................105

ZONE ALARMS TO OUTPUT AND KEYPAD BUZZER MAPPING.............................................................106

ZONE CID REPORT CODES ....................................................................................................110

ARMED AND STAY MODE ENTRY DELAY TIMES ............................................................................111

ZONE WATCH DOG TIMER .....................................................................................................111

LEARN/FIND AND DELETE RADIO ZONE CODES ...........................................................................112

TIME ZONES..................................................................................................................... 114

HOLIDAYS .........................................................................................................................114

TIME ZONE DAYS ................................................................................................................114

TIME ZONE START AND STOP TIMES ........................................................................................115


iv

DIALLER ........................................................................................................................... 116

DIALLER OPTIONS ...............................................................................................................116

AUTO ANSWER RING COUNT...................................................................................................118

TEST CALL OPTIONS.............................................................................................................118

KEYPAD LISTEN-IN AND OUTPUT OPTIONS.................................................................................118

DIALLING PRE-FIX NUMBER ...................................................................................................119

KEYPAD PANIC, FIRE AND MEDICAL ALARMS CID REPORT CODE......................................................119

OUTPUT, MICROPHONE & VOICE KISS OFF DTMF REMOTE CODES .................................................120

MISCELLANEOUS VOICE REPORTING MESSAGE NUMBERS ...............................................................122

TELEPHONE NUMBERS .................................................................................................... 123

PROGRAMMING TELEPHONE NUMBERS.......................................................................................123

REPORTING FORMATS...........................................................................................................123

TELEPHONE NUMBER REPORT OPTIONS ...........................................................................125

MAXIMUM DIAL RE-TRIES PER TELEPHONE NUMBER .....................................................................126

DIAL REPORTING OPTIONS ....................................................................................................126

CALL DIVERT NUMBERS & OPTIONS .........................................................................................129

CALL DIVERT NUMBERS & OPTIONS (CONT.)..............................................................................130

4+2 PROGRAM OPTIONS................................................................................................. 131

USING THE 4+2 CODES ........................................................................................................131

MAINS/BATTERY/TAMPER/DURESS & ARMING 4+2 CODES............................................................132

SIA ALARM REPORT CODES ...................................................................................................133

DIAGNOSTIC & DEFAULT OPTIONS................................................................................. 135

DISPLAY SOFTWARE VERSION, KEYPAD NUMBER AND KEYPAD AREAS................................................135

DISPLAY ACTIVE TIME ZONES & BATTERY VOLTAGE .....................................................................135

START WALK TEST MODE......................................................................................................135

READ OR WRITE TO THE DTU ................................................................................................136

RESTORE DEFAULTS .............................................................................................................136

CLEAR MEMORY BUFFER........................................................................................................136

START A CALL-BACK CALL......................................................................................................136

USER PRIVILEGES CHART ............................................................................................... 138

DIALLER INSTALLATION.........................................................................................................139

CONTACT ID CODE SUMMARY......................................................................................... 141

SIA REPORTING CODE SUMMARY................................................................................... 143

SOFTWARE CHANGE UPDATE NOTICE............................................................................. 145

RUNNER 8/16 QUICK START GUIDE ............................................................................... 149


v

RUNNER 8/16 CONFIGURATION SUMMARY GUIDE ....................................................... 151

USERS ..............................................................................................................................152

MISCELLANEOUS PANEL & CLOCK SETTINGS ...............................................................................157

OUTPUTS ..........................................................................................................................160

AREAS ..............................................................................................................................162

KEYPADS ...........................................................................................................................165

KEY-SWITCHES ...................................................................................................................171

ZONES..............................................................................................................................172

TIME ZONES ......................................................................................................................180

DIALLER............................................................................................................................181

TELEPHONE NUMBERS...........................................................................................................183

MISCELLANEOUS 4+2 PROGRAM OPTIONS .................................................................................186

PANEL DIAGNOSTIC & DEFAULT OPTIONS..................................................................................187

CROW ELECTRONIC ENGINEERING LTD. (CROW) WARRANTY POLICY CERTIFICATE .............188

HOW TO CONTACT US...................................................................................................... 189

6

OverviewOverviewOverviewOverview

Connection DiagramsConnection DiagramsConnection DiagramsConnection Diagrams

RunnerRunnerRunnerRunner----16161616

The Runner-16 board may be supplied in three different enclosures:

� Standard MINI-housing (Front Screws for cover & space for 12V 7AH Bat).

� PW-housing (large with bottom screws for cover & space for 12V 7AH Bat). This enclosure can accommodate the Runner GPRS (P/N: CRRUN001) Module.

� Compact-housing (has built-in Large LCD Keypad + Siren & space for 12V 1.3AH Bat). Due to its smaller size, this enclosure is more suited for Wireless systems.

Battery Spec.: Sealed Lead-Acid Rechargeable Battery 12V/1.3Ah up to 12V /7Ah in the Mini and PW-housings.

Battery Cutoff Level: (When AC mains fails) : 10 ± 0.3V

(* WARNING: Exposing the Control Panel to High Temperatures (above 50° C such as when installed in the roof) may Damage the Control Panel and cause Erratic Performance. Such Damage is considered Abuse and/or Misuse that may void Warranty).

16VAC 1.5A

Plug Pack

(Output-4)

RUNNERRUNNERRUNNERRUNNER----16161616

Power-Up with Tamper Open And Short Applied and Leave Short-on for 15sec. This Disarms, Resets Installer & User Codes, Phone Number & CID Acct Numbers to Factory Default. This function is Disabled if Installer is Locked-Out.

RUNNER-16

Ver:9.08A

1009

RST

EOL Resistor Option shown as Type-15 ((Zone Doubled without Tamper (No 2k2)) = 4k7 for Low-Zones (i.e.: Zones 1-8) and 8k2 for Hi-Zones (i.e.: Zones 9-16). See pg-12~15 & pg-103 for further details.

Panel Tamper 2k2 EOL Resistor Option shown. Unless advised otherwise, this 2k2 is factory fitted to the Panel Tamper Switch (under the black Heat Shrink that covers the Tamper Switch Terminals).

Standard MINI-housing

RUNNER - Installation & Config. Guide

7

RunnerRunnerRunnerRunner----16161616 In Mini Box In Mini Box In Mini Box In Mini Box Specification :Specification :Specification :Specification :

Operating Voltage (By Plug Pack - Transformer): 16V AC ,50Hz 1.5Amps (=25VA).

Back Up Battery: Sealed Lead Acid type 12V /1.3A up to 12V /7Ah

Battery Dynamic Test : Every 6 seconds.

Current Consumption:

Standby:

Control Panel = 40mA

Keypad = 60-130mA Depending on Button and Display backlight intensity.

Maximum Current Drain allowed from the Control Panel:

Standby: 400mA (0.4A)

Alarm: 800mA (0.8A)

Inputs:

• 16 wired Zones (Provided by Full Programmable Zone Inputs 1-8 Zone Doubled).

• Programmable Wired Tamper Input. Also used for Key-Switch Operation (when Programmed).

Outputs:

Output#1&2: Open Collector Type , 0.75A* @12V DC. By Default, O/P-1 is for 12V Siren, O/P-2 is for Strobe.

Output#3&4: Open Collector Type , 0.5A* @12V DC. By Default, O/P-3 is for 12V Internal Piezo Siren.

Output#4: Relay Change Over Contacts Capability: 2A* @12V DC. By Default, O/P-4 will provide a Single Pulse for Garage Door Control when activated by a Wireless (Radio) User. If Output-4 (or any Output) will be used to operate an Electric Lock or any device with similar power requirements, an External Power Supply MUST be used. Any such device that damages the Control Panel may Void Warranty.

* NOTE-1: The above stated ratings are the Load Carrying Capacity of the Outputs. The Total Power Consumption of the System Must NEVER Exceed the 800mA System Limit when the System is in Alarm.

* NOTE-2: Outputs-1 & 2 are capable of driving Horn Speaker type sirens. However, Horn Speakers draw much greater current (typically (0.5A) 500mA Each) from the system. This is approx 60% of the systems Current Capacity. Please be mindful of this when calculating Total Power Consumption from the system.

Protections:

12V Out : Each output power protected by Auto-Resettable Fuse 0.75A.

Battery Out: Protected by Auto-Resettable Fuse 2.5A.

POS (Keypad Buss +12Volt Supply): Protected by Auto-Resettable Fuse 0.75A.

Physical:

Size (cm): Standard Mini-housing = 29.5 (W) x 25 (H) x 8 (D)

Weight (kg) : Standard Mini-housing = 1.2

Operating Temperature*: -10 to 50º C. (Please Read the Warning note below)

Storage Temperature: -20 to 60ºC.

Humidity: 85% relative humidity @ 30º C

(* WARNING: Exposing the Control Panel to High (above 50° C) Temperatures (such as

when installed in the roof) may Damage the Control Panel which may cause Degraded

Performance. Such Damage is considered Abuse and/or Misuse that may void Warranty).


8

Runner Runner Runner Runner –––– 8 8 8 8

The Runner-8 board is supplied in the Standard MINI Housing:

� Standard MINI-housing (with Front Screws for cover & space for 12V 7AH Bat).

Battery Spec.: Sealed Lead-Acid Rechargeable Battery 12V/1.3Ah up to 12V /7Ah in the Mini and PW-housings.



16VAC 1.5A

Plug Pack

RUNNER-8

Ver:9.08A

1009


EOL Resistor Option shown as Type-15 (Zone Doubled without Tamper (No 2k2)) = 4k7 for Low-Zones (i.e.: Zones 1-4) and 8k2 for Hi-Zones (i.e.: Zones 5-8). See pg-12~15 & pg-103 for further details.

Standard MINI-housing


9

RunnerRunnerRunnerRunner----8 In 8 In 8 In 8 In Mini Box Mini Box Mini Box Mini Box Specification :Specification :Specification :Specification :


Back Up Battery: Sealed Lead Acid type 12V /1.3A up to 12V /7Ah



Standby:

Control Panel = 40mA

Keypad = 60-130mA Depending on Button and Display backlight intensity.


Standby: 400mA (0.4A)

Alarm: 800mA (0.8A)

Inputs:



Outputs:

Output#1&2: Open Collector Type , 0.75A* @12V DC. By Default, O/P-1 is for 12V Siren, O/P-2 is for Strobe.


* NOTE-2: Outputs-1 Only is capable of driving a Horn Speaker type siren. However, Horn Speakers draw much greater current (typically (0.5A) 500mA Each) from the system. This is approx 60% of the systems Current Capacity. Please be mindful of this when calculating Total Power Consumption from the system.

Protections:




Physical:

Size (cm): Standard Mini-housing = 29.5 (W) x 25 (H) x 8 (D)

Weight (kg) : Standard Mini-housing = 1.2

Operating Temperature*: -10 to 50º C. (Please Read the Warning note below)

Storage Temperature: -20 to 60ºC.


(* WARNING: Exposing the Control Panel to High (above 50° C) Temperatures (such as

when installed in the roof) may Damage the Control Panel which may cause Degraded

Performance. Such Damage is considered Abuse and/or Misuse that may void Warranty).


10

� Compact-housing (has built-in Large LCD Keypad + Siren & space for 12V 1.3AH

Bat). Due to its smaller size, this enclosure is more suited for Wireless systems.

(Output-4)

RUNNERRUNNERRUNNERRUNNER----PLUSPLUSPLUSPLUS

(Output-4)

RUNNER-16

Ver:9.08A

1009

RST

Power-Up with Tamper Open And Short Applied and Leave Short-on for 15sec. This Disarms, Resets Installer & User Codes, Phone Number & CID Acct Numbers to Factory Default. This function is Disabled if Installer is Locked-Out.

8 1

8 Wire Loom Keypad Plug for Low Current Special Runner-Plus Lrge LCD Keypad. The 5 Pin Loom can also be Plugged-in. Pin-1 is +12 Volts (Red) Wire for both Keypads.

16VAC 1.5A

Plug Pack

Battery Spec.: Sealed Lead-Acid Rechargeable Battery 12V/1.3Ah in the Compact housing but the Control Panel can Charge up to 12V /7Ah if the Mini and PW-housings are used.



EOL Resistor Option shown as Type-15 (Zone Doubled without Tamper (No 2k2)) = 4k7 for Low-Zones (i.e.: Zones 1-8) and 8k2 for Hi-Zones (i.e.: Zones 9-16). See pg-12~15 & pg-103 for further details.


Compact Housing


11

Runner Runner Runner Runner ---- Plus Plus Plus Plus Specification :Specification :Specification :Specification :


Back Up Battery: Sealed Lead Acid type (Compact housing) 12V /1.3A (C.P. can Charge up to 12V /7Ah)



Standby: Control Panel = 40mA

Keypad =60-130mA - Depending on Button and Display backlight intensity.

Voice Board FDX=50-150mA

Alarm : 260mA.


Standby: 300mA

Alarm: 800mA.

Inputs:



Outputs:

Output#1: Open Collector Type , 0.75A* @12V DC. Used by the Built-In Piezo 12V Siren inside Compact unit.

Output#2: Open Collector Type , 0.75A* @12V DC. By Default, O/P-2 is for Strobe.

Output#3&4: Open Collector Type , 0.5A* @12V DC. By Default, O/P-3 is for 12V Internal Piezo Siren.

Output#4: Relay Change Over Contacts Capability: 2A* @12V DC. By Default, O/P-4 will provide a Single Pulse for Garage Door Control when activated by a Wireless (Radio) User. If Output-4 (or any Output) will be used to operate an Electric Lock or any device with similar power requirements, an External Power Supply MUST

be used. Any such device that damages the Control Panel may Void Warranty.


* NOTE-2: Outputs-1 & 2 are capable of driving Horn Speaker type sirens. However, Horn Speakers draw much greater current (typically (0.5A) 500mA Each) from the system. This is approx 60% of the systems Current

Capacity. Please be mindful of this when calculating Total Power Consumption from the system.

Protections:




Physical:

Size (cm): Compact-housing = 27 (W) x 19 (H) x 7.5 (D)

Weight (kg): Compact-housing = 1.7 (including the 12V 1.3AH Battery)

Operating Temperature* : 0-50º C. (Please Read the WARNING note below)

Storage Temperature: -10 - 55ºC.


(* WARNING: Exposing the Control Panel to High (above 50° C) Temperatures (such as when installed in the roof) may Damage the Control Panel which may cause Degraded Performance. Such Damage is considered Abuse and/or Misuse that may void Warranty).


12

Input OptionsInput OptionsInput OptionsInput Options

Different Input Configurations Different Input Configurations Different Input Configurations Different Input Configurations The Runner-16 & Runner-Plus have nine onboard programmable monitored analogue inputs. These are:

� Eight programmable multi-state detection Zone inputs

� One programmable tamper input (with optional Key-switch functions)

The Runner-8 has five onboard programmable monitored analogue inputs. These are:

� Four programmable multi-state detection Zone inputs

� One programmable tamper input (with optional Key-switch functions)

NOTENOTENOTENOTE

Each input must be terminated with the appropriate value or combination of End-Of-Line resistors, even if the input is unused. See Zone Wiring Examples on pages-13 & 14.

Zone InputsZone InputsZone InputsZone Inputs

Each of the programmable Zone Inputs can be assigned one of the following End of Line (EOL) configuration options. Options 1~11 (Single EOL) and the 2k2 in Options 12 & 14 and the 3k3 in Option 13 Must be in Series (In-Line) with the Zone Input, while All Other EOL’s in Options 12~15 Must be in Parallel (Across) the Alarm (Relay) Contacts of the Detection Device. See examples on pages-13 & 14.

Zone EOL Type (P125E) Input Resistor Comments

0 (Short circuit) Loop Only (No EOL Resistor)

1 1k (Brown, Black, Red) Single EOL (Series Connection)

2 1k5 (Brown, Green, Red) Single EOL (Series Connection)

3 2k2 (Red, Red, Red) Single EOL (Series Connection)

4 3k3 (Orange, Orange, Red) Single EOL (Series Connection)

5 3k9 (Orange, White, Red) Single EOL (Series Connection)

6 4k7 (Yellow, Violet, Red) Single EOL (Series Connection)

7 5k6 (Green, Blue, Red) Single EOL (Series Connection)

8 6k8 (Blue, Grey, Red) Single EOL (Series Connection)

9 10k (Brown, Black, Orange) Single EOL (Series Connection)

10 12k (Brown, Red, Orange) Single EOL (Series Connection)

11 22k (Red, Red, Orange) Single EOL (Series Connection)

12 2k2 Tamper, 4k7 Zone Tamper (Series) & Zone (Parallel)

13 3k3 Tamper, 6k8 Zone Tamper (Series) & Zone (Parallel)

14 2k2 Tamper, 4k7 Low Zone, 8k2 High Zone

Tamper (Series) & Zone Doubling (Parallel) Across Lo & Hi Zn Relays

15 4k7 Low Zone, 8k2 High Zone Zone Doubling (Parallel) No tamper


13

Zone Wiring ExamplesZone Wiring ExamplesZone Wiring ExamplesZone Wiring Examples (Electrical Diagrams) (Electrical Diagrams) (Electrical Diagrams) (Electrical Diagrams)

Type 0 (Short/Loop Circuit)Type 0 (Short/Loop Circuit)Type 0 (Short/Loop Circuit)Type 0 (Short/Loop Circuit)

Type 1Type 1Type 1Type 1----11 (Single EOL no Tamper)11 (Single EOL no Tamper)11 (Single EOL no Tamper)11 (Single EOL no Tamper)

EOL Resistor

N/C

N/O

Type 1-11 (Single EOL N/O Tamper)

Type 12Type 12Type 12Type 12----13 (Single Zone with Tamper)13 (Single Zone with Tamper)13 (Single Zone with Tamper)13 (Single Zone with Tamper)

Type 14 (Zone Doubling with Tamper)Type 14 (Zone Doubling with Tamper)Type 14 (Zone Doubling with Tamper)Type 14 (Zone Doubling with Tamper)

4k7 or 6k8

EOL Resistors in Options 1~11 MUST be connected in Series (In-Line) with the Zn Circuit.

The 2k2 & 3k3 Tamper Resistors in Options 12~14 MUST be connected in Series with the Zn Circuit.

The 4k7, 6k8 & 8k2 EOL’s in Options 12~15 MUST be connected in Parallel Across the Alarm (Relay) Contacts of the Detection Device.


14

Additional EOL ExamplesAdditional EOL ExamplesAdditional EOL ExamplesAdditional EOL Examples

Short circuit loop, No EOLShort circuit loop, No EOLShort circuit loop, No EOLShort circuit loop, No EOL

2k2 EOL, No Tamper2k2 EOL, No Tamper2k2 EOL, No Tamper2k2 EOL, No Tamper

Type 12 ConfigurationType 12 ConfigurationType 12 ConfigurationType 12 Configuration

Alarm & Tamper monitoring (contacts can be N/C or N/O).

Type 15 ConfigurationType 15 ConfigurationType 15 ConfigurationType 15 Configuration

Zone Doubling, NO Tamper (contacts can be N/C or N/O).

The 2k2 & 3k3 Tamper Resistors in Options 12~14 MUST be connected in Series with the Zn Circuit.

The 4k7, 6k8 & 8k2 EOL’s in Options 12~15 MUST be connected in Parallel Across the Alarm (Relay) Contacts of the Detection Device.

EOL Resistors in Options 1~11 MUST be connected in Series (In-Line) with the Zn Circuit.


15

Wiring a PIR Detector (N/C) for Alarm & TaWiring a PIR Detector (N/C) for Alarm & TaWiring a PIR Detector (N/C) for Alarm & TaWiring a PIR Detector (N/C) for Alarm & Tamper mper mper mper

MonitoringMonitoringMonitoringMonitoring

Other Inputs Other Inputs Other Inputs Other Inputs

TamperTamperTamperTamper

A 24Hr tamper circuit is available for monitoring Control Panel & Siren Box Tampers. This Tamper

circuit is programmable as either normally closed loop or 2k2 EOL supervision (the default is 2k2

(Series) EOL). Any Tamper alarms on this input are mapped (when system is Armed) to alarm

outputs in the same manner as for detection zones 1-16. Using Three (3) End-of-Line resistors

(Refer to Zone Wiring Type 14 on Page 11) the Tamper input can also provide two Key-Switch

Functions. The Low key-switch (4k7 resistor in Parallel) is Key-switch 1 while the High key-switch

(8k2 resistor in Parallel) is Key-switch 2.

In addition to the Zone & Tamper inputs, you will find the following additional inputs on the

control Panel PCB;

ACACACAC

Connect the two low voltage (16VAC / 1.5A (=25VA)) wires (no polarity) from the Plug Pack

(transformer) to the terminals marked AC on the PCB.

EarthEarthEarthEarth

Connect the mains Earth wire from the Plug Pack (transformer) to the terminal marked with the

Earth symbol (next to AC terminals) on the Control Panel PCB.

BatteryBatteryBatteryBattery

Connect a Sealed Lead Acid Rechargeable 12VDC battery (Max Capacity 7AH) to the Red (+12V)

and Black (-12V) Battery Leads of the control panel. Pay attention to observe the correct polarity.

Battery charge current at these terminals is limited to 260mA maximum. The battery connection

is protected against short circuits by a thermal fuse (F1).

RJ11 Socket (or RJ11 Socket (or RJ11 Socket (or RJ11 Socket (or Line InLine InLine InLine In / Line / Line / Line / Line----OutOutOutOut))))

The Centre pins (3 & 4) of the RJ11 socket or the Line-In terminals are used to connect the panel

to the incoming phone line from the street. The dialler uses this phone line for reporting alarm

events. If there is an ADSL service in the building, an ADSL filter (with Mode-3 capability) will be

required before the RJ11 socket or Line-In terminal.

Pins 2 & 5 of the RJ11 socket or the Line-Out terminals are used to connect telephones and other

communication equipment to the incoming phone line via the panel dialler circuit. The telephone

line is passed through the Control Panel to ensure that the line is available to the Control Panel

when it is required.

16

OutputsOutputsOutputsOutputs

Description of OutputsDescription of OutputsDescription of OutputsDescription of Outputs

12 Volt Outputs12 Volt Outputs12 Volt Outputs12 Volt Outputs

There are three 12VDC outputs on the panel PCB. These 12 volt outputs are regulated and

Thermal fuse protected against short circuits. The accessory outputs are marked 12V and

0V, while the keypad buss 12V supply is labelled “POS” & “NEG”. The 12V outputs are

supplied by thermal fuses F2 & F3. The maximum total load that allowed to be drawn from

all of the 12V outputs during an alarm is 800mA (0.8A).

Outputs 1 & 2Outputs 1 & 2Outputs 1 & 2Outputs 1 & 2

These fully programmable, high current, open drain (high-going-low) type FET outputs

capable of switching up to 750mA (0.75A) @ 12VDC. These 2 outputs are normally set as

switched outputs, providing power for a 12V Siren, Strobe or piezo. If required, these 2

outputs (In the case of the Runner-8, Output-1 Only) can be programmed to be Horn

Speaker outputs (Option-1 On @ P37E 1E or 2E) designed to drive an 8 ohm 10 watt horn

speaker on each output (see P37E option 1). Also if a horn speaker is connected to Output

#1 you may select (Refer to P175E 7E program address) the listen-in feature to this output

as well so that the dialling sequence can be heard at the speaker.

Output 3 & 4Output 3 & 4Output 3 & 4Output 3 & 4

This is a low current, open drain (high-going-low) type FET outputs capable of switching up

to 500mA. Like Outputs 1 & 2, these are fully programmable with the exception being that

Outputs 3 & 4 can Not be programmed to drive a horn speaker.

NOTENOTENOTENOTE

Connecting devices which draw current in excess of 500mA to output 3/4 can

damage the output. Any such damage is Not covered by warranty.

Relay OutRelay OutRelay OutRelay Out

This Relay is related to Output 4 with single pole changeover contacts. If required, the

Common (C) contact of the relay is connected by default to GND via JUMPER, the jumper can

be selected to 12V or removed, which will make the Relay Voltage Free (Dry) Contact.

Keypad PortKeypad PortKeypad PortKeypad Port

The terminals marked POS, NEG, CLOCK, & DATA make up the communications port which

the keypads and other intelligent Runner Accessory devices use to talk to the controller. The

POS*, NEG*, CLOCK, & DATA terminals are connected to corresponding terminals on the

keypads and other intelligent Runner Accessory (remote) devices. The "line" terminal

requires a fifth wire to be connected to the keypad which provides a Dialler (Communicator)

“listen-in” facility. This feature is particularly useful when servicing Phone Line (Dialler

Reporting) faults. The keypad 12V supply (POS*, NEG*) is protected by fuse F3.

(* WARNING: The POS & NEG Power Supply Terminals of the Keypad Buss should NEVER be used to supply

power to devices other than Runner Accessory devices designed to be connected to the panel’s Keypad Buss. Doing so will certainly cause Keypads and other Buss devices to operate erratically and may Damage the Control

Panel. Such Damage is considered Abuse and/or Misuse that may void Warranty).


17

Expansion PortExpansion PortExpansion PortExpansion Port

The expansion port allows connection of the RS232 serial type D-Link Programming Cable,

USB type D-Link Programming Cable, 90 second Voice Board or EEPROM data transfer board

(DTU). The RS232 serial type D-Link or the USB type D-Link Programming Cable allows

direct connection of a PC running the Upload/Download software. The 90 second voice board

allows voice messages to be programmed for ‘Domestic’ Dialler Monitoring purposes. The 90

second voice board also allows Touchtone Code remote control via a telephone. The DTU

allows for program “Cloning” from one panel to another.

18

Accessories Accessories Accessories Accessories

Radio ReceiverRadio ReceiverRadio ReceiverRadio Receiver

The panel can have wireless capability by adding a Wireless Receiver module (such as Crow

Part # AHPW16P for 304MHz AM or AHPW16Q for 433MHz AM or FW-RCV9F 916MHz FM

FreeWave). The Wireless Receiver will allow the panel to Receive Wireless Signals from

Wireless PIR detectors, Wireless Radio-key transmitters, Wireless Magnetic Reed Switch

transmitters, Wireless Smoke Detectors, etc.

The Wireless Receivers connect to the same communications port as the keypads. Multiple

Wireless Receivers can be connected to the panel to increase the coverage range if desired.

The red LED fitted to the Wireless Receiver will flash at 1 second intervals when in "Learn"

mode (see P18E & P164E). The LED will also turn on when it is receiving an actual radio

transmission (On Steady).

Voice BoardVoice BoardVoice BoardVoice Board

The panel can also be fitted with a 90 second Voice Board module. The Voice board stores

either alarm event messages for Voice dial monitoring and /or status messages for use with

Command Control. The 90 second Voice Board module is installed directly onto the Controller

via the SERIAL socket.

Installation procedure for the Voice Board module is as follows.

1. Power-down the panel fully before starting the installation procedure.

2. Carefully plug the Voice Board into the SERIAL socket (it will only fit in one direction).

3. Power-up the panel.

Speech message programming

Once you have installed the Voice Board you can record your personalised speech messages

into the module with the speech programmer (the programmer plugs onto the 10 way strip

connector on the voice board).

Before programming your voice messages you should work out a list of the messages you

would like to be sent for each alarm type and write them down in order, giving them a

message number. These messages should then be recorded in the same order they are

written down so you know what the message number is later when programming alarms to

messages.

To record your messages once the programmer is installed, first press the reset button on

the side of the Voice Board, then hold the programmer about 10 cm away from the mouth

and speak clearly at normal level into the microphone while holding down the "REC" button.

When you reach the end of your message release the REC button. (NOTE: Each individual

message must be longer that 2 seconds duration). When recording your voice alarm

message, you must ensure that you clearly identify the origin of the call. You can play the

message back through the programmer by first pressing the reset button then by pressing

the "PLAY" button momentarily. Because the panel can address many individual voice

messages, you MUST store individual messages at what is known as recording slots within

the Voice Board. These recording slots are recorded sequentially, one message starting

where the other finishes. Every time you press and release the REC button on the

programmer, you create an end of message marker. These markers are used to define the


19

recording slots within the Voice Board and can be of varying length according to each

message duration.

To re-record your messages you MUST first press the "RESET" button on the Voice module to

get back to recording slot # 1. Once you are at slot # 1 you can re-record your messages in

order as required.

NOTENOTENOTENOTE

When recording multiple messages you only press the “RESET” button once at

the beginning then record all messages sequentially as stated above. When

you have finished recording all of your messages you can then press the

“RESET” button to allow play-back of the recorded messages for verification

purposes.

When you have finished recording your alarm messages, unplug the programmer and the

process is complete. You must now go to the program addresses and assign the individual

messages (i.e.: Message Number) to the specific functions.

PW-Reader 2K: For arm/disarm area A and/or B.

The PW-Reader 2K is used for selective arming or disarming Area “A” or “B” or both.

By presenting a valid access tag or card to the reader the user can then Arm or Disarm the

panel using “A” & “B” buttons on the reader.

On presenting a valid tag to the reader, the current status of Areas A & B will be shown on

the two LED’s. The user has 4 seconds to make a new selection before the reader will

timeout and the tag will have to be re-presented again.

The Areas allowed to be controlled by the user must be programmed by the installer in the

Runner control panel. If the user is allowed to fully Arm, Disarm or Stay Arm, then he can

cycle through the various states.

As button “A” or “B” is pressed the associated LED will change to indicate the new state:

For Disarmed state - the LED will be GREEN.

For Armed state - the LED will be RED.

For Stay Mode - LED would be flashing RED.

Four seconds after the last button was pressed the reader will action the new armed status

and the LED will turn off.

If the reader is programmed to allow “1 & 3 PANIC” functions, a “PANIC” alarm will be

generated if “A” & “B” buttons are pressed simultaneously (see P72E option 5).

NOTENOTENOTENOTE

From the disarmed state you can select Armed or Stay modes but if already Armed or in

Stay Mode you MUST disarm first (and allow the reader to timeout) before you can select a

new armed state.


20

PW-Reader FK: Proximity and keypad (PIN) Access Reader.

The PW-Reader FK is used also as an access control reader, when the tag is presented; this

reader combines a proximity reader with a full keypad.

Depending on program options, the reader can operate by a proximity tag or card, by

entering a valid user code (PIN), or by presentation of the tag/card followed by the user

code (PIN).

If the presented tag requires a PIN number to be entered, the LED on the reader will flash

for 5 seconds after a valid tag to indicate that the PIN number should now be entered. There

is also an output available on this reader that follows the same addressing functionality as

described above (Eg: if the Reader is Addressed as Keypad-4, then Output-4 would be the

corresponding Output that needs to be configured).

If the two buttons “PANIC”, “FIRE” or “MEDICAL” functions are programmed to the keypad

(see P72E Options 5,6 & 7) these manual alarms can be generated at the reader by pressing

“1” & “2” for “PANIC”, “3” & “4” for “FIRE” and “5” & “6” for “MEDICAL” alarms.

On each of the three reader types, there is an optional (Orange Wire) input (see drawings on

pages 18~20). This input is not EOL monitored so it should only be used for non-critical

monitoring functions, e.g. monitoring an exterior gate to show if it is currently opened or

closed. A zone can be programmed to use this input for its trigger (see P122E Option 4) so

NOTE-1: NEVER take 12Volt power from the Control Panel to operate an Electric Lock. ALWAYS use a 2

nd (Additional) Power Supply. This will ensure proper system operation and greatly reduce the risk of

system damage due to Excessive Current Draw and EMI Interference (Electromagnetic Interference) and ‘Spikes’. Any such damage will Void the product warranty.

NOTE-2: Although the Reader is capable of operating a Low Current (50mA continuous / 75mA momentary) Electric Lock (per above diagram), it is however recommended to use the Switching Contacts of the optional 4 x Relay Output Board (Crow Part # AHPW16K) for this purpose. Damaged Readers due to Excessive Load Switching will Void warranty.

NOTE-3: The reverse EMF Protection Diode (supplied with the Reader) MUST ALWAYS be fitted Across the Electric Lock in Reverse Polarity (i.e.: the Band at one end of the Diode indicates the ‘Cathode’ (-) end which should be fitted to the +12Volt side of the Electric Lock. The Non-Banded ‘Anode’ (+) end should be fitted to the 0Volt side of the Electric Lock). Failure to fit the diode across the Electric Lock (in Reverse Polarity) will damage both the Reader & Control Panel and Void warranty.


21

that the state of the input can be displayed on a keypad. The inputs are linked to the

selected keypad address programmed into the reader. For example if the reader being used

was programmed as keypad #1, then the input can be assigned to zone 1 or 9 (at location

P122E), if the keypad address was #8, the input can then be assigned to zone 8 or 16.

Also, the LED on reader types 2 & 3 can be linked to an output so that special functions may

be displayed at the reader if desired (see P98E).

Each reader must have a unique keypad address number from 1-8 assigned so that the

various program options can be assigned. This is explained in detail on Page 95-96.

NOTENOTENOTENOTE

The proximity readers flash out the assigned keypad address number on the LED whenever the panel is in “Installer Program” Mode. This allows quick identification of the assigned address for each reader.

NOTE-1: NEVER take 12Volt power from the Control Panel to operate an Electric Lock. ALWAYS use a 2

nd (Additional) Power Supply. This will ensure proper system operation and greatly reduce the risk of

system damage due to Excessive Current Draw and EMI Interference (Electromagnetic Interference) and ‘Spikes’. Any such damage will Void the product warranty.

NOTE-2: Although the Reader is capable of operating a Low Current (50mA continuous / 75mA momentary) Electric Lock (per above diagram), it is however recommended to use the Switching Contacts of the optional 4 x Relay Output Board (Crow Part # AHPW16K) for this purpose. Damaged Readers due to Excessive Load Switching will Void warranty.

NOTE-3: The reverse EMF Protection Diode (supplied with the Reader) MUST ALWAYS be fitted Across the Electric Lock in Reverse Polarity (i.e.: the Band at one end of the Diode indicates the ‘Cathode’ (-) end which should be fitted to the +12Volt side of the Electric Lock. The Non-Banded ‘Anode’ (+) end should be fitted to the 0Volt side of the Electric Lock). Failure to fit the diode across the Electric Lock (in Reverse Polarity) will damage both the Reader & Control Panel and Void warranty.


22

PW-Reader: Proximity Access Reader.

The PW-Reader (without keys) is generally used as an access control reader, although if the

tag is allowed to Arm/Disarm the alarm then this will also happen when the tag is presented.

For access control, if a tag or card is presented to the reader, the associated door lock will

release via an output on the control panel. It is however recommended to use the Switching Contacts of the optional 4 x Relay Output Board (Crow Part # AHPW16K) for this purpose, otherwise, the Reader may be damaged. Damaged Readers due to Excessive Load Switching will Void warranty.

There is also an output at the reader which can be used to unlock the door if desired (see

drawing below for details).

The output number at the reader follows the keypad address number, e.g. if the reader has

been assigned to keypad address 5, the output at the reader will follow all programming

associated with output 5.

Assign the Reader (Refer to Notes-1, 2 & 3 above) After a Reader has been connected to the buss, it has to be assigned an address:

• Enter the “installer mode” in the control panel as described in the installer manual.

• Enter the code P99E followed by the address you wish to assign

(e.g. P99E4E will assign keypad address 4).

• To address the reader you need to present a Card/Tag 5 times within 10 seconds

at the Reader. It is Not necessary for the Card/Tag to be learnt into the panel.

• When the address is learnt, the control panel stops the learn mode automatically.

• Repeat the same steps for every reader address you want to assign.

Warning

If you do not assign a unique address to every keypad and reader connected to the keypad buss, a conflict will exist that will cause erratic operation. Each reader or keypad MUST have a different address.

NOTENOTENOTENOTE

The proximity and arming readers flash out the assigned keypad address number on their LED whenever the panel is in “Installer Program” Mode. This allows quick identification of the assigned address for each reader.


23

Card/Tag Learning A Card/Tag has to first be enrolled into the system before it will work.

All Cards/Tags are assigned to users. Therefore, a User that has both a PIN and a Card/Tag

assigned to them will be able to perform similar functions with both the PIN or Card/Tag.

(Eg: if user 11 is assigned to area A, then Card/Tag number 11 will be assigned to area A

as well).

Entre the “Installers Mode” (as described on page-65 of installer manual).

Enter P21E and the ‘User’ (Card/Tag) number you wish to enrol, i.e. 11E for Card/Tag

number 11:

The keypad will start to beep to indicate that learn mode has been started.

Present the Card/Tag to the READER:

once the Card/Tag has been read and stored in the Control Panel, the READER will stop

beeping to indicate learn mode is completed.

After the ‘Learning’ process is complete, in order to enable the Card/Tag operation, you

MUST select the appropriate ‘User Type’ (options 2 or 3 or 4 must be selected for the

Card/Tag to work) at location P2E then the ‘User’ (Card/Tag) number then E (Eg: P2E 11E

for User-11 then select either type 2 or 3 or 4 then press Entre to accept). See page-56.

DELETE an ACCESS TAG/CARD CODE DELETE an ACCESS TAG/CARD CODE - P22E 1-100E

If you wish to delete a single Access Tag or Card, pressing P22E then the User number

while in Program Mode will delete the stored code against that User, eg P22E 11E will

remove the tag or Card stored for User 11 (See page-64).

FIND an ACCESS TAG/CARD LOCATION

FIND an ACCESS TAG/CARD LOCATION - P23E 0E

If you have an Access Tag or Card loaded into the panel but are unsure which location (User

#), pressing P22E (then 0E on an LED Keypad) while in Program Mode will start “Find”

Mode. There is no need to press 0E when using an LCD keypad because the keypad will give

you written prompts after entering P22E. The keypad will start to beep to indicate that

“Find” mode has been started. Now present the Access Tag or Card you wish to find to a

proximity reader connected to the panel. If the Tag or Card is in memory the keypad will

display the number where the Tag or Card is stored (a number from 1-100). The keypad

will stop beeping once the memory location has been found (See page-64).

Assign Chirps to Access Tags

AREA OPTIONS “B” - P46E 1-2E – Option 4

If the panel is being Armed or Disarmed by an Access Tag/Card from a proximity reader, it

is possible to link the pendant chirps programming (P50E-P53E) to Arming or Disarming via

the Access Tag or Card. If this option is On, the chirps will apply to Access Tag/Cards. If the

chirps are required to be displayed at the reader LED, the minimum pulse timer for the

output (P39E) must be a value of 10 (See page-78).


24

Proximity Reader Led To Output Mapping PROXIMITY READER LED to OUTPUT MAPPING - P98E 1-8E

Option 1 - Proximity Reader 1-8 LED follows Output 1








If a proximity reader is connected to the control panel, it may be desirable to have the

Reader LED provide some form of indication such as Arm/Disarm state, etc. By using this

location it is possible to link the LED at a reader number to follow the programming of an

output. The LED can be used to indicate Arm/Disarm state, Stay Mode Arm/disarm, output

On/Off, etc. If chirps have been assigned to access tags/cards (P46E4E) and the output the

reader LED is set to follow has the chirps assigned (P50E-P53E), then the output must have

a minimum pulse time (P39E) of 10 for it to work correctly.

The proximity reader keypad address number is set at P99E as detailed below.

Assign Zone to Reader

ZONE OPTIONS A - P122E 1-16E Option 4: Keypad Zone

If this option is on, the Zone will follow the Input at the corresponding Proximity Reader. If

the Proximity Reader is set to Keypad # 1, the input will be either zone 1 or zone 9, eg if

P122E1E (zone #1) had option 4 on then the input at reader one will operate zone 1. If

P122E9E (zone #9) had option 4 on then the input at reader one will operate zone 9.

Proximity reader 1 can operate zones 1 or 9 through to proximity reader 8 can operate

zones 8 or 16 (See page-99).

25

Night Night Night Night Arm Station (Arm Station (Arm Station (Arm Station (Monitor KeypadMonitor KeypadMonitor KeypadMonitor Keypad))))

The Night Arm Station (Monitor Keypad) is designed to be a simple night arming station

typically used in a bedroom situation.

By pressing either of the <Night Monitor> buttons the alarm Stay Mode can be armed or

disarmed. If both buttons are pressed simultaneously, a Panic Alarm can be generated. A 4

way DIP switch on the rear of the unit sets various options. The DIP switch functions and the

programming requirements are detailed below.

The Night Arm Station (Monitor keypad) can be set to keypad addresses 5-8 by using

Switches 1 & 2. Refer to chart below

DIP Switch ��

1 2

KP No: 5 OFF OFF

KP No: 6 ON OFF

KP No: 7 OFF ON

KP No: 8 ON ON

Switch 3 is unused when the Night Arm Station is used with the Runner 8/16. It is used to

force the armed LED to follow area A or B on other control panels.

Switch 4 MUST be OFF when using the Night Arm Station with the Runner (if Switch 4 is ON,

the unit will only work with earlier version (V4 & V5) of the PW-16 control panels).


26

Night Night Night Night Arm Station ‘Stay’ Mode Arm Station ‘Stay’ Mode Arm Station ‘Stay’ Mode Arm Station ‘Stay’ Mode Panel ProgrammingPanel ProgrammingPanel ProgrammingPanel Programming

The Night Arm Station ‘Monitor’ button is designed to arm or disarm Stay Mode. The Stay

Mode Area is assigned to the keypad at location P76E (See page-88).

The functions of the button are programmed at location P77E (eg for the button to Arm Stay

Mode and be able to Disarm Stay Mode at all times you must have options 2 & 4 ON).

The “ARMED” LED function is programmed at location P71E. For example if the Night Arm

Station (Monitor keypad) is only assigned to area A and you only want the Armed LED to

show the status of area A, you should turn on Option 1 (Area A) at location P71E for the

address assigned to the Night Arm Station (Monitor Keypad).

If both Night Monitor buttons are pressed simultaneously, it is possible to generate a

“PANIC” alarm. To enable the panic alarm function for the keypad number assigned, you

must have option 3 turned on at location P72E.


27

Keypad IndicatorsKeypad IndicatorsKeypad IndicatorsKeypad Indicators

LED KeypadLED KeypadLED KeypadLED Keypad

Standard Runner 8/16LED Keypad Window Layout

When the Panel is displaying codes and address values in program mode it may be

necessary to display the 0 digit. As there is no Zone indicator for 0 the "AUX (0)" indicator is

used to show the number “0”.

The Chart below gives details on the various indicators on the LED keypad and what they

mean.

LIGHT\INDICATION

��

OFF ON STEADY FLASHING

READY Zone Unsealed All Zones Sealed -

MEMORY Normal Memory Display Mode New Memory Event

BYPASS Bypass Off Zone Bypass Mode

Active

Zone/s Bypassed

PROGRAM Run Mode Client Program Mode Installer Program Mode or

Control Function Active

AUX (0) Chime Mode ON Chime Mode OFF -

MAINS - Mains (AC) OK Mains (AC) Fail

BATTERY - Battery OK Battery Low

TROUBLE Normal Trouble (Tamper) Alarm

Active

New Trouble (Tamper) Alarm

LINE Telephone line is OK Dialler is currently

making a call

The Telephone line has been

cut or the call was not completed

CONTROL Control Function OFF Control Mode On


28

LIGHT\INDICATION

��

OFF ON STEADY FLASHING

ZONES 1-16 Zone Secure Zone Unsealed (Not Ready)

Zone in Alarm

ARMED A Partition A Disarmed Partition A Armed Partition A Stay Mode

ARMED B Partition B Disarmed Partition B Armed Partition B Stay Mode

ARMED C Spare

ARMED D Spare

RunnerRunnerRunnerRunner LCD KEYPAD LCD KEYPAD LCD KEYPAD LCD KEYPAD

CROW BIG LCD

CROW SMALL LCD


29

The table below gives details on the various LED indicators on the keypad and what they

mean.

LIGHT\INDICATION

��

OFF

ON STEADY

FLASHING

READY Zone Unsealed All Zones Sealed -

TROUBLE Normal Trouble (Tamper)

Alarm

Active

New Trouble (Tamper)

Alarm

BYPASS Bypass Off Zone Bypass Mode

Active

Zone/s Bypassed

ARMED A Partition A or B

Disarmed

Partition A or B Armed

STAY STAY Disarmed STAY Armed

Keypad Memory Display Keypad Memory Display Keypad Memory Display Keypad Memory Display ---- LED Keypad LED Keypad LED Keypad LED Keypad

Current Alarm Systems When viewing the memory event buffer at the keypad by pressing the “MEMORY�” button, the first thing that will always be displayed are any Current System Alarms that are active.

The Current System Alarms are indicated by the Memory/Mains & Battery LEDS being on

plus a zone LED from 1-8 to indicate the system alarm/s present. If no Zone LED’s are on at

this time, it means that there are no current system alarms. If a zone LED or LED’s are On

then this indicates system alarms that have not yet cleared. The zone LED’s 1-8 are pre-

defined as to what system alarm they will display. These system alarm indications are shown

in the table below. Following the display of current system alarms the panel will then

sequence through the 255 historical memory events starting at the most recent event.

CURRENT SYSTEM ALARMS

LED # 1 Battery Low LED # 5 Radio Pendant Battery Low

LED # 2 Mains, 12V Fuse or Output

Failure LED # 6 Supervised Detector Failure

LED # 3 Telephone Line Failure LED # 7 Sensor Watch or Delinquency Alarm

LED # 4 Radio Detector Battery Low LED # 8 Dialler Kiss-off Failure

HISTORICAL MEMORY EVENTS Following the “Current System Alarms” the panel will display the historical memory events.

The panel stores the most recent events, (up to 255), including all alarm events, all system

events such as mains failure etc as well as arming by Area. The memory events are

displayed via the standard keypad with the most recent event shown first and subsequent

events following in descending order from newest to oldest.


30

The "MEMORY" light will be on while the memory display mode is active. To view events simply press the “MEMORY�” button. The keypad will beep and the display is advanced to the next event every time the “MEMORY�” button is pressed. When all events in memory have been displayed, the keypad will exit memory mode and return to the normal idle state.

To cancel the memory display just press “ENTER”. If the “ENTER” button is not pressed and

the display mode is not advanced to the last memory event, the keypad will automatically

exit memory display mode after approximately 20 seconds. The memory light will turn off

once the memory display mode has been exited. The MEMORY LED flashes when there is a

new event in memory and it will stop flashing once the event has been viewed or the panel

is armed.

The Chart below gives details on the various alarms and what LED indicators are used to display them.

HISTORICAL EVENT DISPLAY CHART

EVENT DEVICE INDICATOR STATUS

ACTIVATION Zones 1-16 LED's 1-16 On Steady

BYPASS Zones 1-16 BYPASS

LED's 1-16

On Steady

On Steady

DETECTOR TAMPER

(SHORT CIRCUIT)

Zones 1-8 TROUBLE

LED's 1-8

Flashing

On Steady

DETECTOR TAMPER

(OPEN CIRCUIT)

Zones 9-16 TROUBLE

LED's 9-16

Flashing

On Steady

CABINET TAMPER Cabinet or Siren TROUBLE Flashing

WRONG CODE ALARM

Code Tamper at

Keypad #

TROUBLE

LED’s 1-8

Flashing

On Steady

CROW KEYPAD TAMPER

SWITCH ACTIVATED

Keypad Tamper Alarm at

Keypad #

TROUBLE

LED’s 1-8

On Steady

On Steady

LED KEYPAD VIEW MEMORY MODE cont

HISTORICAL EVENT DISPLAY CHART-Continued


LOW BATTERY Controller Battery BATTERY Flashing

MAINS FAILURE Controller Mains

Supply

MAINS Flashing

12V Output FAILURE (F2 or

F3)

Controller on-board

Thermal fuses activated

MAINS

LED 1

Flashing

On Steady

OUTPUT 1 or 2 FAIL

(Only applies if siren or strobe

connected)

Wires to Output 1 or 2

have been cut

LED’s 1 or 2

TROUBLE

MAINS

On Steady

On Steady

On Steady


31



LOW BATTERY-ZONE

(Wireless detector)

Radio Zone

Zone 1-16

BATTERY

LED's 1-16

Flashing

On Steady

LOW BATTERY-PENDANT

(wireless Transmitter)

Radio Key

User 21-100

BATTERY

LINE

CONTROL

Flashing

Flashing

On Steady

SENSORWATCH TIMEOUT Zone 1-16 LED’s 1-16

TROUBLE

CONTROL

On Steady

Flashing

Flashing

SUPERVISED RADIO TIMEOUT Zone 1-16 LED’s 1-16

TROUBLE

BYPASS

On Steady

Flashing

Flashing

RF FAILURE No RF Activity TROUBLE

AUX (0)

Flashing

Flashing

ARM DELINQUENCY ALARM Area A or B not armed

within programmed number of days

TROUBLE

CONTROL

Flashing

Flashing

DURESS ALARM Duress Alarm

(at Keypad #)

TROUBLE

LINE

LED’s 1-8

Flashing

Flashing

On Steady

KEYPAD PANIC Panic Alarm at Keypad LINE

LED’s 1-8

Flashing

Flashing

PENDANT PANIC Radio Panic Alarm LINE Flashing

KEYPAD FIRE Fire Alarm at Keypad LINE

CONTROL

LED’s 1-8

Flashing

Flashing

On Steady

KEYPAD MEDICAL Medical Alarm at

Keypad

LINE

BYPASS

LED’s 1-8

Flashing

Flashing

On Steady

ARMED Area "A" Armed "A" On Steady

ARMED Area "B" Armed "B" On Steady

STAY MODE ON Area "A" in Stay Mode "A" Flashing

STAY MODE ON Area "B" in Stay Mode "B" Flashing

TELEPHONE LINE FAIL Panel Dialler LINE On Steady

EXCESSIVE RE-TRIES Panel Dialler LINE

LED 1

On Steady

On Steady


32



FAILURE TO GET A KISSOFF Panel Dialler LINE

LED 2

On Steady

On Steady

WALKTEST MODE Manual Walk-test

Mode

MAINS

BATTERY

LINE

LED’s 1-16

On Steady

On Steady

On Steady

On Steady

LCD KEYPAD LCD KEYPAD LCD KEYPAD LCD KEYPAD

LCD Keypad View Memory ModeLCD Keypad View Memory ModeLCD Keypad View Memory ModeLCD Keypad View Memory Mode

The LCD Keypad has similar operational functions to the LED keypad with one notable

exception, when displaying Memory Events in “Memory Mode” it will display the events using

plain text messages with the Time & date that the event occurred.

This makes the fault diagnosis much easier. On an LED keypad only the ARM indications are

displayed (the disarm is removed from the display) but with the LCD keypad, all events can

be displayed (including when the system was disarmed and by which user).

To access “Memory Mode” using the LCD keypad, press the “MEMORY�” button.

There are two parts to the Memory Display Mode:

CURRENT SYSTEM ALARMS If there are any current “SYSTEM” alarms, they will be displayed first under the heading of

“CURRENT ALARMS”.

There are up to 8 “system alarms” that can be displayed at this point. They are listed in the

“Current System Alarms” table on page 29. The current system alarms will be displayed in

plain text to describe the actual problem. If there is more than one current problem the

keypad will display event alarm sequentially with the heading of “CURRENT ALARMS” on the

top line and the alarm on the bottom line.

Each time the “MEMORY�” button is pressed, the next alarm will be displayed.

If there are no system problems with the panel the display will show “NO FAULTS”.

When all current system alarms have been displayed the keypad will then start to show the

historical memory events.

HISTORICAL MEMORY EVENTS Following the “Current System Alarms” the panel will display the historical memory events.

The panel stores the most recent events, (up to 255), including all alarm events, all system

events such as mains failure etc as well as arm/disarm by User & Area. The memory events

are displayed via the LCD keypad with the most recent event shown first and subsequent

events following in descending order from newest to oldest.

During the “Historical Memory Event” display mode the LCD display will show the type of

event on the top line eg “Area A armed by User 1” and the actual time and date that the

event occurred on the bottom line.

To view events simply press the “MEMORY�” button. The keypad will beep and the display is advanced to the next event every time the “MEMORY�” button is pressed.

If you wish to go back and look at an earlier event you can use the “�” or “STAY�” buttons to go back to an earlier event. Each time the Down arrow is pressed the memory will go

back one event.


33

When all events in memory have been displayed the keypad will exit memory mode and

return to the normal idle state. To cancel the memory display just press “ENTER”.

If the “ENTER” button is not pressed and the display mode is not advanced to the last

memory event, the keypad will automatically exit memory display mode after approximately

20 seconds.

When there is a new event in memory the words “ NEW MEM EVENT” will be shown on the

LCD display.

The “ NEW MEM EVENT” display will be reset once the event has been viewed or the panel is

armed.

34

Keypad Address Assignment & Keypad Address Assignment & Keypad Address Assignment & Keypad Address Assignment &

InstallationInstallationInstallationInstallation

LED KeypadLED KeypadLED KeypadLED Keypad


To separate the two keypad halves of the Crow Slim-line LED Keypad, unscrew the

fastening screw at the bottom of the keypad.

Screw the base to the wall using the mounting holes provided. These holes will match the

standard single switch plate spacing. Ensure the base is mounted right side up. The screw

should be at the bottom on the Crow keypad base. When fixing the base to the wall make

sure the top of the screw heads will not touch or short out the underside of the PCB when

the top half of the keypad is reinstalled. Bring the cables through the centre of the base.

Connect the 4 wires to the 5 way terminal block on the rear of the keypad PCB making sure

to match the cables up with the terminals as marked on the control panel's keypad port. The

5th wire is an optional “Listen-in“ connection. It is connected from the "LIN" terminal of the

keypad to the "Lin" terminal of the panel keypad port. With the Listen-in wire connected the

user to hear the call progress during dialling at the keypad (provided the desired program

options at address P175E 6E are turned on).

Once the cables have been terminated and the required address allocated (see section

below) fit the front half of the keypad onto the base.

The maximum recommended cable using standard 0.2mm security cable is 50m. Cable runs

exceeding this distance may require 0.5mm cable. Always use good quality cable. Some

installations may require CAT5 data cable to ensure data integrity in noisy sites.

LLLLEDEDEDED Keypad Address Assignment Keypad Address Assignment Keypad Address Assignment Keypad Address Assignment

A total of 8 devices (keypads or proximity readers) can be connected to the panel. Each

keypad must be addressed individually to avoid BUSS conflicts when multiple users are

operating different keypads simultaneously. By default, each keypad comes addressed as KP

# 1.

Setting the LED keypad address is done in “Local Program Mode”.

To enter “Local Program Mode” on the LED Keypad you must press and hold the

<CONTROL> button down and then Immediately press and hold the <BYPASS> button.

The “PROGRAM” LED will turn on plus the current keypad address will be displayed on the

zone LED’s.

The default setting is address 1 so zone LED 1 will also be on.

To change the keypad address so that it is different to others connected to the panel, press a

number on the keypad from 1-8 relating to the address you wish to assign to the keypad,

e.g. if the keypad is the second one connected to the panel and the other keypad is set to

address 1, press 2 to select keypad address 2 for this keypad. The selected address will be

displayed on the zone LED’s (in this example LED 2 would be on).

To Exit “Local Program Mode” press the <ENTER> Button.

35

The “PROGRAM” LED will turn off and the display will return to normal with the mains &

battery LED’s on.

If you do not assign a unique address to every keypad and reader connected to the

keypad buss, a conflict will exist that will cause erratic operation. Each reader or

keypad MUST have a different address.

Led Keypad Tamper SwitchLed Keypad Tamper SwitchLed Keypad Tamper SwitchLed Keypad Tamper Switch

Some LED keypads may have a tamper switch fitted. If the switch is fitted, the tamper

monitoring is inhibited until the tamper switch is closed for the first time. After that if the

switch is opened, a keypad tamper alarm will be generated. If the keypad has provision for a

tamper switch but the switch is not fitted, the keypad tamper alarm will be permanently

inhibited because it can never be closed to start the tamper monitoring.

LCD KEYPAD LCD KEYPAD LCD KEYPAD LCD KEYPAD


To separate the two keypad halves of the Crow LCD Keypads, unscrew the fastening screw

at the bottom of the keypad.

Screw the base to the wall using the mounting holes provided. These holes will match the

standard single switch plate spacing. Ensure the base is mounted right side up. The screw

should be at the bottom on the Crow keypad base. When fixing the base to the wall make

sure the top of the screw heads will not touch or short out the underside of the PCB when

the top half of the keypad is reinstalled. Bring the cables through the centre of the base.

Connect the 4 wires to the 5 way terminal block on the rear of the keypad PCB making sure

to match the cables up with the terminals as marked on the control panel's keypad port. The

5th wire is an optional “Listen-in“ connection. It is connected from the "LIN" terminal of the

keypad to the "Lin" terminal of the panel keypad port. With the Listen-in wire connected, the

user will be able to hear the call progress during dialling at the keypad (provided the desired

program options at address P175E 6E are turned on).

Once the cables have been terminated clip the front half of the keypad onto the base.

The maximum recommended cable using standard 0.2mm security cable is 50m. Cable runs

exceeding this distance may require 0.5mm cable. Always use good quality cable. Some

installations may require CAT5 data cable to ensure data integrity in noisy sites.

LCD Keypad Address AssignmentLCD Keypad Address AssignmentLCD Keypad Address AssignmentLCD Keypad Address Assignment

A total of 8 devices (keypads or proximity readers) can be connected to the panel. Each

keypad must be addressed individually to avoid BUSS conflicts when multiple users are

operating different keypads simultaneously. By default, each keypad comes addressed as KP

# 1.

Setting the LCD keypad address is done in “Local Program Mode”.

Accessing “Local Program Mode” :

To enter “Local Program Mode” on the Crow LCD Keypad you must press and hold the

<CONTROL> button down and Immediately press and hold the <ARM> button.

When in Local Program Mode the display will show local mode kb 1 with the number 1

meaning the keypad address is currently 1.

To change the keypad address to be different to others connected on the panel, press;

<PROGRAM> 996 <ENTER>

The display will now show;

36

Keypad number 1

Select an unused address, e.g. “2” then press <ENTER> to save.

To exit “Local Program Mode” press and hold the <PROGRAM> Button for two seconds or

press the <Program> Button until the LCD Display says ‘Exit Programming’, then press

Enter.

You can select the program location directly as shown above or there is also a menu function

to navigate the various options in “Local Edit Mode” that is described in detail on page 37.

If you do not assign a unique address to every keypad and reader connected to the

keypad buss, a conflict will exist that will cause erratic operation. Each reader or

keypad MUST have a different address.

Adjusting Backlighting and Buzzer ToneAdjusting Backlighting and Buzzer ToneAdjusting Backlighting and Buzzer ToneAdjusting Backlighting and Buzzer Tone

Adjusting the LCD Keypad BacklightingAdjusting the LCD Keypad BacklightingAdjusting the LCD Keypad BacklightingAdjusting the LCD Keypad Backlighting

The user can independently adjust the backlight level of the LCD display and the Keypad

Buttons from off to on with 16 steps in between. The Buttons used for these special

functions vary depending on the LCD keypad.

To increase the Crow LCD backlight level Press “CONTROL” followed within 2 seconds by

“STAY”. By holding down the “Control” button and repeatedly pressing the “STAY (Left

Arrow)” button you can increase the LCD backlight level to the maximum.

To reduce the Crow LCD backlight level Press “CONTROL” followed within 2 seconds by

“BYPASS”. By holding down the “Control” button and repeatedly pressing the “BYPASS (Right

Arrow)” button you can decrease the LCD backlight level until it is off.

To increase the Crow Keypad Button backlight level Press “CONTROL” followed within 2

seconds by “MEM�”. By holding down the “CONTROL” button and repeatedly pressing the “MEM� (Up Arrow)” button you can increase the Keypad LED backlight level to the maximum.

To reduce the Crow Keypad Button backlight level Press “CONTROL” followed within 2

seconds by “�”. By holding down the “CONTROL” button and repeatedly pressing the “� (Down Arrow)” button you can decrease the Keypad LED backlight level until it is off.

Adjusting the Keypad Buzzer ToneAdjusting the Keypad Buzzer ToneAdjusting the Keypad Buzzer ToneAdjusting the Keypad Buzzer Tone

The user can adjust the frequency (tone) of the LCD keypad buzzer within a range of 16 steps. By adjusting the frequency the volume of the tone produced at the buzzer varies as well.

To increase the frequency of the CROW LCD buzzer Press “CONTROL” followed within 2

seconds by “A”. By holding down the “CONTROL” button and repeatedly pressing the “A”

button you can increase the frequency of the buzzer tone.

To decrease the frequency of the CROW LCD buzzer Press “CONTROL” followed within

2 seconds by “B”. By holding down the “CONTROL” button and repeatedly pressing the “B”

button you can decrease the frequency of the buzzer tone.

37

LCD Keypad “Local Edit” ModeLCD Keypad “Local Edit” ModeLCD Keypad “Local Edit” ModeLCD Keypad “Local Edit” Mode

LCD Keypad LCD Keypad LCD Keypad LCD Keypad

The Local Edit Program Mode allows the programming of a customised “System Name” (the

name displayed during idle mode at the keypad), Customised “Zone Names” (the text that

appears on the keypad when a zone is unsealed), Customised “User Names” (the User name

will appear when viewing arm/disarm events in memory mode), Customised “Area Names”

(the Area name will appear when viewing arm/disarm events in memory mode) and

Customised “Output Names” (the Output name will appear when viewing Output On/Off

events in memory mode).

Accessing LAccessing LAccessing LAccessing Local Edit Modeocal Edit Modeocal Edit Modeocal Edit Mode

To enter Local Edit Program Mode on a CROW LCD Keypad Press “CONTROL” followed

Immediately by “ARM” and Hold BOTH down for 5 seconds.

NOTENOTENOTENOTE

You must press and Hold the “Control” button first followed Immediately by

Holding Down the “Arm” button on the LCD keypad for 5 seconds or the

“Bypass” button on the LED keypad for 5 seconds. If you make a mistake,

press the “Enter” button then repeat the process.

The display will now show “Local Mode kb #” where the # equals the keypad address as

previously set (see “LCD keypad address assignment” on page 33 for details). There are two

ways to program the keypad in “Local Edit Mode”. You can enter in the program location

directly from the list below or you can use the menu function to navigate through all of the

program options. The menus are described on the following pages.


38

Local Edit Mode Direct Program AddressesLocal Edit Mode Direct Program AddressesLocal Edit Mode Direct Program AddressesLocal Edit Mode Direct Program Addresses

There are a number of program addresses available to you at this point. They are;

[PROG]-[1]-[ENTER] to; ZONE#1 TEXT (maximum 16 characters)

[PROG]-[16]-[ENTER] ZONE#16 TEXT

[PROG]-[800]-[ENTER] UPDATE EDITABLE TEXT TO ALL LCD KEYPADS

[PROG]-[801]-[ENTER] RETURN ALL EDITABLE TEXT TO DEFAULT

[PROG]-[995]-[ENTER] PANEL TYPE

[PROG]-[996]-[ENTER] SET KEYPAD ADDRESS NUMBER FROM 1-8

[PROG]-[997]-[ENTER] KEYPAD LANGUAGE

[PROG]-[998]-[ENTER] AREA IDENTIFYING CHARACTER (assigning numbers

or letters to Areas)

[PROG]-[999]-[ENTER] PANEL NAME DISPLAY (maximum 16 characters)

PROG]-[1001]-[ENTER] to; PROGRAM USER “1” NAME

PROG]-[1100]-[ENTER] PROGRAM USER “100” NAME

[PROG]-[2001]-[ENTER] AREA “A” IDENTIFYING NAME (maximum 16 character

Area name)

[PROG]-[2002]-[ENTER] AREA “B” IDENTIFYING NAME (maximum 16 character

Area name)

PROG]-[3001]-[ENTER] to; PROGRAM OUTPUT “1” NAME

PROG]-[3008]-[ENTER] PROGRAM OUTPUT “8” NAME

Keypad Tamper SwitchKeypad Tamper SwitchKeypad Tamper SwitchKeypad Tamper Switch

Some LCD keypads may have a tamper switch fitted. If the switch is fitted, the tamper

monitoring is inhibited until the tamper switch is closed for the first time. After that if the

switch is opened, a keypad tamper alarm will be generated. If the keypad has provision for a

tamper switch but the switch is not fitted, the keypad tamper alarm will be permanently

inhibited because it can never be closed to start the tamper monitoring. In the Runner

Version 9.08+, the Keypad Tamper can be Disabled in the programming by Turning-OFF

Option-7 (enable keypad tamper) at P25E 13E.

However, in some cases the keypad tamper may still activate due to uneven mounting

surface or if the buttons are pressed in a heavy handed fashion causing some movement in

the keypad. In these cases, it may be necessary to 1)- power-down the Runner panel and

remove the keypad off the wall. 2)- Break-off the vertical plastic arm (tab) that pushes

against the keypad tamper switch. 3)- You will need to also remove the grey rubber hood

that sits over the tamper switch. 4)- Re-assemble the keypad back on to the wall.

5)- Power-up the panel. The keypad tamper should not activate again unless something

mechanical pushes against the tamper switch again.


39

LCD KEYPAD “LOCAL EDIT” MODE MENU PROGRAMMING

The LCD Keypad Main menu headings for “Local Edit” program mode are listed on this page.

On entering Local Edit Mode, the display will look like the example below.

To move to the next menu heading simply press the �arrow. To move back to the previous heading simply press the �Arrow.

40

When you are at the desired main menu heading, press <ENTER> to access the data

program location. See example below

Changing the Area SinglChanging the Area SinglChanging the Area SinglChanging the Area Single Character Identifiere Character Identifiere Character Identifiere Character Identifier

When you enter in [PROG]-[998]-[ENTER] the display will look like the example above.

You may edit the single character Area identifier at this address starting at Area “A” (first

left-hand position). The keypad allows for up to 16 areas but the actual number of areas

supported on this panel is two. The first character (in this case the ”A”) is the identifier used

to show the status of the first Area when armed. The second position (in this case the “B”) is

the identifier used to show the status of the second Area.

41

If you preferred to have the first area shown as Area “1” and not “A” then you can change it

here using the same method as used previously. With the cursor underneath the letter “A”, Press the “1” button four times until the character in the first slot shows “1”.

When you are happy with the changes Press the <ENTER> button to save the changes.

Changing the Zone NamesChanging the Zone NamesChanging the Zone NamesChanging the Zone Names

When in “Local Edit Program Mode” and you have entered {PROG}-[1]-[ENTER], the display

will look like this;

The Cursor will be underneath the first letter to be edited (in this case the “Z”).

The letters <A..Z> indicate that the letters selected by the numeric buttons (0-9) will be in

capitals.

By pressing the “MEM�” button once, the display will change to <a..z> indicating that the letters selected by the numeric buttons (0-9) will be lower case.

By pressing the “MEM�” button again, the display will change to <ג..ד> indicating that Hebrew characters can be selected by the numeric buttons (0-9).

You can cycle back to another selection by pressing the “�” button.

Once you have selected the desired font, you can now proceed to change the text for Zone

1.

The following table shows the English Characters that can be selected by each numeric

button.

The lower case options are shown in ( )

▼Button # 1st Press 2nd Press 3rd Press 4th Press

1 * (‘) # (<) = (>) 1

2 A (a) B (b) C (c) 2

3 D (d) E (e) F (f) 3

4 G (g) H (h) I (i) 4

5 J (j) K (k) L (l) 5

6 M (m) N (n) O (o) 6

7 P (p) Q (q) R (r) 7

8 S (s) T (t) U (u) 8

9 V (v) W (w) X (x) 9

0 Blank Y (y) Z (z) 0

There are four different selections per button. By pressing the button once, a character will

appear in the display (see “1st press” column above) . Pressing the same button again will

cause the display to change to the next character in the sequence (see “2nd press” column).

After you have pressed the same button four times the next press (5th) will cause the

display to wrap back to the beginning.

42

Once you have selected the first character, Press the “� BYPASS” button to move the cursor one position to the right.

Now select the second character and move the cursor to the right repeating the process until

all of the text is completed (Remember that there are a maximum of 16 characters per

program address).

If you make a mistake use the “STAY” button to move the cursor towards the left and make any corrections.

When you are happy with the text Press “ENTER” to save the changes. You can program the

text for all zones in the same way.

Changing the Keypad ArChanging the Keypad ArChanging the Keypad ArChanging the Keypad Area Nameea Nameea Nameea Name

When you enter [PROG]-[2001]-[ENTER] the display will look like the example above. You may edit the Area Name at this location. The area name can be up to 16 characters long. If you program in a name for the area, this name will appear when displaying events in memory display mode.

When you are happy with the changes Press the “ENTER” button to save the changes.

Changing the Keypad NameChanging the Keypad NameChanging the Keypad NameChanging the Keypad Name

When you enter [PROG]-[999]-[ENTER] the display will look like the example above. You may enter any name you wish up to 16 characters in length (using the same method as described for zone names). This name is displayed at the keypad in Idle mode.

When you are happy with the changes Press “ENTER” to save.

Changing the User NamesChanging the User NamesChanging the User NamesChanging the User Names

When in “Local Edit Program Mode” and you have entered {PROG}-[1001]-[ENTER], the display will look like this;

You can now enter in the persons name (maximum of 16 characters). When viewing events in “Memory” mode, the User name will appear to identify who the user was that Armed/Disarmed the system.

When you are happy with the changes Press <ENTER> to save.

Changing the Output NamesChanging the Output NamesChanging the Output NamesChanging the Output Names

When in “Local Edit Program Mode” and you have entered [PROG]-[3001]-[ENTER], the display will look like this;

You can now enter an Output name (maximum of 16 characters). When viewing events in

“Memory” mode, the Output name will appear to identify what function the Output is

controlling.

43

When you are happy with the changes Press “ENTER” to save.

Resetting Individual Text to Default or Last Saved SettingResetting Individual Text to Default or Last Saved SettingResetting Individual Text to Default or Last Saved SettingResetting Individual Text to Default or Last Saved Setting

While in “Local Edit Mode” there are two special functions that can be performed at any of

the “Local Edit” Program locations. They are “Return to Default Text” or “Return to

Previously Saved Text”.

For Example, to Return the Zone 1 text back to Defaults;

If during the programming of Zone 1 text [PROG]-[1]-[ENTER] you wished to return back to

the default text, simply Press and hold the “B” button for 2 seconds, and the text will return

to the default settings.

If you wished to return to the last saved version of the text simply Press and hold the “A”

button for 2 seconds and the last saved text for zone one will appear.

NOTE: If the last saved version of text for Zone 1 was in fact the default setting, then pressing “Control” then “1” or “A” will return the default text anyway.

Resetting All Text to DefaultResetting All Text to DefaultResetting All Text to DefaultResetting All Text to Default

While in “Local Edit Mode” it is possible to restore all of the customisable text fields to the

factory default settings.

When you enter in [PROG]-[801]-[ENTER] display will prompt you to press [801]-

[ENTER] again. Once you have pressed “801 enter”, all customisable text (for example,

zone names, user names, output names, etc) will be returned to the default text.

Copying Text to Another LCD KeypadCopying Text to Another LCD KeypadCopying Text to Another LCD KeypadCopying Text to Another LCD Keypad

If more than one LCD keypad is connected to the panel, it is possible to copy the edited Text

from one LCD keypad to all other LCD keypads connected to the same panel.

When you enter in [PROG]-[800]-[ENTER], all of the customisable text at the keypad will

be transferred to all other LCD keypads connected to the control panel.

There is also an alternative method to transfer the text. Pressing the “CHIME” button for 2

seconds while in “Local Edit Mode” will perform the transfer. The text in your keypad will be

transferred to all other LCD keypads connected to the panel.

Exiting Local Edit Program ModeExiting Local Edit Program ModeExiting Local Edit Program ModeExiting Local Edit Program Mode

Press and hold the <PROGRAM> button for 2 seconds and the LCD keypad will exit Local Edit

Mode and return to Idle Mode or; Press the <PROGRAM> button repeatedly until the display

reads “Exit Programming”, then press the <ENTER> button to exit program mode.

44

Program Mode AccessProgram Mode AccessProgram Mode AccessProgram Mode Access

Accessing Program ModeAccessing Program ModeAccessing Program ModeAccessing Program Mode

How to Program Using LHow to Program Using LHow to Program Using LHow to Program Using LEDEDEDED Keypads Keypads Keypads Keypads

The programming sequence follows this pattern;

<PROGRAM> - <1,2 or 3 digit address> - <ENTER> (Program Address)

1 short beep if OK - 1 long beep if error, THEN

<PROGRAM> - <1,2 or 3 digit sub-address> - <ENTER> (Sub-Address)

3 short beeps if OK - 1 long beep if error

The LED’s will display current value or status

Enter the new value or option

<New Value> - <ENTER>


Throughout this manual you will see program instructions expressed as

P 1 E 1-100 E

Using the above example the represents the PROGRAM key and <E> represents the

ENTER key.

<1> refers to the address for programming User Codes and <1-100> refers to Users 1-100.

Access to Programming on Power Up (Installer Mode) When power is applied to the controller for the first time and with the panel tamper input

open, the panel will inhibit tamper alarms and ready the panel to enter INSTALLER

PROGRAM MODE (unless the Installer Lock-out at address P25E10E Option 8 has previously

been enabled). At this point you can go to any keypad which is connected to the panel and

press <PROGRAM> <ENTER> which will automatically put that keypad into full Program

mode. The Program LED will now be Flashing (NOTE: Only one keypad can be in Program

mode at any time).

Access to Installer Program Mode from Run Mode Before you can enter Installer program mode from normal operating mode, the panel must

not be Armed or in Stay mode. Program mode access is inhibited if any part of the system is

Armed.

Press <PROGRAM> - <Installer Code> - <ENTER>

Program light will Flash

Note: Default Installer Code (P25E1E) is 000000.

You are now in Installer Program Mode. Any program addresses may be viewed or changed

in this mode.

ACCESS TO CLIENT PROGRAM MODE FROM RUN MODE

Press <PROGRAM> - <Master User Code> - <ENTER>

Program light On Steady

45

Note: Default Master User Code is code # 1 (P1E1E) which is 123.

You are now in Client Program Mode. Access to certain program locations is limited while in

Client mode (see the options at address P5E). Each User can have different privileges based

on the options assigned to the User at address P5E. If no options are set at address P5E for

a user, they will not be allowed access to Client program Mode.

Resetting To Factory Default Settings (From Install Mode Only) There are two addresses that allow you to reset the panel back to the factory defaults. The

first resets just User Codes, Installer Code & Telephone Numbers. The Second resets all

programming back to the factory Defaults.

e.g. To reset All System defaults:

Press <PROGRAM> - <P200E10E> - <ENTER>


After the system configuration has been reset back to defaults, all values, options & Codes

will be set to the values shown in the Program Summary as defaults. These values have

been chosen as the most common set-up for the majority of systems.

To reset partial defaults:

Press <PROGRAM> - <P200E9E> - <ENTER>


The partial reset to defaults will return all User Codes, the Installer Code and Telephone

Numbers back to the values shown in the Program Summary as defaults. These values have

been chosen as the most common set-up for the majority of systems.

Exiting Program ModeExiting Program ModeExiting Program ModeExiting Program Mode

To Exit Program Modes Using Led Keypad To exit either program mode when you have finished programming:

Press <PROGRAM> - <ENTER>

Program light goes out

The panel is now back in Run Mode, any program changes you have made will have replaced

previous values and be in effect.

Note: During programming Tampers and 24 hour alarms are disabled which allows quiet

access to the panel, detectors and external siren units, etc. On exiting program mode, all

inputs are scanned and if any tampers or 24Hr alarms are present an activation will occur.

To Exit Program Modes Using LCD Keypad There are two ways to exit Program Mode with an LCD keypad. To exit either program mode

when you have finished programming:

Repeatedly press the <PROGRAM> button until the display shows

“<ENTER> TO EXIT”.

Now press <ENTER> to exit Program Mode.

OR

Press and hold the <PROGRAM> button for 2 seconds to exit program mode.

The panel is now back in Run Mode, any program changes you have made will have replaced

previous values and be in effect.

46

NOTENOTENOTENOTE

During programming Tampers and 24 hour alarms are disabled which allows

quiet access to the panel, detectors and external siren units, etc. On exiting

program mode, all inputs are scanned and if any tampers or 24Hr alarms are

present an activation will occur..

How to Program Using LCD KeypadsHow to Program Using LCD KeypadsHow to Program Using LCD KeypadsHow to Program Using LCD Keypads

Access to Program Mode when using an LCD Keypad is exactly the same as when using an

LED Keypad (see previous page for access to program mode from power-up and normal run

mode).

Once in Program Mode (either Client Mode or Installer Mode), the User can still enter

program addresses directly at the keypad to go straight to a particular address, as with the

LED Keypad.

But the LCD Keypad also incorporates built-in menus that allow the Programmer to move

through the Main-Menus using the Up/Down Arrow keys. Also when at a data entry location,

the Left/Right Arrows can be used. These special Function Arrow keys are clearly marked on

the keypad buttons (the position of the buttons can vary depending on the type of LCD

Keypad installed).

When navigating the Menus using the Arrow keys, each button has a special function

depending on where you are within the menus.

When you enter program mode the LCD Keypad display automatically defaults to

“CLIENT:USER” (if in Client mode) or “INSTALLER:USER” (if in Installer mode). By using the

UP or DOWN Arrows, the user can cycle through all of the available menus.

The menus are accessed in a particular order based on the most frequently used program

locations. All of the Main and the Sub-Menus are shown on the following pages.

LCD Program MenuLCD Program MenuLCD Program MenuLCD Program Menu

LCD Keypad Menu Programming The LCD Keypad enables “Manual Free’ programming of the Runner 8/16 panel. Easy to

follow plain text Menus will be displayed on the keypad to enable selection of the desired

programming options.

<ENTER> key selects the Menu you wish to work in or the option in a

Sub-Menu you wish to use.

<PROGRAM> key will step you back to the previous Menu level

<Up> or <Down> arrow keys will allow you to cycle through the Menu

options (Main & Sub Menus).

<Left> or <Right> arrow keys can be used when in the Data Entry-Menus

to cycle through the options (eg if in “USERS” Data Entry-Menu, the options would be Users 1-100, if in “ZONES” the options would Zones 1-16, etc)

47

Selecting the MainSelecting the MainSelecting the MainSelecting the Main----Menu Headings Menu Headings Menu Headings Menu Headings

(“(“(“(“�� Up” Or “ Up” Or “ Up” Or “ Up” Or “�� Down” Arrow Keys) Down” Arrow Keys) Down” Arrow Keys) Down” Arrow Keys)

Enter “INSTALLER” Program Mode eg <PROGRAM> - <INSTALLER CODE (000000)> -

<ENTER>.

The LCD will display “INSTALLER:USERS”. This is the default Main-Menu heading.

To access a desired program location you first navigate to the desired Main-Menu by using the “� Up” or “� Down” arrow keys on the keypad. Each press of “� Up” or “� Down” arrow keys will advance the display to the next Menu heading.

The Main-Menu headings are shown on the top line of the LCD display.

To access the Sub-Menu options from a Main-Menu press the <ENTER> button.

Selecting the SubSelecting the SubSelecting the SubSelecting the Sub----Menu Headings Menu Headings Menu Headings Menu Headings

(“(“(“(“�� Up” Or “ Up” Or “ Up” Or “ Up” Or “�� Down” Arrow Keys) Down” Arrow Keys) Down” Arrow Keys) Down” Arrow Keys)

Having pressed the <ENTER> button at the selected Main-Menu heading the keypad will now

show Sub-Menus for that heading.

The Main-Menu heading will remain on the top line of the LCD display and the Sub-Menus

will appear on the bottom line.

Each press of “� Up” or “� Down” arrow keys will advance the Sub-Menus displayed on the bottom line either up or down by one location..

To access the Data Entry-Menu options from the Sub-Menu press the <ENTER> button.

Selecting the Data EntrySelecting the Data EntrySelecting the Data EntrySelecting the Data Entry----Menu HeadingsMenu HeadingsMenu HeadingsMenu Headings

Having pressed the <ENTER> button at the desired Sub-Menu heading, the keypad will now

be in the Data Entry-Mode.

The Main-Menu heading on the top line of the display will be replaced with the actual data

entry field description, e.g. if you had gone from “USERS” to “CODES” then to the data entry

field of codes the display will show “USER CODE 1” on the top line of the display and the

code “123” on the bottom line (“123” being the default User 1 code). See the chart on page

48 for details.

You can now change the code, e.g. to change Code # 1 to 4567 press <4567> <ENTER>.

The bottom line will now show the new code of “4567”.

At this point you can use the “� Up” or “� Down” arrow keys to cycle through the other Sub-Menu options for User Code 1 to program all of the options for code 1, or;

You can use the “Left” or “�Right” arrow keys to cycle through all of the User codes. This allows you to program all of the user codes from 1-100. The “� Right” arrow key when pressed will take you up one User at a time and the “Left” arrow key will take you down one User, e.g. if the display was currently showing “USER CODE 10”, pressing the “ Left” arrow key will take the display to “USER CODE 9”, pressing the “� Right” arrow key will take the display to “USER CODE 11”.

You can also use the “ Left” or “� Right” arrow keys to move through all of the User codes, and while at a particular User, you can also use the “� Up” or “� Down” arrow keys to program all options for that User.

If you are at a location that has 8 programmable options, e.g. P4E where the User

Arm/Disarm options can be set, by pressing and holding the <CONTROL> button then within

2 seconds pressing the <ENTER> button you can access the sub- text that describes what

each option can do. To exit the sub-text display press <ENTER>.

48

Stepping Back Through the MenusStepping Back Through the MenusStepping Back Through the MenusStepping Back Through the Menus

If you are in a Menu location, eg. the “USER” Data Entry field, and you wish to step back one

stage to the previous Sub-Menu, you need to press the <PROGRAM> button.

Each time the <PROGRAM> button is pressed the display will step back to the previous stage

(remembering where you were before) until you get back to the Main-Menu.

For example if you were in the “KEYPADS” Main-Menu, then pressed <ENTER> to get to the

“AREAS” Sub-Menu for keypads, then pressed <ENTER> again to get to the “AREAS” Data

Entry-Menu for keypads, you could now press the <PROGRAM> button once and it would

take you back to the “KEYPADS/AREAS” Sub-Menu. Pressing <PROGRAM> again will take

you back to the “KEYPADS” Main-Menu, and pressing <PROGRAM> one more time will return you back to the default “USERS” Main-Menu.

If you get back to the “USERS” menu and press the <PROGRAM> button once more the

display will go to the

program exit menu. If you press <ENTER> when at this point the panel will leave program

mode. If you don’t wish to leave program mode you can press the <PROGRAM> button

again to return to the “USERS” menu.

The flowchart below indicates the program menu steps using the “ARROW” , “ENTER” &

“PROGRAM” Buttons on the keypad.

User 1 Type

0

Find Tag

(Enter to Start)


49

LCD Keypad Program Menu FlowchartLCD Keypad Program Menu FlowchartLCD Keypad Program Menu FlowchartLCD Keypad Program Menu Flowchart

There are two Menu navigating options when in the Program-Data Menus. Using the “Users”

examples shown below.

1. If the “�Up” or “�Down” Arrows are used, the Menus will cycle through the different Sub-Menus for a particular User. See User’s Data-Entry I.

2. If the “Left” or “�Right” Arrows are used, the Menus will cycle through all of the individual Users. See User’s Data-Entry II.

Users are shown as the example on this page but the same properties apply to Zones, Areas,

Outputs, etc, when programming with the LCD Keypad.


50

USER’S DATA-ENTRY INavigate with the Up and

Down Arrows

USER 1 USER TYPE

USER 1 USER CODESENTER

PROGRAM

To Sub Menu

To Data Menu

FROM USER’S

SUB-MENU

B

A

TO USER’S

SUB-MENU

There are two Menu navigating options when in the Program-Data Menus. Using the “Users” examples shown on this page;

1) If the “ Up” or “ Down” Arrows are used, the Menus will cycle through the different Sub-Menus for a particular User. See User’s Data-Entry I.

2) If the “ Left” or “ Right” Arrows are used, the Menus will cycle through all of the individual Users. See User’s Data-Entry II.

Users are shown as the example on this page but the same properties apply to Zones, Areas, Outputs, etc, when programming with the LCD Keypad.

USERS DATA-ENTRY IINavigate with the Up and

Down Arrows

USER 1 ACCESS OPT

USER 1 USER TYPE

USER 1 USER CODES

USER 1 USER DEVICES

USER 1 USER TIME ZONES-

USER 1 USER PRG OPT

USER 1 PENDANT TYPE

USER 1 PENDANT OPT

USER 1 RADIO PANIC BEEPS

USER 1 USER OUT ON

USER 1 USER OUT MASK

USER 1 ACCESS OPT

USER 1 RADIO PANIC OUT

USER 1 PENDANT LEARN

USER 1 USER OUT OFF

PENDANT DELETE

USER 1 TAG LEARN

USER 1 TAG DELETE

USER 1 FIND PENDANT

USER 1 FIND TAG

USER 1 USER AREA


51

LCD “Main” Menu HeadingsLCD “Main” Menu HeadingsLCD “Main” Menu HeadingsLCD “Main” Menu Headings


52

LCD Keypad Main & Sub Menu Program ChartLCD Keypad Main & Sub Menu Program ChartLCD Keypad Main & Sub Menu Program ChartLCD Keypad Main & Sub Menu Program Chart


53


54

55

Special Keypad FunctionsSpecial Keypad FunctionsSpecial Keypad FunctionsSpecial Keypad Functions

Arming or Disarming Two Areas at a KeypadArming or Disarming Two Areas at a KeypadArming or Disarming Two Areas at a KeypadArming or Disarming Two Areas at a Keypad

If the panel is configured for two Areas “A&B”, and the option “ARM” button required before

code is turned on (P45E Option 1), there are a number of possible arming options.

If a user code is only assigned to one area and they press <ARM> <CODE> <ENTER> at the

keypad, only the Area assigned to their code will Arm.

If a user code is assigned to both areas but the keypad being used is only assigned to one

area, pressing <ARM> <CODE> <ENTER> will only arm the area assigned to the keypad.

If a user code is assigned to both areas and the keypad being used is also assigned to both

areas, pressing <ARM> <CODE> <ENTER> will put the keypad into a “Ready to Arm” state.

On the LCD keypad the display will show “Area/s to Arm” “A B”, and on the LED keypad

LED’s 1 & 2 (LED 1 = Area A & LED 2 = Area B) will turn on.

If you press the <ENTER> button now, both areas A&B will arm. If before pressing the enter

button you wish to deselect one of the Areas eg if you only want to arm area B press the

number “1” and Area “A” will disappear on the LCD keypad display or the number “1” will

turn off on the LED keypad indicating that only area B will arm when the enter button is

pressed.

The number “1” will toggle area A on/off and the number “2” will toggle area B on/off.

If you don’t do anything the panel will proceed with arming both areas after 10 seconds time

has elapsed.

On disarming, after entering <CODE> <ENTER> the display on the LCD keypad will show

“Area/s to Disarm” “A B”, and on the LED keypad LED’s 1 & 2. You can press the <ENTER>

button at this point to disarm both areas, select which area you wish to disarm by using the

numbers 1 & 2 on the keypad, or if you don’t do anything the panel will proceed with

disarming both areas after 10 seconds time has elapsed.

LCD Quick View ModeLCD Quick View ModeLCD Quick View ModeLCD Quick View Mode

If any zones are unsealed when disarmed the LCD keypad will scroll through each unsealed

zone displaying the 16 character name for each zone. If a number of zones are unsealed

simultaneously it can take sometime for the display to show all of the unsealed zones.

By pressing the <ENTER> button when zones are unsealed the keypad will enter the “Quick-

view” mode. When in “Quick-view” mode, each unsealed zone is displayed as a single two

digit number eg “01 05 10”. Up to 5 unsealed zones maybe displayed at one time. If more

than 5 zones are unsealed at the time the display will scroll to the next bank of 5 zones so

the user can see quickly which zones are unsealed. To exit “Quick-view” mode you simply

press the <ENTER> button again or the keypad will time out automatically in approximately

30 seconds.

56

Toggle Chime Mode On/OffToggle Chime Mode On/OffToggle Chime Mode On/OffToggle Chime Mode On/Off

On the Crow LCD Keypad there is a “CHIME” button. Pressing and holding that button for

two seconds will toggle Chime Mode from On-Off or Off-On.

Send Manual Test CallSend Manual Test CallSend Manual Test CallSend Manual Test Call

If the panel is configured for Contact ID reporting and test calls are programmed to report,

you can force a manual test call by pressing and holding <CONTROL> followed within 2

seconds by <0>. This will cause a manual test call to be sent to the monitoring company.

You can also dial into the panel from a remote site and using the telephone cause a manual

test call remotely. See P175E15E and P176E11E for details.

Manually Answer an Incoming CallManually Answer an Incoming CallManually Answer an Incoming CallManually Answer an Incoming Call

If the panel is not configured to answer in-coming calls, the user can force it to answer the

call by pressing and holding <CONTROL> followed within 2 seconds by <9>. This will make

the panel answer the call immediately. For this function to work the phone line must be

ringing at the time and there must have been at least two rings before pressing the buttons.

57

Programming UsersProgramming UsersProgramming UsersProgramming Users

User Codes

P1E 1-100E (NOTE: Users 21-100 can be Radio Users)

Adding or changing a User CodeAdding or changing a User CodeAdding or changing a User CodeAdding or changing a User Code

Up to 100 codes can be programmed into the panel. The user codes are located in address

P1E 1-100E.

By default, User Code-1 has Master Code permissions and must be used to enter Client

program mode. The Default Master Code is 123E.

Codes 1-100 may be varied in length from 1 to 6 digits (unless option 8 at P25E11E is on

then the codes must be between 4-6 digits long).

To program a User Code you must first be in client or installer program mode, then select

the address P1E followed by the User Number you wish to program e.g. 1-100E (If there is

already a code programmed at this address, it will be displayed back to you) Now enter the

code then press the <ENTER> key.

eg. P1E2E 2580 E

3 beeps - program light on solid or flashing

In this example we have programmed Code 2 to be 2580.

eg. P1E5E 9876 E

3 beeps - program light on solid or flashing

In this example we have programmed code 5 to be 9876

To replace a code simply enter the new code in the same address as the old code. This will

overwrite the previous code but maintain the user permissions as mapped to that user

number.

NOTE: When displaying User Codes on an LED keypad, digits 1-9 use the zone indicators 1-

9. The digit 0 is indicated by the "AUX” light.

Removing a User CodeRemoving a User CodeRemoving a User CodeRemoving a User Code

To remove or delete a code when using an LED keypad, simply press the <BYPASS> button

after entering the code address. When using an LCD keypad, press and hold the

<CONTROL> button then Immediately press and hold the <0>.

e.g. LED Keypad press P1E3E <BYPASS> E

3 beeps - Program light on solid or flashing

User Code # 3 Erased

e.g. LCD Keypad press P1E3E <CONTROL> then <0>

3 beeps

User Code # 3 Erased

User Code TypeUser Code TypeUser Code TypeUser Code Type

USER CODE TYPE - P2E 1-100E (NOTE: only Users 21-100 can be Radio Users)


58

Option 0 - Keypad Code User {PIN}

Option 1 - Radio user (User 21-100 only)

Option 2 - Access Tag/Card User

Option 3 - Both Code and Access Tag/Card User {Tag + PIN}

Option 4 - Either Code or Access Tag/Card User {Tag or PIN}

Option 0 Keypad Code User {PIN} - All 100 Users can be 1-6 digit code Users if required. Codes can be used to Arm/Disarm all or part of the alarm or they can be used to

operate outputs for access control purposes. Users can be assigned to keypads and

so can outputs so that a User assigned to multiple outputs (which can in turn be

linked to doors) can operate only the door assigned to the keypad they are using.

Option 1 Radio User - Users 21-100 can be Radio keys (Pendant) if required. Radio keys can be used to Arm/Disarm all or part of the alarm or they can operate outputs directly.

Unlike user codes, a radio key cannot be assigned to a keypad so if a radio key is

assigned to more than one output and the radio key is operated, all of the outputs

assigned to the radio key will turn on.

Option 2 Access Tag/Card User - Users 1-100 can be Access Tags or Cards if required. Access Tag or Card operation requires that the optional Proximity Reader is connected

to the panel. The Proximity Readers can be assigned to any one of the 8 possible

keypad addresses. Access tag or Card Users can be used to Arm/Disarm all or part of

the alarm or they can be used to operate outputs for access control purposes. Access

Tags or Cards can be assigned to a keypad address and so can outputs so that an

Access User assigned to multiple outputs (which can in turn be linked to doors) can

operate only the door assigned to the keypad address they are using.

Option 3 Both Code and Access Tag/Card User {Tag + PIN} - Up to 100 code Users and up 100 tag or card Users can be stored in the panel. If the Proximity Reader with the

full keypad is installed on the panel, it is possible to arm/disarm the alarm or gain

access through a door by presenting the tag/card at the reader then entering in the

user code {PIN Number}. It MUST be in that order ie Tag then PIN. This option

provides a more secure means of arming or disarming the alarm, or gaining access

through a door, because it requires both the access tag/card plus the PIN number.

Option 4 Either Code or Access Tag/Card User {Tag or PIN} - Up to 100 code Users and

up 100 tag or card Users can be stored in the panel. If the Proximity Reader with the

full keypad is installed on the panel, it is possible to arm/disarm the alarm or gain

access through a door by entering in the user code at the reader or presenting the

tag/card at the reader. This option gives two methods of controlling the alarm.

User AreasUser AreasUser AreasUser Areas

USER AREAS - P3E 1-100E

Option 1 - Assigned to Area A

Option 2 - Assigned to Area B

Option 1 Assigned to Area A - If a User has option 1 on, they can Arm/Disarm all zones assigned to Area A

Option 2 Assigned to Area B - If a User has option 2 on, they can Arm/Disarm all zones assigned to Area B

59

User Access OptioUser Access OptioUser Access OptioUser Access Optionsnsnsns

USER ACCESS OPTIONS - P4E 1-100E

Option 1 - User can Arm Area

Option 2 - User can Arm Stay Area

Option 3 - User can Disarm Area

Option 4 - User can Disarm Stay Area

Option 5 - User is a Security Guard User

Option 6 - User will Arm Latchkey Mode

Option 7 - User can set Call Divert Mode on Arm/Disarm

Option 8 - User can View Event Memory

Option 1 User can Arm Area - If a User has option 1 on, they can Arm all Areas assigned at location P3E.

Option 2 User can Arm Stay Area - If a User has option 2 on, they can Arm Stay Mode for all Areas assigned at location P3E.

Option 3 User can Disarm Area - If a User has option 3 on, they can Disarm all Areas

assigned at location P3E.

Option 4 User can Disarm Stay Area - If a User has option 4 on, they can Disarm Stay Mode for all Areas assigned at location P3E.

Option 5 User is a Security Guard User - If a User has option 5 on, they can Arm all Areas

assigned at location P3E, but they may only Disarm if the panel is currently Armed

and in the alarm state.

Option 6 User will Arm Latchkey Mode - If this option is on, the User will Arm the alarm in Latchkey Mode. Latchkey Mode can also be armed by using the <ARM>, <STAY>,

<A> or , (see P75E, P77E, P79E & P81E option 6) or the key-switch (see P112E

option 6). If a User with this option on Disarms the alarm no Disarm report will be

sent via the dialler. If Latchkey Mode is Armed and a user with this option off Disarms

the alarm a disarm report will be sent to alert parents when their children have

returned home. Reporting of Latchkey Disarm is enabled at location (P189E option 1).

If a Voice report is desired the message is assigned at P176E10E. Normally you would

select a telephone number/s set for domestic or voice reporting to report the

Latchkey disarm signal.

Option 7 User can set Call Divert Mode on Arm/Disarm - If a User has option 7 on, they can initiate the Call Divert Number/s to be dialled on Arm/Disarm. This allows

automatic call diversion when the alarm is Armed and taking the diversion off when

Disarmed. Call divert must also be programmed (P192-194E).

Option 8 User can View Event Memory - If access to memory mode is restricted by turning on option 8 at location P25E13E (Limit Events & Dialler Reports to 3 of any one type), this option allows the user to access memory mode by pressing <MEMORY> <CODE #> <ENTER>. If option 8 at location P25E13E is turning On while this option is off, then memory access is restricted, the user will Not be able to view memory mode.


60

User Code PrivilegesUser Code PrivilegesUser Code PrivilegesUser Code Privileges ---- user progr user progr user progr user program optionsam optionsam optionsam options USER CODE PRIVILEGES - P5E 1-100E

Option 1 - User can Change Their Code

Option 2 - User can Change All Codes

Option 3 - User can Allow Access to Installer Mode/Edit All Codes

Option 4 - User can Change Telephone Numbers

Option 5 - User can Change Clock Settings

Option 6 - User can Change DTMF Codes

Option 7 - User can Learn New Radio Devices

Option 8 - User can Force a Download to the Call-back Number

Option 1 User can Change Their Code - If a User has option 1 on, they can access Client Program Mode and change their code number.

Option 2 User can Change All Codes - If a User has option 2 on, they can access Client Program Mode and change All User code numbers.

Option 3 User can Allow access to Installer Mode/Edit All Codes - If a User has option 3 on, they can access Client program Mode. From there an Installer with the correct

Installer Code can access Installer Program Mode. The User with this option can also

edit all User Codes and associated parameters as shown in the chart on page 139.

Option 4 User can Change Telephone Numbers - If a User has option 4 on, they can access Client Program Mode and change the telephone and call divert numbers.

Option 5 User can Change Clock Settings - If a User has option 5 on, they can access Client

Program Mode and change the Time & date settings as well as daylight saving sart

and finish times.

Option 6 User can Change DTMF Codes - If a User has option 6 on, they can access Client Program Mode and change the DTMF Codes. A DTMF Code can be used to remotely

Arm/Disarm an Area, turn Output/s On/Off or Acknowledge a Voice/Domestic alarm.

Option 7 User can Learn New Radio Devices - If a User has option 7 on, they can access Client Program Mode and Learn a new Radio Key or Wireless Zone Device. They can

also remove radio devices or find what location number a device is stored at.

Option 8 User can Force a Download to the Call-back Number - If a User has option 8 on, they can access Client Program Mode and force a PC connection to a pre-defined call-

back number. They can either enter in P200E12E or if using an LCD keypad go to the

“Diagnostics” Menu and select “Start Callback”.

Radio User TypeRadio User TypeRadio User TypeRadio User Type ---- pendant type pendant type pendant type pendant type RADIO USER TYPE - P7E 21-100E (NOTE: only Users 21-100 can be Radio Users)

Option 0 - Generic (General Pendant Type) Eg: Crow AE, CA & SX Series Pendants/Remotes

must

Option 1 - Crow Freewave Pendant (By Default, All radio users are assigned as Freewave type)

Option 21 - Ness Pendant

Option 0 Generic Type - If a Radio Pendant has no special functions and does not send a battery low signal it is a Generic type 0. Furthermore, when Teaching-In the Crow

AE, CA & SX Series Pendants/Remotes into the Runner, the Radio Users Must First be

assigned as this ‘Generic’ type before the remotes will work.

Option 1 Crow Freewave Type (By Default, All Wireless Users are set to this type) - If a Crow Freewave series Radio Remote (4F or 9F frequency) will be used, ensure the

radio user is set to type-1. When the pendant detects a battery low, it will send a

signal to the panel.

Option 21 Ness Type - If a Ness Radio Pendant is being used, set the type to 21. When

the pendant detects a battery low, it will send a signal to the panel.


61

Radio User PrivilegesRadio User PrivilegesRadio User PrivilegesRadio User Privileges –––– pendant options pendant options pendant options pendant options RADIO USER PRIVILEGES - P8E 21-100E (NOTE: only Users 21-100 can be Radio Users)

Option 1 - Pendant can Disarm at All Times

Option 2 - Pendant will cause an Immediate Panic Alarm

Option 3 - Pendant will cause a Delayed Panic Alarm (1.5 sec)

Option 4 - Pendant only works during entry delay (Runner Ver:9.06+)

Option 5 - This User is a dedicated Duress Code (User 21 ~ 100 Only) (Runner Ver:9.06+)

Option 6 - Spare

Option 7 - Spare

Option 8 - Spare

Option 1 Pendant can Disarm at All Times - If a Radio Pendant has option 1 on, they can Disarm the alarm at any time. If this option is off, the pendant cannot disarm if the

panel is in alarm state.

Option 2 Pendant will cause an Immediate Panic Alarm - If a Radio Pendant has option 2

on, a Panic Alarm will be generated immediately the button is pressed.

Option 3 Pendant will cause a Delayed Panic Alarm - If a Radio Pendant has option 3 on, a Panic Alarm will be generated if the button is pressed for longer that 1.5

seconds. If the button is released before the time expires, no Panic Alarm will be

generated.

Option 4 Pendant only works during entry delay - If a Radio Pendant has option 4 on, the pendant can only disarm the alarm during the entry delay time. This means that authorised radio key users must enter the building and trigger the entry delay before the can disarm the alarm. Option 5 This User is a dedicated Duress Code - If a User Code has option 5 on (restricted to

Users 21 - 100 only), this code should be used as a dedicated Duress code. It should not be used for daily disarming of the alarm but used when disarming under Duress.

User Time Zone AssignmentsUser Time Zone AssignmentsUser Time Zone AssignmentsUser Time Zone Assignments

Time Zone Assigned To a User - P9E 1-100E

Option 1 - User Controlled by Time Zone # 1








There are up to 8 Time Zones that can be programmed into the panel. A Time Zone consists

of a Start and Stop time plus the Days of the Week that the Time Zone is active. By selecting

Options 1-8 (function turned on) to a particular User, that user will only operate if the Time

Zone assigned is active.

For example, if Time Zone #1 had a start time of 0800 and a stop time of 1700 and active

days of 2-6 (Monday-Friday), a User with Time Zone 1 assigned can only be used between

the hours of 0800-1700 from Monday to Friday. Outside these hours the User Code will not

operate.


62

More than one Time Zone can be assigned to a User. Using the above example for TZ#1 and

now assuming Time Zone #2 is set to 0900-1200 on day 7 (Saturday), by assigning both

TZ1 & 2 to a User will now mean their code is active during weekdays from 0800-1700 plus

they are also able to use their code on Saturdays between the hours of 0900-1200.

If the time-zone has just been programmed and should currently be active you will have to

wait until the next minute expires before the panel will update the time-zone status. You can

see if the time-zone is active at location P200E4E.

User to Keypad AssignmentUser to Keypad AssignmentUser to Keypad AssignmentUser to Keypad Assignment –––– user devices user devices user devices user devices

User to Keypad Assignment User to Keypad Assignment User to Keypad Assignment User to Keypad Assignment ---- P10 P10 P10 P10EEEE 1 1 1 1----100100100100EEEE

Option 1 - User will work at Keypad # 1








Any user can be assigned to only operate at certain Keypads. This option controls whether a

code or access tag User can Arm/Disarm from certain keypads. This option does not restrict

users from operating outputs from a particular keypad (this is done at locations P82E &

P83E).

Radio Pendant Panic Beeps to KeypadRadio Pendant Panic Beeps to KeypadRadio Pendant Panic Beeps to KeypadRadio Pendant Panic Beeps to Keypad

Radio Pendant Panic Beeps to KeypadRadio Pendant Panic Beeps to KeypadRadio Pendant Panic Beeps to KeypadRadio Pendant Panic Beeps to Keypad

P11E 21-100E (NOTE: only Users 21-100 can be Radio Users)

Option 1 - A Pendant Panic Alarm will Beep at Keypad # 1








If a Radio Pendant is programmed to create a Panic Alarm (see P8E), when the Panic Alarm

is activated, it can be silent or it can sound the keypad buzzer. Each keypad can be silent

during a Pendant Panic Alarm (option turned off) or can give an audible indication of the

Alarm (option turned on).


63

User to Output MaskUser to Output MaskUser to Output MaskUser to Output Mask

User to Output Mask - P12E 1-100E

Option 1 - User is Mapped to Output # 1








Any user can be allowed to only operate certain Outputs. This Function is mainly used for access

control purposes. If an Output is being used to open a door but a User does not have access

through that door, by not allowing the User to operate that Output access through the door can

be denied.

User Can Turn an Output ON and OFFUser Can Turn an Output ON and OFFUser Can Turn an Output ON and OFFUser Can Turn an Output ON and OFF

User Can Turn an Output ONUser Can Turn an Output ONUser Can Turn an Output ONUser Can Turn an Output ON

User Can Turn an Output On - P13E 1-100E

Option 1 - User can turn ON Output # 1








Any user can be allowed to turn an Output ON. This Function can be used to control external

devices via the panel keypad with a User assigned to that Output. Once an Output is turned ON

by a User, the Output can turn OFF again automatically if a reset time is assigned to the Output,

or it can be turned off by the same user or by a different user with the next program location.

User Can Turn an Output OFFUser Can Turn an Output OFFUser Can Turn an Output OFFUser Can Turn an Output OFF

User Can Turn an Output OFF - P14E 1-100E

Option 1 - User can turn OFF Output # 1








Any user can be allowed to turn an Output OFF. This Function can be used to control

external devices via the panel keypad with a User assigned to that Output. Once an Output

is turned OFF by a User, the Output can be turned on by the same user or by a different user

with the previous program location.


64

Radio Pendant Panic AlRadio Pendant Panic AlRadio Pendant Panic AlRadio Pendant Panic Alarm to Outputarm to Outputarm to Outputarm to Output

RADIO PENDANT PANIC ALARM to OUTPUT - P15E 21-100E (NOTE: only Users 21-100

can be Radio Users)

Option 1 - A Pendant Panic Alarm will Operate Output # 1








If a Radio Pendant is programmed to create a Panic Alarm (see P8E), when the Panic Alarm

is activated it can be silent or it can turn on an Output. This option would normally be used

to turn on any internal and/or external audible alarms connected to Outputs during a

Pendant Panic Alarm.

Learn Find and Delete Radio Key Codes and Learn Find and Delete Radio Key Codes and Learn Find and Delete Radio Key Codes and Learn Find and Delete Radio Key Codes and

TagsTagsTagsTags

Learn Radio Pendant CodesLearn Radio Pendant CodesLearn Radio Pendant CodesLearn Radio Pendant Codes –––– pendant learn pendant learn pendant learn pendant learn

LEARN RADIO PENDANT CODES - P18E 21-100E (NOTE: only Users 21-100 can be Radio

Pendants)

A Radio Pendant must be enrolled into the panel before it can be used.

To learn a Radio Pendant you must first have a compatible receiver connected to the panel

keypad buss and the Radio (Wireless) User Assigned to the appropriate type (at P7E)

according to the type of Pendant/Remote being used. With the receiver connected and the

panel in program mode, entering P18E then the pendant number you wish to enrol, eg 21E

for pendant 21, the keypad will start to beep to indicate that learn mode has been started

and the LED on the receiver will flash. Now operate the pendant you wish to learn into User

slot 21. Once the transmitted code has been received by the panel and saved as pendant 21,

the keypad will stop beeping and the LED on the receiver will stop flashing.

When learning a new radio code the panel checks all possible locations (including radio

zones) before saving the new code to ensure that the code has not already been loaded into

another slot. If the code already exists, the keypad will indicate which slot the code is

already installed at. A number from 1-16 indicates a zone slot and a number from 21-100

indicates a user slot.

DELETE a RADIO PENDANT CODEDELETE a RADIO PENDANT CODEDELETE a RADIO PENDANT CODEDELETE a RADIO PENDANT CODE

DELETE a RADIO PENDANT CODE - P19E 21-100E (NOTE: only Users 21-100 can be

Radio Pendants)

If you wish to delete a single Radio Pendant, pressing P19E then the User number while in

Program Mode will delete the stored code against that User, eg P19E 21E will remove the

code stored for User 21.

FIND a RADIO PENDANT LOCATIONFIND a RADIO PENDANT LOCATIONFIND a RADIO PENDANT LOCATIONFIND a RADIO PENDANT LOCATION

FIND a RADIO PENDANT LOCATION - P20E 0E (NOTE: only Users 21-100 can be Radio

Pendants)


65

If you have a Radio Pendant loaded into the panel but are unsure which location (User #),

pressing P20E (then 0E on an LED Keypad) while in Program Mode will start “Find” Mode.

There is no need to press 0E when using an LCD keypad because the keypad will give you

written prompts after entering P20E. The keypad will start to beep to indicate that “Find”

mode has been started and the LED on the Receiver will flash. Now press the Radio Pendant

button that you wish to find. If the Radio Pendant is in memory the keypad will display the

number (1-16 indicates a zone, and 21-100 indicates a user). The keypad will stop beeping

and the LED on the Receiver will stop flashing.


66

LEARN ACCESS TAG/CARD COLEARN ACCESS TAG/CARD COLEARN ACCESS TAG/CARD COLEARN ACCESS TAG/CARD CODESDESDESDES

LEARN ACCESS TAG/CARD CODES - P21E 1-100E

An Access Tag/Card must be enrolled into the panel before it can be used. The panel can

have up to 100 proximity tags (key-ring style card), or proximity cards loaded into the

system. The tags or cards are stored separately to the User Codes but they follow the

options of Users 1-100 programmed at locations P2E, P3E, P4E, P9E, P10E, P12E, P13E &

P14E. For example if user 11 is assigned to area A (P3E Option 1), and can arm/disarm the

alarm (P4E Options 1 & 3), then access Tag/Card number 11 will arm/disarm area A also.

To learn an Access Tag/Card you must first have a compatible proximity reader connected to

the panel keypad buss. With the reader connected and the panel in program mode, entering

P21E then the Access tag/card number you wish to enrol, eg 11E for Tag/Card number 11,

the keypad will start to beep to indicate that learn mode has been started. Now present the

Access Tag/card to the reader. Once the Tag/Card number has been received by the panel

and saved, the keypad will stop beeping to indicate learn mode has stopped.

When learning a new access Tag/Card the panel checks all possible locations before saving

the new code to ensure that the code has not already been loaded. If the tag or card already

exists, the panel will not terminate learn mode but instead it will continue looking for a new

tag or card to be presented. This allows a new tag or card to be learnt while existing tags or

cards may be in use on the system.

After learning the tag or card, before it will work you MUST select the appropriate option at

location P2E (options 2, 3 or 4 must be selected for the tag to work).

DELETE an ACCESS TAG/CARD CODEDELETE an ACCESS TAG/CARD CODEDELETE an ACCESS TAG/CARD CODEDELETE an ACCESS TAG/CARD CODE

DELETE an ACCESS TAG/CARD CODE - P22E 1-100E

If you wish to delete a single Access Tag or Card, pressing P22E then the User number while

in Program Mode will delete the stored code against that User, eg P22E 11E will remove the

tag or Card stored for User 11.

FIND an ACCESS TAG/CARD LOCATIONFIND an ACCESS TAG/CARD LOCATIONFIND an ACCESS TAG/CARD LOCATIONFIND an ACCESS TAG/CARD LOCATION

FIND an ACCESS TAG/CARD LOCATION - P23E 0E

If you have an Access Tag or Card loaded into the panel but are unsure which location (User

#), pressing P22E (then 0E on an LED Keypad) while in Program Mode will start “Find” Mode.



mode has been started. Now present the Access Tag or Card you wish to find to a proximity

reader connected to the panel. If the Tag or Card is in memory the keypad will display the

number where the Tag or Card is stored (a number from 1-100). The keypad will stop

beeping once the memory location has been found.

67

Miscellaneous Panel & Clock Miscellaneous Panel & Clock Miscellaneous Panel & Clock Miscellaneous Panel & Clock

SettingsSettingsSettingsSettings

Installer CodeInstaller CodeInstaller CodeInstaller Code INSTALLER CODE - P25E 1E

This code is used to enter full Installer Program mode (Program LED flashing on LED

Keypad). The default installer code is 000000. This code can only be changed while in

Installer Program Mode. To enter your new installer code press P25E1E. The existing code

will displayed at the keypad (either each digit flashed out sequentially on an LED keypad or

shown on the bottom line of the LCD keypad). To change the code simply enter the digits of

the new code and it will replace the old one. The Installer Code must be between 4-6 digits

in length.

Duress DigitDuress DigitDuress DigitDuress Digit DURESS DIGIT - P25E 2E (Value can be 1-9, 0 = Duress Disabled)

The duress digit can be a number from 1-9 (a value of “0” means the duress function is

disabled).

To create a duress alarm the duress digit must be entered before a valid user code (eg If the

code was “123” and the duress number was “4”, then entering a code of <4123> <ENTER>

would create a duress alarm).

Dial ReportDial ReportDial ReportDial Reportinginginging Delay Delay Delay Delay

DIAL REPORTING DELAY - P25E 3E (0-255 Seconds) – Updated Function from Ver:9.08A.

If this address is set to 0, there will be no report delay. If it is set to any value other than 0

then a delay equal to the programmed value will stop the panel from reporting an alarm until

this delay time expires (both during the exit delay time if option 3 is on at P122E for a zone

or when an instant zone is triggered when fully armed). While the timer is active, certain

outputs can be disabled at location P36E option 5. Once the timer has expired, it will not

start again, the panel must be disarmed then armed to reset the timer.

Radio Zone Supervised TimerRadio Zone Supervised TimerRadio Zone Supervised TimerRadio Zone Supervised Timer

SUPERVISED TIMERSUPERVISED TIMERSUPERVISED TIMERSUPERVISED TIMER

RADIO ZONE SUPERVISED TIMER - P25E 4E (Value 0-9999 Minutes)

If a radio detector is capable of sending regular supervisory signals to the panel and the

zone type is set for “Supervised Signal Active”, this timer sets how long a period has to

elapse with no received transmissions before a supervisory failure alarm is generated.


68

Two Trigger TimerTwo Trigger TimerTwo Trigger TimerTwo Trigger Timer TWO TRIGGER TIMER - P25E 5E (0-255 Seconds)

If a zone is set to two trigger, the zone has to cause an alarm twice within the two trigger

time period to cause an alarm. If multiple zones are set to two trigger, an alarm will be

generated it two zones trigger once each within the two trigger time period. If a two trigger

zone goes into alarm but remains in alarm for longer than the two trigger time period (ie

detector failure or cable cut) an alarm will be generated.

Mains Fail Reporting DelayMains Fail Reporting DelayMains Fail Reporting DelayMains Fail Reporting Delay

AC Fail delayAC Fail delayAC Fail delayAC Fail delay

MAINS FAIL REPORTING DELAY - P25E 6E (0-9999 Seconds)

If a Mains Failure occurs this timer delays the reporting of Mains Failure to a Monitoring

Station. If the mains power returns before the timer expires, then no report is sent. If Mains

Failure is assigned to an output, this delay must expire before the output will turn on.

Receiver Fail Delay/TimerReceiver Fail Delay/TimerReceiver Fail Delay/TimerReceiver Fail Delay/Timer

Radio RRadio RRadio RRadio Reset Timeeset Timeeset Timeeset Time

RECEIVER FAIL DELAY - P25E 7E (0-9999 Seconds)

If supervised radio detectors are used, the receiver will be seeing regular transmissions.

Because of this, the panel can monitor receiver activity to check that the receiver is still

working. If the panel does not receive any signals within this time period a receiver failure

alarm will be generated. If set to 0, the receiver monitoring will be turned off.

Upload/Download Site Code NumberUpload/Download Site Code NumberUpload/Download Site Code NumberUpload/Download Site Code Number

Security CodeSecurity CodeSecurity CodeSecurity Code

UPLOAD/DOWNLOAD SITE CODE NUMBER - P25E 8E (8 characters)

The upload/download site code number must be entered if the panel is set for auto-answer

as this provides a security access level to the panel. The number can be up to 8 characters

in length. Valid characters for this number are 0-9,B-F. See chart on page 85 for details of

how to program the characters B-F.

Temporary Output DisableTemporary Output DisableTemporary Output DisableTemporary Output Disable

TEMPORARY OUTPUT DISABLE - P25E 9E (Select output # 1-8)

This address allows a technician to select any output/s to be temporarily disabled for one

alarm or armed cycle, eg by selecting LEDS 1-8 (Outputs 1-8) at this location then leaving

program mode, outputs 1-4 will not turn on following any alarms. The technician is now free

to arm the system to test all monitoring signals without having any internal and/or external

alarms activating. When the alarm is reset or disarmed all outputs will now work normally

again.

69

Miscellaneous Installer and Panel OptionsMiscellaneous Installer and Panel OptionsMiscellaneous Installer and Panel OptionsMiscellaneous Installer and Panel Options MISCELLANEOUS PANEL OPTIONS - P25E 10E

Option 1 - Panel Tamper is 2k2 EOL

Option 2 - Direct access to program mode for the Installer Code

Option 3 - Disable Mains Fail Test

Option 4 - Listen-in to O/P # 1 Low Volume

Option 5 - Receiver Fail/RF Jammed Lockout

Option 6 - Send Output information to Keypad Buss

Option 7 - Cannot Arm if the System Battery is Low or AC has Failed

Option 8 - Installer Lockout

Option 1 Panel Tamper is 2k2 EOL - The Tamper input (Tmp) on the control panel requires either a short circuit or a 2k2 End-of-Line resistor. If option 1 is on the panel must

see a 2k2 resistor (EOL) across the Tmp & 0V terminals to ensure the tamper is

sealed. If this option is turned off then a simple short circuit is all that is required to

seal the panel tamper.

Option 2 Direct access to program mode for the Installer Code - If this option is on, the Installer Code can gain access to Installer Program Mode directly. If the option is

turned off, the installer can only gain access to Installer Program Mode via Client

Program Mode. This option allows the owner to control program mode access by the

installer. The User must have option 3 at location P5E turned on for them to allow

installer access.

Option 3 Disable Mains Fail Test - If the panel must be run off a DC supply or the Mains supply can fail regularly, this option disables the mains voltage monitoring to prevent

mains fail alarms from occurring.

Option 4 Listen-in to O/P # 1 Low Volume - If Listen-In to Output 1 is turned on (P175E8E), the level of sound from the speaker can be controlled with this option. If

this option is Off the sound level during listen-in to O/P 1 is high volume, turning this

option On makes the sound level low volume. For listen-in to Output 1 to work the device connected to O/P 1 must be an 8Ώ speaker and the output must be modulated

(P35E1E Option 1 on). Failure to do this could result in damage to the speaker &

output.

Option 5 Receiver Fail/RF Jammed Lockout – If the receiver fail delay (P25E7E) is set to a

value other than 0 and the panel sees no activity from the receiver for the set period

of time, a receiver fail alarm will be generated. If this options is turned on, the panel

cannot be armed until the cause of the receiver failure has been resolved. Also if the

receiver detects a continuous signal for longer than 60 seconds it will send an RF

Jammed signal to the control panel. Under this alarm condition and if this option is

turned on, the control panel cannot be armed until the interference has been

removed.

Option 6 Send Output information to Keypad Buss - There is an optional 4 x relay output expander board that can be connected to the keypad buss if required. For this output

expander to work option 6 must be turned on for the data to be sent on the keypad

buss to the expander.

Option 7 Cannot Arm if System battery is Low or AC has Failed – if this option is turned ON, the panel cannot be armed if the panel battery is low or the AC has failed. When

the battery is fully charged or the AC has returned, the panel can then be armed. If

this option is turned off, the panel can be armed during these fault conditions.

Option 8 Installer Lockout - Normally if the panel is powered up with the panel tamper open (ie system tamper alarm active) and in the Disarm state, then the panel will go into

installer program mode when the <PROGRAM> then <ENTER> buttons are pressed.

If this option is on, the panel will not allow access to program mode on power-up and

the only valid method of accessing program mode is via the installer code.


70

INSTALLER OPTIONINSTALLER OPTIONINSTALLER OPTIONINSTALLER OPTIONSSSS

INSTALLER OPTIONS - P25E 11E

Option 1 - Entry to Installer Mode (via Client Prog Mode) MUST Reset Confirmed Alarms

Option 2 - Entry to Installer Mode (via Client Prog Mode) MUST Reset Tamper Alarms

Option 3 - Entry to Installer Mode (via Client Prog Mode) MUST Reset Low Battery Alarm

Option 4 - Entry to Installer Mode (via Client Prog Mode) MUST Reset Supervisory Alarms

Option 5 - CanNot Arm if there is a keypad Fault

Option 6 - CanNot Arm if there is a Telephone Line Failure or Comms Fault

Option 7 - 10 Incorrect Code Attempts locks out the keypad for 90 Seconds

Option 8 - User Codes Must be 4-6 digits long

Option 1 Entry to Installer Mode MUST Resets Confirmed Alarms - If this option is turned on and a Confirmed alarm has occurred, the alarm cannot be re-armed until the

Installer has reset the alarm. The Installer must access Installer Program Mode via Client Mode to reset the system. The zones that caused the alarm will latch on (even when disarmed) until reset by the installer to indicate that lockout is in effect.

Option 2 Entry to Installer Mode MUST Resets Tamper Alarms - If this option is turned on and a Tamper alarm has occurred (system or zone tampers), the alarm cannot be re-

armed until the Installer has reset the alarm. The Installer must access Installer Program Mode via Client Mode to reset the system. The Trouble indication will latch on (even if the tamper alarm has been cleared) until reset by the installer to

indicate that lockout is in effect.

Option 3 Entry to Installer Mode MUST Resets Low Battery Alarm - If this option is

turned on and a Low Battery alarm has occurred, the Installer must access Installer Program Mode via Client Mode to reset the battery low signal. If option 7 is turned on at location P25E10E the alarm cannot be re-armed until the

Installer has reset the battery low signal.

Option 4 Entry to Installer Mode MUST Resets Supervisory Alarms - If this option is turned on and a Detector Supervisory alarm has occurred, the alarm cannot be re-

armed until the Installer has reset the alarm. The Installer must access Installer

Program Mode via Client Mode to reset the supervisory alarm.

Option 5 Cannot Arm if there is a keypad Fault – if this option is turned ON and a missing keypad alarm is present, the panel cannot be armed until the keypad has been re-

installed. Available from Panel Ver:9.03+.

Option 6 Cannot Arm if there is a Telephone Line Failure or Comms Fault – If this option is turned on and the control panel has detected a telephone line fault or the dialler

failed to get kissed off (Comms Fault) following an alarm report the panel cannot be

armed. To reset the line failure the telephone line must be re-instated to allow

arming again. To reset the Comms Fault alarm, a user must access the memory.

Available from Panel Ver:9.03+.

Option 7 10 Incorrect Code Attempts locks out the keypad for 90 Seconds – If this option is turned off the panel will create a keypad tamper alarm if more than 4

incorrect codes are entered at a keypad but the keypad will not be locked out. If this

option is turned on the panel will create a keypad tamper alarm if more than 10

incorrect codes are entered at a keypad and that keypad will then be locked out for

90 seconds. Available from Panel Ver:9.03+.

Option 8 User Codes Must be 4-6 Digits - If this option is turned on, all User Codes must be between 4-6 digits long. If it is turned off, the User Codes can be 1-6 digits long.

Hide User Codes Hide User Codes Hide User Codes Hide User Codes ---- USER OPTIONS USER OPTIONS USER OPTIONS USER OPTIONS USER OPTIONS - P25E 12E (NOTE: This Option can ONLY be accessed from Client Mode)

Option 1 Hide User Codes from Installer - This option is only accessible from Client Program Mode. It is designed to allow the User (owner) of the alarm to hide their

User Codes from the Installer if desired. If this option is turned On, codes can only be

changed or viewed in Client program mode. Users MUST have option 2 at location

P5E assigned (User can Change All Codes) before they can hide the user codes.

71

MISCELLANEOUS USER OPTIONS - P25E 13E

Option 1 - Code Required to View Memory

Option 2 - Cancel Handover Zone Function in Stay Mode

Option 3 - Output Control from Keypad is Disabled when Armed

Option 4 - Keypad Codes are Disabled During Entry Delay

Option 5 - No Keypad Indications while Armed

Option 6 - Monitored KP Buss Output Board

Option 7 - Enable Keypad Tamper (Available from panel Ver:9.08A+)

Option 8 - Limit Event & Dialer to 3 of any one type

Option 1 Code Required to View Memory - If this option is turned on, access to

Memory Mode will only be allowed by using an authorised code. The user must

press <MEMORY> <CODE #> <ENTER> to view memory mode. Codes are

authorised by turning on option 8 at location P4E. If this option is turned off

anyone can access memory mode.

Option 2 Cancel Handover Zone Function in Stay Mode - If this option is turned on,

any zone programmed with the handover feature will act as a normal delayed

zone during Stay mode (ie the handover feature will be ignored). The zone will

still have the normal handover feature during the full arm state.

Option 3 Output Control from Keypad is Disabled when Armed - If this option is

turned on any User code programmed to operate an output for access control will

be disabled when the area/s assigned to the user code is/are armed (P3E). If the

user code is assigned to area A but area B was armed the code can still operate

the output.

Option 4 Keypad Codes are Disabled During Entry Delay - If this option is turned on

no codes will operate during the entry delay. This forces the user to disarm

before entering the premises.

Option 5 No Keypad Indications while Armed - If this option is turned on and all areas

assigned to keypads are armed, the keypad display will be blank during the

armed state. If any keypad is assigned to areas A&B at location P71E, both areas

must be armed before the display will go blank on arming.

Option 6 Monitored KP Buss Output Board - This option performs a similar function to

option 6 at location P25E10E in that if it is turned on, the Output status

messages are sent to the keypad buss. The difference with this option is when

turned on, the panel is expecting the OUTPUTx4 board connected to the keypad

buss to acknowledge the messages. If the OUTPUTx4 does not acknowledge the

output status messages, the panel will show an output board failure. This option

should only be turned on if the European version of the OUTPUTx4 board

(generally Not available in Australia) that supports this function is connected to

the keypad buss.

Option 7 Enable Keypad Tamper – if this option is turned ON the keypad tamper will be

enabled and can cause Keypad Tamper Alarms if the keypad is removed from the

wall. If this option is OFF – the keypad tamper will be disabled, opening or

removing the keypad from the wall will not cause a tamper alarm at the panel.

Option 8 Limit Events & Dialler to 3 of any one Type - If this option is turned on, the

panel will not record any more than 3 events in memory for any event type

during a single arm or disarm cycle, e.g. if the AC Failed 4 times while armed or

disarmed, the panel will only record the AC fail 3 times in memory. And will only

report the AC fail 3 times to the dialler. As soon as the arm state has changed,

any count are reset back to zero again. If this option is off there is no limit on

the recording and reporting of Events.


72

Setting Time, Date and Daylight SavingSetting Time, Date and Daylight SavingSetting Time, Date and Daylight SavingSetting Time, Date and Daylight Saving

Setting Real Time ClockSetting Real Time ClockSetting Real Time ClockSetting Real Time Clock

REAL TIME CLOCK HOUR/MINUTE - P26E 1E (Value 0-2359)

REAL TIME CLOCK DAY of WEEK - P26E 2E (Value 1-7) [where 1 =Sunday, 2 =

Monday, 3 = Tuesday, etc]

REAL TIME CLOCK DATE/MONTH/YEAR - P26E 3E (Value DDMMYY) for example

020904 = 2nd September, 2004

The Real Time Clock controls the Time-zones, the timing of automatic test calls and is used

to Time & Date stamp the events in the Event Buffer. Ensure this is set correctly at the time

of installation so that all of the functions that use a timer will work correctly. The clock is

programmed in 24 hour format (e.g. 00:00-23:59).

Daylight SaDaylight SaDaylight SaDaylight Saving (DLS) Settingsving (DLS) Settingsving (DLS) Settingsving (DLS) Settings DAYLIGHT SAVING ACTIVE - P26E 4E (If LED # 1 is On, Daylight Saving is currently

active)

NOTE: If you are in Daylight Saving Time when the alarm system is installed you MUST turn

on option 1 at location P26E 4E so that the panel knows that Daylight Saving Time is

currently active. Failure to do this will not allow the clock to automatically adjust to the

correct time when Daylight Saving Time Ends.

DAYLIGHT SAVING START SUNDAY - P27E 1E (Value 0-5, 0= DLS Disabled)

DAYLIGHT SAVING END SUNDAY - P27E 2E (Value 0-5, 0= DLS Disabled)

DAYLIGHT SAVING START MONTH - P28E 1E (Value 1-12)

DAYLIGHT SAVING END MONTH - P28E 2E (Value 1-12)

DAYLIGHT SAVING START HOUR - P29E 1E (Value 0-23)

DAYLIGHT SAVING END HOUR - P29E 2E (Value 0-23)

If Daylight Saving (DLS) is used, the actual start and stop details can be entered here and

the clock will automatically adjust for daylight saving.

73


NOTE:NOTE:NOTE:NOTE:

With all output programming options we refer to outputs 1-8. On the Runner-8 panel, Only Output 1 & 2 are available and on the Runner-16 panel, Only outputs 1-4 are available as standard, with outputs 5-8 requiring the connection of the optional 4 way output expander unit that connects to the keypad buss ( the output expander provides 4 change-over relay contacts). With the Runner-8, you would require 2 x optional 4 way output expander units.

OUTPUT OPTIONS OUTPUT OPTIONS OUTPUT OPTIONS OUTPUT OPTIONS

OUTPUT OPTIONS “A”OUTPUT OPTIONS “A”OUTPUT OPTIONS “A”OUTPUT OPTIONS “A”

OUTPUT OPTIONS “A” - P34E 1-8E

Option 1 - Invert Output

Option 2 - Flash Output

Option 3 - Single Pulse to Output

Option 4 - Lockout Output

Option 5 - DTMF Remote Control of Output

Option 6 - Keypad User can Operate Output

Option 7 - <CONTROL> button can Operate Output

Option 8 - Pulsed Chime Alarm (linked to pulse timer)

Option 1 Invert Output - This option is used to invert the normal state of the output. The panel uses open collector transistor switches and the default state of all outputs is off

(open). When in alarm the transistor is turned on and the output goes low (0V). The

invert option reverses this function.

Option 2 Flash Output - When the output is turned on this option causes the output to flash at a rate set by the pulse timer (P39E). One use is to flash a lamp during an alarm.

DO NOT turn this option on if the Output is to be manually controlled by a user or the “Control” button.

Option 3 Single Pulse to Output - This option produces a single pulse at the output when an alarm occurs (the pulse time is the value programmed at the output pulse timer

P39E).

Option 4 Lockout Output - This option is used to limit the output to one operation per arming period.

Option 5 DTMF Remote Control of Output - If the panel is set-up so a User can dial in from a remote telephone to perform “DTMF Code Control” (P175E12E) of the Outputs, this

option selects which Outputs are able to be controlled by the remote user.

Option 6 Keypad User can Operate Output - If a DTMF Output control code is programmed into the panel (P175E12E), the same code can be entered at the panel keypad to

allow local control of the Outputs selected at this address.

Option 7 <Control> button can Operate Output - The <Control> button on the keypad can also be used to turn outputs on or off. For that to happen this option must be

turned on for the output/s concerned. To turn an output on locally at the keypad the

operator simply presses the <Control> button for 2 seconds at which time the

“Control” LED will illuminate on an LED keypad or the word “OUTPUTS” will appear on

the LCD keypad to indicate that the Control mode is active. If any controllable

outputs are currently on they will be indicated at the keypad. The operator can now

74

press a button relating to the output/s they wish to control eg pressing the “1” button

will turn output 1 on or off, The “2” button for output 2 etc. When finished the

operator then presses the <ENTER> button to cancel the Control mode and return to

normal.

Option 8 Pulsed Chime Mode Alarm - Chime Zones programmed to this output will turn the output on for the duration of the Chime to Output time period (P41E). If this option is

on the output will pulse at the pulse timer rate (P39E) for the duration of the chime

zone to output timer (P41E).

OUTPUT OPTIONS “B”OUTPUT OPTIONS “B”OUTPUT OPTIONS “B”OUTPUT OPTIONS “B”

OUTPUT OPTIONS “B” - P35E 1-8E

Option 1 - Mains Fail to Output

Option 2 - Fuse Failure to Output

Option 3 - Battery Low to Output

Option 4 - Telephone Line Failure to Output

Option 5 - Supervisory Radio Failure to Output

Option 6 - Sensor-Watch Alarm to Output

Option 7 - System Tamper to Output

Option 8 - Receiver Fail to Output

Option 1 Mains Fail to Output - This option is used to assign a Mains Fail alarm to an Output.

Option 2 Fuse Failure to Output - This option is used to assign a Fuse Failure alarm to an Output. The on-board fuses are thermally activated. If excessive current is drawn

from a fuse it will disconnect the power until the problem is resolved. There are two

thermal fuses protecting the various 12v DC outputs.

Option 3 Battery Low to Output - This option is used to assign a Battery Low alarm to an

Output.

Option 4 Telephone Line Failure to Output - This option is used to assign a Telephone Line Failure alarm to an Output.

Option 5 Supervisory Radio failure to Output - This option is used to assign a Radio Detector Supervisory Fail alarm to an Output.

Option 6 Sensor-Watch Alarm to Output - This option is used to assign a Sensor-Watch alarm to an Output. A Sensor-Watch alarm occurs when a detector has not operated

within a set period of time.

Option 7 System Tamper to Output - This option is used to assign a panel tamper alarm to an Output.

Option 8 Receiver Fail to Output - If the receiver fail timer expires (see P25E7E) this option will assign the alarm to an Output.

OUTPUT OPTIONS “C”OUTPUT OPTIONS “C”OUTPUT OPTIONS “C”OUTPUT OPTIONS “C”

OUTPUT OPTIONS “C” - P36E 1-8E

Option 1 - Walk-test Pulse to Output

Option 2 - Pulse Output every 5 seconds when Disarmed

Option 3 - Pulse Output on Kiss-off Following Arming

Option 4 - Pulse Output on Kiss-off Following a Zone Alarm

Option 5 – Output Disable when P25E3E timer is running (Available from panel Ver:9.08A+)

Option 1 Walk-test Pulse to Output - When the panel is in Walk-test Mode, this option assigns a pulse to the Output every time a zone is triggered. The pulse is linked to

the Output Pulse time (P39E).


75

Option 2 Pulse Output every 5 seconds when Disarmed - This option will cause the Output to pulse every 5 seconds when the panel is disarmed. The pulse time is linked to the

Output Pulse time (P39E).

Option 3 Pulse Output on Kiss-off Following Arming - This option will cause the Output to

pulse for 2 seconds when the panel is armed and the message has been kissed off by

the monitoring company. The pulse time is linked to the Output Pulse time (P39E)

which is defaulted to 2 seconds.

Option 4 Pulse Output on Kiss-off Following a Zone Alarm - This option will cause the Output to pulse for 2 seconds when a zone has gone into alarm and has been kissed

off by the monitoring company. The zone must have with option 7 turned ON at

P124E. The pulse time is linked to the Output Pulse time (P39E) which is defaulted to

2 seconds.

Option 5 Output Disable when P25E3E timer is running - This option will cause the Output to be disabled when the dialler reporting delay is active. It is designed to keep

external audible alarms silent when the dial delay is active (allowing internal alarms

to warn that the alarm will be reported to monitoring if not unset) but if the alarm

hasn’t been reset before the timer expires the external alarm will sound. (Available from panel Ver:9.08A+)


76

OUTPUT OPTIONS “D”OUTPUT OPTIONS “D”OUTPUT OPTIONS “D”OUTPUT OPTIONS “D”

OUTPUT OPTIONS “D” - P37E 1-8E

Option 1 - Siren Driver to Output (applies to O/P 1&2 only, requires an 8Ώ speaker)

Option 2 - Output Reset/Chime Timers are in Minutes

Option 3 - Output “Silenced” for 10 seconds on key-press

Option 4 - Turn Output OFF during Two Way Voice Mode (Available from panel Ver:9.06+)

Option 5 - Spare

Option 6 - Spare

Option 7 - Spare

Option 8 - Output Monitored (applies to O/P 1&2 only)

Option 1 Siren Driver to Output - This option is used to assign a Modulated Siren tone to an Output. The option only applies to Outputs 1 and 2. For the modulated siren tone to work correctly, an 8Ώ speaker must be connected to the output concerned. Outputs 1

and 2 have different sounds so that a user can tell which output is operating. If this

option is turned on for outputs 1 and/or 2 it will also inhibit the output during two

way voice mode (see option 4 below)

Option 2 Output Reset/Chime Timers are in Minutes - The default setting for the

Output reset time (P40E) is in seconds and the Output Chime time (P41E) is

in 1/10th seconds. If longer times are required, this option turns both the

reset and chime times into minutes (e.g. 1-9999 minutes for the reset time

and 1-255 minutes for the chime time).

Option 3 Output “Silenced” for 10 seconds on key-press - When the alarm is Armed and activated it can be difficult sometimes to turn the alarm off because you are unable to

hear the beeps as you enter you code at the keypad. If this option is turned on the

selected output/s will silence (turn off) for 10 seconds on the first button press at any

keypad. This should allow easy Disarming of the alarm by a valid User. If the alarm is

not turned off within the 10 seconds, the outputs will turn on again. This function will

only work once during an Armed cycle and the panel must be Disarmed before it will

work again.

Option 4 Turn Output OFF during Two Way Voice Mode - If the panel has a full duplex two

way voice board fitted and the settings at P175E2E option 8 and P183E option 5 are

set to allow full duplex mode, any outputs with this option turned on will be disabled

while two way voice is operational. This is to ensure that local sirens do not interfere

with the two way voice audio signal. (Available from panel Ver:9.06+)

Option 8 Output Monitored - This option is used to allow Monitoring of the Output status (eg

wire to siren has been cut). The option only applies to Outputs 1 and 2.

Output On Delay, Pulse, Reset and Chime Output On Delay, Pulse, Reset and Chime Output On Delay, Pulse, Reset and Chime Output On Delay, Pulse, Reset and Chime

TimesTimesTimesTimes

Output On Delay TimeOutput On Delay TimeOutput On Delay TimeOutput On Delay Time

OUTPUT ON DELAY TIME - P38E 1-8E (0-9999 Seconds, 0 = no delay)

The “On” delay allows the operation of the Output to be delayed by the time programmed at

this location. If set to “0” there will be no on delay and the Output will operate the instant it

is turned on.


77

Output Pulse TimeOutput Pulse TimeOutput Pulse TimeOutput Pulse Time ( Flash Time ) ( Flash Time ) ( Flash Time ) ( Flash Time )

OUTPUT PULSE TIME - P39E 1-8E (0-255 1/10th Seconds, e.g. 20 = 2 secs)

The Pulse time affects the time the output turns on when the pulse timer is used on the

Output. The pulse time is in 1/10th second increments so that very quick timing can be

achieved. Functions like radio key Arm/Disarm Chirps to an Output or a flashing output

(P34E option 2) all use the pulse timer. If access tags are assigned with the chirp function

(P46E4E) and the LED on an access reader is set to follow an output with the chirps assigned

(P98E) then this timer must be set to a minimum value of 10 for the reader LED to display

the chirps.

OutpOutpOutpOutput Reset Timeut Reset Timeut Reset Timeut Reset Time

OUTPUT RESET TIME - P40E 1-8E (0-9999 Seconds, 0 = latched output)

The Reset time affects the time the output turns on when an alarm is active. The default

range is 0-9999 seconds but if option 2 at location P37E is on the range is 0-9999 minutes.

Chime Mode TimeChime Mode TimeChime Mode TimeChime Mode Time

CHIME MODE TIME - P41E 1-8E (0-255 1/10th Seconds, e.g. 20 = 2 secs)

The Chime Mode time affects the time the output turns on when a Chime Zone is activated.

The Chime time is in 1/10th second increments so that very quick timing can be achieved.

Output Voice Board Remote Control Start Output Voice Board Remote Control Start Output Voice Board Remote Control Start Output Voice Board Remote Control Start

MessagesMessagesMessagesMessages

Start of “DTMF Output Control” Status MessagesStart of “DTMF Output Control” Status MessagesStart of “DTMF Output Control” Status MessagesStart of “DTMF Output Control” Status Messages

START OF “DTMF OUTPUT CONTROL” STATUS MESSAGES - P42E 1-8E (0-99)

If a Voice Board is connected to the panel it is possible to dial the panel from a remote

telephone and turn outputs On or Off using a 4 digit code with voice prompts provided by

the Voice Board to identify what function you are controlling. Please see Voice Board

programming on Page 18 for more details.

UnUnUnUn----Map an OutputMap an OutputMap an OutputMap an Output UN-MAP OUTPUTS - P43E 1-8E

If you are using an Output for a special purpose and do not need the standard defaults

assigned to that output you can remove all defaults at this location. For example if you are

using output number 4 to open a door via a Radio Key and you don’t want any alarms to be

assigned to the output press P43E4E and ALL defaults will be removed. This removes all

options assigned to the output and makes the reset time “0” for latched operation.

Assigning a TimeAssigning a TimeAssigning a TimeAssigning a Time----Zone to an OutputZone to an OutputZone to an OutputZone to an Output

ASSIGN A TIME-ZONE TO OUTPUTS - P44E 1-8E (O/P#) Value = Time-zone 1-8

Any of the 8 Time-zones can be assigned to outputs 1-8. If a time-zone is assigned to an

output it will turn the output on when the T/Z starts and turn the output off when the T/Z

ends. You should un-map the output at P43E first before assigning the T/Z to ensure that

only the T/Z will control the state of the output.

78

AreasAreasAreasAreas

Area Arm and Special Function OptionsArea Arm and Special Function OptionsArea Arm and Special Function OptionsArea Arm and Special Function Options

Area Options “A”Area Options “A”Area Options “A”Area Options “A”

AREA OPTIONS “A” - P45E 1-2E (1 = Area A, 2 = Area B)

Option 1 - <ARM> button Required Before Code to Arm

Option 2 - <STAY> button Required Before code to Arm Stay Mode

Option 3 - <CODE> Required to Arm

Option 4 - <CODE> Required to Bypass

Option 5 - Spare

Option 6 - Report Arm Signal at the end of the Exit Delay

Option 7 - Can Arm only if All Zones Sealed (Ready)

Option 8 - Can Arm Stay Mode only if All Zones Sealed (Ready)

Option 1 <ARM> button Required Before Code to Arm - This option determines if the <ARM> button must be pressed before a code is entered to Arm an Area. If a User

has access to both Areas and this option is turned on, the special keypad arming

functions described on Page 55 will apply.

Option 2 <STAY> button Required Before Code to Arm Stay Mode - This option determines if the <STAY> button must be pressed before a code is entered to Arm

Stay Mode. If a User has access to both Areas and this option is turned on, the

special keypad arming functions described on Page 55 will apply.

Option 3 <CODE> Required to Arm - If this option is turned on, the <ARM> button is disabled and the panel requires a code to Arm.

Option 4 <CODE> Required to Bypass - If this option is turned on, the <BYPASS> button cannot access Bypass Mode directly. To enter Bypass mode the User must press

<BYPASS> <CODE> <ENTER> before they can bypass zones.

Option 5 Spare

Option 6 Report Arm Signal at the end of the Exit Delay - If this option is on the panel will report the Arm signal to a monitoring station when the exit delay expires. If it is off,

the panel will report the arm signal immediately the system has been armed.

Option 7 Can Arm only if All Zones Sealed (Ready) - If this option is on it stops the panel from arming an area with an unsealed zone (Not Ready). If off, the panel can be

armed if the Ready LED is not on.

Option 8 Can Arm Stay Mode only if All Zones Sealed (Ready) - If this option is on it stops the panel from arming stay mode if an area has an unsealed zone (Not Ready).

If off, the panel can be arm stay mode if the Ready LED is not on.


79

Area Options “B” Area Options “B” Area Options “B” Area Options “B”

AREA OPTIONS “B” - P46E 1-2E (1 = Area A, 2 = Area B)

Option 1 - Use Near and Verified Alarm reporting for All zones in this Area

Option 2 - Area will Arm at the end of Time-Zone

Option 3 - Area will Disarm at the beginning of Time-Zone

Option 4 - Assign Chirps to Access tags

Option 5 - Spare

Option 6 – Spare

Option 7 - Cannot Arm if Zone Unsealed at end of Exit Delay (Available from panel Ver:9.06+)

Option 8 - Spare

Option 1 Use Near and Verified Alarm reporting for All zones in this Area - To reduce the possibility of false alarms the panel can require two alarms on different zones within a 45 minute period

before a full alarm will be sent. If this option is turned on it applies to all zones assigned to that

area. An alarm on a single zone will send a Near Alarm report to the monitoring station. If no

further alarms occur within 45 minutes the near alarm timer is reset and a restore is sent for the

zone that activated. If the zone that activated is still in alarm when the 45 minute timer expires, a

zone bypass for that zone will be sent and the zone will remain bypassed until the area is

disarmed. Any new alarms after the timer has expired will send another Near Alarm report. If a

second alarm on a different zone occurs within 45 minutes of the Near alarm, an Intrusion

Verified alarm report will be sent. This format only applies to Contact ID and Pager reporting.

Turning this option on will stop zone alarms from being reported in Domestic & Voice formats as

there are no messages for near and confirmed alarms. You must turn this option off if using

Domestic or Voice formats.

Option 2 Area will Arm at the end of Time-Zone - The panel is capable of automatically arming on a Time-Zone. If this option is turned on and a Time-Zone is selected at P68E, the Area will

automatically arm when the Time-Zone ends. If the panel cannot arm because it is not “Ready”, a

fail to arm report will be sent.

Option 3 Area will Disarm at the beginning of Time-Zone - The panel is capable of automatically disarming on a Time-Zone. If this option is turned on and a Time-Zone is selected at P68E, the

Area will automatically disarm when the Time-Zone starts.

Option 4 Assign Chirps to Access Tags - If the panel is being Armed or Disarmed by an Access Tag/Card from a proximity reader it is possible to link the pendant chirps programming (P50E-P53E) to

Arming or Disarming via the Access Tag or Card. If this option is On the chirps will apply to Access

Tag/Cards. If the chirps are required to be displayed at the reader LED, the minimum pulse timer

for the output (P39E) must be a value of 10.

Option 7 Cannot Arm if Zone Unsealed at end of Exit Delay - If this option is turned on and a zone

becomes unsealed as the exit delay expires the panel will fail to arm and report this via the

dialer. The unsealed zone must be corrected and the system re-armed again. (Available from panel Ver:9.06+)


80

Area Arm/Stay Pulse & Chirps to OutputsArea Arm/Stay Pulse & Chirps to OutputsArea Arm/Stay Pulse & Chirps to OutputsArea Arm/Stay Pulse & Chirps to Outputs

Area Arm Indication to Output Area Arm Indication to Output Area Arm Indication to Output Area Arm Indication to Output ( Arm Follow )

AREA ARM INDICATION to OUTPUT - P47E 1-2E (1 = Area A, 2 = Area B)

Option 1 - Output 1 Option 5 - Output 5




For monitoring purposes an Arm indication can be assigned to an Output. Each Area can

have a separate arm indication assigned to a different output if required.

Area Stay Arm Indication to Output Area Stay Arm Indication to Output Area Stay Arm Indication to Output Area Stay Arm Indication to Output ( Stay Follow )

AREA STAY ARM INDICATION to OUTPUT - P48E 1-2E (1 = Area A, 2 = Area B)





For monitoring purposes a Stay Arm indication can be assigned to an Output. Each Area can

have a separate indication assigned to a different output if required.

Area Disarm IArea Disarm IArea Disarm IArea Disarm Indication to Output ndication to Output ndication to Output ndication to Output ( Open Follow )

AREA DISARM INDICATION to OUTPUT - P49E 1-2E (1 = Area A, 2 = Area B)





For monitoring purposes a Disarm indication can be assigned to an Output. Each Area can

have a separate disarm indication assigned to a different output if required.

Pendant Arm Chirp to Output Pendant Arm Chirp to Output Pendant Arm Chirp to Output Pendant Arm Chirp to Output

PENDANT ARM CHIRP to OUTPUT - P50E 1-2E (1 = Area A, 2 = Area B)





When Arming the alarm using a Radio Key it is necessary to have some form of Arm

indication. This can done by pulsing an Output once when the area is armed (one chirp). The

Chirp is linked to the pulse time (P39E) for the output concerned. If Output 1 or 2 are used

for the chirp and a horn speaker is connected to the output (see P37E1 or 2E option 1), the

siren on the output will give a single tone for the chirp instead of the swept tone used for

alarms. Also Arming via an Access Tag/Card can generate the Chirp if option 4 is On at P47E.


81

Pendant Stay Mode Arm Chirp to Output Pendant Stay Mode Arm Chirp to Output Pendant Stay Mode Arm Chirp to Output Pendant Stay Mode Arm Chirp to Output

PENDANT STAY MODE ARM CHIRP to OUTPUT - P51E 1-2E (1 = Area A, 2 = Area B)





When Arming Stay Mode using a Radio Key it is necessary to have some form of Arm

indication. This can done by pulsing an Output once when the area is armed (one (1) chirp).

The Chirp is linked to the pulse time (P39E) for the output concerned. If Output 1 or 2 are

used for the chirp and a horn speaker is connected to the output (see P37E1 or 2E option 1),

the siren on the output will give a single tone for the chirp instead of the swept tone used for

alarms. Also Stay Arming via an Access Tag/Card can generate the Chirp if option 4 is On at

P47E.

Pendant Disarm Chirp to Output Pendant Disarm Chirp to Output Pendant Disarm Chirp to Output Pendant Disarm Chirp to Output ( Open Chirp )

PENDANT DISARM CHIRP to OUTPUT - P52E 1-2E (1 = Area A, 2 = Area B)





When Disarming the alarm using a Radio Key it is necessary to have some form of Disarm

indication. This can done by pulsing an Output twice when the area is disarmed (two (2)

chirps). The Chirps are linked to the pulse time (P39E) for the output concerned. If Output 1

or 2 are used for the chirp and a horn speaker is connected to the output (see P37E1 or 2E

option 1), the siren on the output will give a single tone for the chirp instead of the swept

tone used for alarms. Also Disarming via an Access Tag/Card can generate the Chirp if

option 4 is On at P47E.

Pendant Stay Mode Disarm Chirp to Output Pendant Stay Mode Disarm Chirp to Output Pendant Stay Mode Disarm Chirp to Output Pendant Stay Mode Disarm Chirp to Output

PENDANT STAY MODE DISARM CHIRP to OUTPUT - P53E 1-2E

(1 = Area A, 2 = Area B)





When Disarming Stay Mode using a Radio Key it is necessary to have some form of Disarm

indication. This can done by pulsing an Output twice when the Stay Mode is disarmed (two

chirps). The Chirps are linked to the pulse time (P39E) for the output concerned. If Output 1

or 2 are used for the chirp and a horn speaker is connected to the output (see P37E1 or 2E

option 1), the siren on the output will give a single tone for the chirp instead of the swept

tone used for alarms. Also Stay Mode Disarming via an Access Tag/Card can generate the

Chirp if option 4 is On at P47E.


82

Arm Pulse to Output Arm Pulse to Output Arm Pulse to Output Arm Pulse to Output

ARM PULSE to OUTPUT - P54E 1-2E (1 = Area A, 2 = Area B)

Option 1 - Output 1

Option 2 - Output 2

Option 3 - Output 3

Option 4 - Output 4

Option 5 - Output 5

Option 6 - Output 6

Option 7 - Output 7

Option 8 - Output 8

Sometimes it is necessary to have a single pulse to indicate an Arm state. This could be used

to start a video recorder or similar device. Each time an Area is armed, a single pulse will be

applied to the output. The Pulse time (P39E) sets the length of the pulse.

Stay Mode Arm Pulse to Output Stay Mode Arm Pulse to Output Stay Mode Arm Pulse to Output Stay Mode Arm Pulse to Output

STAY MODE ARM PULSE to OUTPUT - P55E 1-2E (1 = Area A, 2 = Area B)





Sometimes it is necessary to have a single pulse to indicate that Stay Mode is Armed. This

could be used to start a video recorder or similar device. Each time an Area Stay Mode is

armed, a single pulse will be applied to the output. The Pulse time (P39E) sets the length of

the pulse .

Disarm Pulse to Output Disarm Pulse to Output Disarm Pulse to Output Disarm Pulse to Output ( Open Pulse )

DISARM PULSE to OUTPUT - P56E 1-2E (1 = Area A, 2 = Area B)





Sometimes it is necessary to have a single pulse to indicate a Disarm state. This could be

used to stop a video recorder or similar device. Each time an Area is disarmed, a single pulse

will be applied to the output. The Pulse time (P39E) sets the length of the pulse.

Stay Mode Disarm Pulse to Output Stay Mode Disarm Pulse to Output Stay Mode Disarm Pulse to Output Stay Mode Disarm Pulse to Output ( Un-stay Pulse )

STAY MODE DISARM PULSE to OUTPUT - P57E 1-2E (1 = Area A, 2 = Area B)





Sometimes it is necessary to have a single pulse to indicate a Disarm of Stay Mode. This

could be used to stop a video recorder or similar device. Each time an Area Stay Mode is

disarmed, a single pulse will be applied to the output. The Pulse time (P39E) sets the length

of the pulse.

83

Armed Exit Delay Beeps to Keypad Armed Exit Delay Beeps to Keypad Armed Exit Delay Beeps to Keypad Armed Exit Delay Beeps to Keypad

ARMED EXIT DELAY BEEPS TO KEYPAD - P58E 1-2E (1 = Area A, 2 = Area B)

Option 1 - Keypad 1 Option 5 - Keypad 5




When an Area is Armed it is useful to have the exit delay beeps occurring at the keypad to

warn the User to exit the premises without delay. If the option is on at this address, that

keypad will beep out the exit delay. The exit beeps occur at one second intervals until the

last 5 seconds at which time they change to 1/2 second intervals to act as a warning that the

delay is about to expire.

Stay Mode Exit Delay Beeps to Keypad Stay Mode Exit Delay Beeps to Keypad Stay Mode Exit Delay Beeps to Keypad Stay Mode Exit Delay Beeps to Keypad

STAY MODE EXIT DELAY BEEPS TO KEYPAD - P59E 1-2E (1 = Area A, 2 = Area B)





When an Area is Armed in Stay Mode it is useful to have the exit delay beeps occurring at

the keypad to warn the User to exit the premises without delay. If the option is on at this

address, that keypad will beep out the exit delay. This option may be turned off for Stay

Mode to make the keypad silent when arming at night time. The exit beeps occur at one

second intervals until the last 5 seconds at which time they change to 1/2 second intervals

to act as a warning that the delay is about to expire. When arming Stay Mode the exit and

entry delays can be cancelled by pressing the <ENTER> button following arming of Stay

Mode. The next time Stay Mode is armed, if the <ENTER> button is not pressed, all

programmed exit and entry delays will apply.

Armed Exit Delay Time Armed Exit Delay Time Armed Exit Delay Time Armed Exit Delay Time

ARMED EXIT DELAY TIME - P60E 1-2E (1 = Area A, 2 = Area B) (Value 0-255 Seconds)

Each Area can have its own exit delay time. The delay can be programmed from 1-255

seconds in one second increments. If the exit delay is set to “0” the panel will be instantly

armed.

STAY MODE EXIT DELAY TIME STAY MODE EXIT DELAY TIME STAY MODE EXIT DELAY TIME STAY MODE EXIT DELAY TIME

STAY MODE EXIT DELAY TIME - P61E 1-2E (1 = Area A, 2 = Area B) (Value 0-255

Seconds)

Each Stay Mode Area can have their own exit delay time. The delay can be programmed

from 1-255 seconds in one second increments. If the exit delay is set to “0” the panel will be

instantly armed.


84

Monitoring Account Code Number Monitoring Account Code Number Monitoring Account Code Number Monitoring Account Code Number MONITORING ACCOUNT CODE NUMBER - P62E 1-2E (1 = Area A, 2 = Area B) (Value

0000-FFFF)

When the dialler is reporting to a monitoring station there must be a unique account code

programmed to identify the panel. There is an account code for each area. The account code

is 4 digits. Each digit can be a number from 0-9 as well as the special characters B,C,D,E &

F. The chart below shows how the special characters are entered.

LED KEYPAD

BUTTON

LED KEYPAD

INDICATION

LCD KEYPAD

BUTTON

LCD KEYPAD

CID & 4+2 INDICATIONS

LCD KEYPAD

TELEPHONE INDICATIONS

CID & 4+2

SPECIAL

CHARACTERS

TELEPHONE NUMBER

SPECIAL FUNCTION

“BYPASS” - CONTROL

& 0

- DELETE # DELETE # DELETE #

“PANIC” 11 CONTROL

& 2

B # “B” “#”

“MEMORY” 12 CONTROL & 3

C * “C” “*”

“CONTROL” 13 CONTROL

& 4

D - “D” “2.5 sec

Pause”

“ARM” 14 CONTROL

& 5

E w “E” “Wait for 2nd

Dial-tone”

“STAY” 15

CONTROL

& 6

F = “F” “5 sec Pause”

Remote Arm/Disarm DTMF Code & Start Remote Arm/Disarm DTMF Code & Start Remote Arm/Disarm DTMF Code & Start Remote Arm/Disarm DTMF Code & Start

Voice MessageVoice MessageVoice MessageVoice Message

DTMF Remote Control Code Number DTMF Remote Control Code Number DTMF Remote Control Code Number DTMF Remote Control Code Number

DTMF REMOTE CODE NUMBER - P63E 1-2E (1 = Area A, 2 = Area B) (Value 1-4 digit

code 0-9999)

The panel can be configured to allow remote Arm/Disarm of each Area via a remote

telephone. The codes programmed at this address are the DTMF code that must be used

when performing this function. When dialling the panel and it has answered the call, after

waiting for the panel modem tones to stop you can enter in the 4 digit DTMF code and the

current status will be given of the Area associated with the code entered. After that, if you

press the “*” button on the telephone the status of the area will toggle eg if is was

previously armed it will change to disarmed or vice versa. When finished you simply hang-up

and 15 seconds later the panel will release the line. To perform this function when using the Runner-8, the Voice Board MUST be fitted, as the Runner-8 does Not have a built-in DTMF Decoder.

Start of “DTMF Arm/Disarm” Status MessagesStart of “DTMF Arm/Disarm” Status MessagesStart of “DTMF Arm/Disarm” Status MessagesStart of “DTMF Arm/Disarm” Status Messages

START OF “DTMF ARM/DISARM” STATUS MESSAGES - P64E 1-2E (1 = Area A, 2 =

Area B) (0-99)


85

If a Voice Board is connected to the panel it is possible to dial the panel from a remote

telephone and Arm or Disarm each Area using a 4 digit code with voice prompts provided by

the Voice Board to identify what Area you are controlling. Please see Voice Board

programming on Page 16 for more details.

Armed Exit Beeps to Output Armed Exit Beeps to Output Armed Exit Beeps to Output Armed Exit Beeps to Output

ARMED EXIT BEEPS to OUTPUT - P65E 1-2E (1 = Area A, 2 = Area B)





Sometimes it can be useful to extend the exit beeps, that occur at a keypad, to be present

on an audible device on the exit path. This option allows the exit beeps during arming to be

assigned to any of the 8 outputs. The Pulse time (P39E) sets the length of each beep.

Stay Mode Arm Exit Beeps to Output Stay Mode Arm Exit Beeps to Output Stay Mode Arm Exit Beeps to Output Stay Mode Arm Exit Beeps to Output

STAY MODE ARM EXIT BEEPS to OUTPUT - P66E 1-2E (1 = Area A, 2 = Area B)





Sometimes it can be useful to extend the exit beeps, that occur at a keypad, to be present

on an audible device on the exit path. This option allows the exit beeps during the arming of

stay mode to be assigned to any of the 8 outputs. The Pulse time (P39E) sets the length of

each beep.

Area Delinquency Delay Area Delinquency Delay Area Delinquency Delay Area Delinquency Delay AREA DELINQUENCY DELAY - P67E 1-2E (1 = Area A, 2 = Area B) (Value 0-99 Days)

Each Area can have their own Delinquency time. The delinquency time monitors the

arm/disarms of each Area. If an Area has not been armed within the set number of days a

delinquency report will be sent. Each time an Area is armed the delinquency timer is reset. A

value of “0” disables the delinquency monitoring.

NOTE: If the default value of “0” is changed at this location (eg a value of 10 is entered

meaning 10 days), the next time the area is armed a delinquency restore message will be

sent via the dialler (Event type 454) as a test that the function is operating.

Automatic Arm/Disarm Time Zone Automatic Arm/Disarm Time Zone Automatic Arm/Disarm Time Zone Automatic Arm/Disarm Time Zone AUTOMATIC ARM/DISARM TIMEZONE - P68E 1-2E (1 = Area A, 2 = Area B) (Value 1-8)

Option 1 - Time-Zone 1 Option 5 - Time-Zone 5




If Option 2 or 3 are turned on location P46E then the Area can be automatically armed or

disarmed by a time-zone/s. You can assign more than one time-zone to each Area. If

assigning multiple time-zones you should insure that they do not overlap as this could

cause confusion. A Time-zone would typically be 0830-1700 Monday-Friday. An area

will turn on when the Time-zone ends (eg 1700) and turn off when a Time-zone

starts (eg 0830)

86

KeypadsKeypadsKeypadsKeypads

Keypad Area AsKeypad Area AsKeypad Area AsKeypad Area Assignmentsignmentsignmentsignment

KEYPAD AREA ASSIGNMENT - P71E 1-8E

Option 1 - Area “A”

Option 2 - Area “B”

Option 1 Area “A” - This option assigns Area A to keypads. If a keypad is assigned to only Area A it can only Arm or Disarm that area.

Option 2 Area “B” - This option assigns Area B to keypads. If a keypad is assigned to only Area B it can only Arm or Disarm that area.

Keypad Button Operations, Misc. Beeps and Keypad Button Operations, Misc. Beeps and Keypad Button Operations, Misc. Beeps and Keypad Button Operations, Misc. Beeps and

LED Control LED Control LED Control LED Control

Keypad Button OperationsKeypad Button OperationsKeypad Button OperationsKeypad Button Operations ( keys options ) ( keys options ) ( keys options ) ( keys options )

KEYPAD BUTTON OPTIONS - P72E 1-8E

Option 1 - <CHIME> or <CONTROL><PROGRAM> button Enabled

Option 2 - <BYPASS> button Enabled

Option 3 - <PANIC> button Enabled

Option 4 - Delayed Operation of <PANIC> button

Option 5 - <1> & <3> Panic Alarm Enabled

Option 6 - <4> & <6> Fire Alarm Enabled

Option 7 - <7> & <9> Medical Alarm Enabled

Option 8 - Stay Armed Beep to Keypad (Available from panel Ver:9.06+)

Option 1 <CHIME> - This option enables the <CHIME> button on the Crow LCD keypads. Chime alarms to the keypad buzzer and outputs are disabled when “Chime” is off. If a

zone is programmed as a Chime Zone, it can beep the buzzer on a keypad and/or

turn on an output as well to give a local “CHIME” indication. A typical use of “Chime”

Mode is as a door minder in a shop. Sometimes it may be desirable to disable Chime

mode without the need to reprogram the panel. This can be achieved by allowing

Chime Mode to be disabled with the <CHIME> button. If you press the <CHIME>

button on a Crow LCD keypad for 2 seconds (and this option is turned on for that

keypad) the display will show “Chime Mode OFF”. This means that the buzzer will now

not sound at the keypad concerned and any Chime Mode Outputs will not activate.

Performing the process again will toggle chime mode back to the on state again.

Option 2 <BYPASS> button Enabled - This option enables the <BYPASS> button (by keypad number) on any keypads connected to the panel .

Option 3 <PANIC> button Enabled - This option enables the <PANIC> button (by keypad

number) on the LED keypad connected to the panel .

Option 4 Delayed Operation of <PANIC> button - This option assigns a 2 second delay before the <PANIC> button will cause an alarm. The button must be held down for

longer than 2 seconds to create a panic alarm.

87

Option 5 <1> & <3> Panic Alarm Enabled - This option enables a Panic Alarm to be created when buttons <1> & <3> are pressed simultaneously on the LED or keypad. It also

enables the <CHIME> & <CONTROL> Panic Alarm when both buttons are pressing

simultaneously on a Crow LCD keypad.

Option 6 <4> & <6> Fire Alarm Enabled - This option enables a Fire Alarm to be created when buttons <4> & <6> are pressed simultaneously on the LED keypad. It also

enables the <A> & Fire Alarm when both buttons are pressing simultaneously

on a Crow LCD keypad.

Option 7 <7> & <9> Medical Alarm Enabled - This option enables a Medical Alarm to be created when buttons <7> & <9> are pressed simultaneously on the LED keypad. It

also enables the & <CHIME> Medical Alarm when both buttons are pressing

simultaneously on a Crow LCD keypad.

Option 8 Stay Armed Beep to Keypad – If this option is turned on the keypad will give three short beeps when Stay Mode is armed. It is designed to be used when stay mode exit

delay beeps (P59E) are turned off to provide an audible indication that Stay mode is

now armed from the selected keypad. (Available from panel Ver:9.06+)

Keypad System Beeps & Led OptionsKeypad System Beeps & Led OptionsKeypad System Beeps & Led OptionsKeypad System Beeps & Led Options

KEYPAD SYSTEM BEEPS & LED OPTIONS - P73E 1-8E

Option 1 - Mains Fail Beeps Keypad Buzzer

Option 2 - Fuse Fail Beeps Keypad Buzzer

Option 3 - Battery Low Beeps Keypad Buzzer

Option 4 - Telephone Line Fail Beeps Keypad Buzzer

Option 5 - System Tamper Beeps Keypad Buzzer

Option 6 - Receiver Fail Beeps Keypad Buzzer

Option 7 - Turn Off Keypad LED’s when Armed/ Turn off keypads LED'S if not touched after 10 sec

Option 8 - Turn Off Keypad LCD & Keypad Backlighting on Mains Fail

Option 1 Mains Fail Beeps Keypad Buzzer - If this option is on a Mains Failure will cause the keypad buzzer to sound continuously. The continuous beep will automatically clear

when the Mains returns to normal or it can be silenced by pressing the <ENTER>

button on the keypad.

Option 2 Fuse Fail Beeps Keypad Buzzer - If this option is on a Fuse Failure (12v DC output

short) will cause the keypad buzzer to sound continuously. The continuous beep will

automatically clear when the short is removed and the fuse returns to normal or it

can be silenced by pressing the <ENTER> button on the keypad.

Option 3 Battery Low Beeps Keypad Buzzer - If this option is on a Panel Battery Low will cause the keypad buzzer to sound continuously. The continuous beep will

automatically clear when the battery returns to normal or it can be silenced by

pressing the <ENTER> button on the keypad.

Option 4 Telephone Line Fail Beeps Keypad Buzzer - If this option is on a Telephone Line Failure will cause the keypad buzzer to sound continuously. The continuous beep will

automatically clear when the Telephone Line returns to normal or it can be silenced

by pressing the <ENTER> button on the keypad.

Option 5 System Tamper Beeps Keypad Buzzer - If this option is on a Panel Tamper Alarm will cause the keypad buzzer to sound continuously. The Alarm must then be cleared

by entering in a valid code at the keypad.

Option 6 Receiver Fail Beeps Keypad Buzzer - If this option is on a Receiver Failure will cause the keypad buzzer to sound continuously. The continuous beep will

automatically clear when the Receiver starts to see transmissions again or it can be

silenced by pressing the <ENTER> button on the keypad.

Option 7 Turn Off Keypad LED’s when Armed / Turn off keypads LED'S if not touched

after 10 sec

This option allows the LED’s on a keypad to be turned off when the panel is in the

Armed state. It is normally used to cut the illumination from a keypad at night time.

The LED’s will return to the normal state on disarming of the alarm. The LED’s will

88

turn off within 90 seconds of arming the system. Also if this option is on, the keypad

LED'S will automatically turned Off after 10 sec if the keypad was not touched and

Zone LED’s will turn Off 10 seconds After Arming. (Available from panel Ver:9.08A+)

Option 8 Turn Off Keypad LCD & Keypad Backlighting on Mains Fail - This option allows

the backlighting on an LCD on a keypad (both the keypad buttons and the LCD

module backlighting) to be turned off when there is a Mains Failure. It is normally

used to cut the power consumed by the keypad during a power failure. The LCD

backlighting will turn off within 90 seconds of the mains failing. If a button is pressed

at the keypad the backlighting will turn back on again. Following 90 seconds of no

keypad activity the backlighting will turn off. The LCD backlighting will return to the

normal state when Mains is restored.

Keypad Arm, Stay, A and B Button OptionsKeypad Arm, Stay, A and B Button OptionsKeypad Arm, Stay, A and B Button OptionsKeypad Arm, Stay, A and B Button Options

Keypad <Arm> Button Area AssignmentKeypad <Arm> Button Area AssignmentKeypad <Arm> Button Area AssignmentKeypad <Arm> Button Area Assignment

Keypad ARM area

KEYPAD <ARM> BUTTON AREA ASSIGNMENT - P74E 1-8E



Option 1 Area “A” - This option assigns the keypad <ARM> button to Area A. If a keypad <ARM> button is assigned to only Area A it can only Arm or Disarm that area.

Option 2 Area “B” - This option assigns the keypad <ARM> button to Area B. If a keypad

<ARM> button is assigned to only Area B it can only Arm or Disarm that area.

Keypad <Arm> Button Area OptionsKeypad <Arm> Button Area OptionsKeypad <Arm> Button Area OptionsKeypad <Arm> Button Area Options

KEYPAD ARM Access

KEYPAD <ARM> BUTTON AREA OPTIONS - P75E 1-8E

Option 1 - <ARM> button can Arm

Option 2 - <ARM> button can Arm Stay Mode

Option 3 - <ARM> button can Disarm at All Times

Option 4 - <ARM> button can Disarm Stay Mode at All Times

Option 5 - <ARM> button can Reset Alarms

Option 6 - <ARM> button can Arm Latchkey Mode

Option 7 - <ARM> button can Disarm During Exit Delay

Option 8 - <ARM> button can Disarm Stay Mode During Exit Delay

Option 1 <ARM> button can Arm - This option enables single button Arming using the <ARM>

button. For single button operation to work options 1 & 3 must be off at location

P45E.

Option 2 <ARM> button can Arm Stay Mode - This option enables single button Arming of Stay

Mode using the <ARM> button. For single button operation to work options 1 & 3

must be off at location P45E.

(NOTE: Following arming of Stay Mode, if the <ENTER> button is pressed, all entry &

exit delays will be reset to zero for that armed period).

Option 3 <ARM> button can Disarm at All Times - This option enables single button Disarming

using the <ARM> button. For single button disarm operation to work options 1 & 3

must be off at location P45E

Option 4 <ARM> button can Disarm Stay Mode at All Times - This option enables single button

Disarming of Stay Mode using the <ARM> button. For single button disarm operation

to work options 1 & 3 must be off at location P45E

89

Option 5 <ARM> button can Reset Alarms - If this option is On, Pressing the <ARM> button

(provided Option 3 is also On) will reset an alarm condition without having to enter a

user code.

Option 6 <ARM> button can Arm Latchkey Mode - This option enables single button Arming of

the alarm in Latchkey report mode using the <ARM> button. For single button disarm

operation to work options 1 & 3 must be off at location P45E. When Latchkey Mode is

set on Arming, any code without the Latchkey option (P4E Option 6) used to Disarm

the Alarm will cause a Disarm report to be sent via the dialler.

Option 7 <ARM> button can Disarm During Exit Delay - This option allows single button

Disarming using the <ARM> button provided the Armed Mode exit delay is active. If

the exit delay has expired the <ARM> button cannot be used to disarm the alarm.

For single button disarm operation to work options 1 & 3 must be off at location P45E

Option 8 <ARM> button can Disarm Stay Mode During Exit Delay - This option allows single

button Disarming of Stay Mode using the <ARM> button provided the Stay Mode exit

delay is active. If the Stay Mode exit delay has expired the <ARM> button cannot be

used to disarm Stay Mode. For single button disarm operation to work options 1 & 3


Keypad <Stay> Button Area AssignmentKeypad <Stay> Button Area AssignmentKeypad <Stay> Button Area AssignmentKeypad <Stay> Button Area Assignment

Keypad STAY Areas

KEYPAD <STAY> BUTTON AREA ASSIGNMENT - P76E 1-8E



Option 1 Area “A” - This option assigns the keypad <STAY> button to Area A. If a keypad

<STAY> button is assigned to only Area A it can only Arm or Disarm that area.

Option 1 Area “B” - This option assigns the keypad <STAY> button to Area B. If a keypad

<STAY> button is assigned to only Area B it can only Arm or Disarm that area.

Keypad <Stay> Button Area OptionsKeypad <Stay> Button Area OptionsKeypad <Stay> Button Area OptionsKeypad <Stay> Button Area Options

Keypad stay access

KEYPAD <STAY> BUTTON AREA OPTIONS - P77E 1-8E

Option 1 - <STAY> button can Arm

Option 2 - <STAY> button can Arm Stay Mode

Option 3 - <STAY> button can Disarm at All Times

Option 4 - <STAY> button can Disarm Stay Mode at All Times

Option 5 - <STAY> button can Reset Alarms

Option 6 - <STAY> button can Arm Latchkey Mode

Option 7 - <STAY> button can Disarm During Exit Delay

Option 8 - <STAY> button can Disarm Stay Mode During Exit Delay

Option 1 <STAY> button can Arm - This option enables single button Arming using the <STAY> button. For single button operation to work options 2 & 3 must be off at

location P45E.

Option 2 <STAY> button can Arm Stay Mode - This option enables single button Arming of

Stay Mode using the <STAY> button. For single button operation to work options 2 &

3 must be off at location P45E.

(NOTE: Following arming of Stay Mode, if the <ENTER> button is pressed, all entry & exit delays will be reset to zero for that armed period).

Option 3 <STAY> button can Disarm at All Times - This option enables single button Disarming using the <STAY> button. For single button disarm operation to work

options 2 & 3 must be off at location P45E

90

Option 4 <STAY> button can Disarm Stay Mode at All Times - This option enables single button Disarming of Stay Mode using the <STAY> button. For single button disarm

operation to work options 2 & 3 must be off at location P45E

Option 5 <STAY> button can Reset Alarms - If this option is On, Pressing the <STAY>

button (provided Option 3 is also On) will reset an alarm condition without having to

enter a user code.

Option 6 <STAY> button can Arm Latchkey Mode - This option enables single button Arming of the alarm in Latchkey report mode using the <STAY> button. For single

button disarm operation to work options 2 & 3 must be off at location P45E. When

Latchkey Mode is set on Arming, any code without the Latchkey option (P4E Option 6)

used to Disarm the Alarm will cause a Disarm report to be sent via the dialler.

Option 7 <STAY> button can Disarm During Exit Delay - This option allows single button Disarming using the <STAY> button provided the Armed Mode exit delay is active. If

the exit delay has expired the <STAY> button cannot be used to disarm the alarm.

For single button disarm operation to work options 2 & 3 must be off at location P45E

Option 8 <STAY> button can Disarm Stay Mode During Exit Delay - This option allows single button Disarming of Stay Mode using the <STAY> button provided the Stay

Mode exit delay is active. If the Stay Mode exit delay has expired the <STAY> button

cannot be used to disarm Stay Mode. For single button disarm operation to work

options 2 & 3 must be off at location P45E

Keypad <A> Button Area AsKeypad <A> Button Area AsKeypad <A> Button Area AsKeypad <A> Button Area Assignmentsignmentsignmentsignment

Keypad A key Areas

KEYPAD <A> BUTTON AREA ASSIGNMENT - P78E 1-8E (APPLIES TO CROW LCD KEYPAD ONLY)



Option 1 Area “A” - This option assigns the keypad <A> button to Area A. If a keypad <A> button is assigned to only Area A it can only Arm or Disarm that area.

Option 1 Area “B” - This option assigns the keypad <A> button to Area B. If a keypad <A> button is

assigned to only Area B it can only Arm or Disarm that area.

Keypad <A> Button Area OptionsKeypad <A> Button Area OptionsKeypad <A> Button Area OptionsKeypad <A> Button Area Options

Keypad A key Options

KEYPAD <A> BUTTON AREA OPTIONS - P79E 1-8E (APPLIES TO CROW LCD KEYPAD ONLY)

Option 1 - <A> button can Arm

Option 2 - <A> button can Arm Stay Mode

Option 3 - <A> button can Disarm at All Times

Option 4 - <A> button can Disarm Stay Mode at All Times

Option 5 - <A> button can Reset Alarms

Option 6 - <A> button can Arm Latchkey Mode

Option 7 - <A> button can Disarm During Exit Delay

Option 8 - <A> button can Disarm Stay Mode During Exit Delay

Option 1 <A> button can Arm - This option enables single button Arming using the <A> button. For single button operation to work options 2 & 3 must be off at location

P45E.

Option 2 <A> button can Arm Stay Mode - This option enables single button Arming of Stay

Mode using the <A> button. For single button operation to work options 2 & 3 must

be off at location P45E.

NOTE: NOTE: NOTE: NOTE:

Following arming of Stay Mode, if the <ENTER> button is pressed, all entry & exit delays will be reset to zero for that armed period).

91

Option 3 <A> button can Disarm at All Times - This option enables single button Disarming using the <A> button. For single button disarm operation to work options 2 & 3 must

be off at location P45E

Option 4 <A> button can Disarm Stay Mode at All Times - This option enables single button Disarming of Stay Mode using the <A> button. For single button disarm


Option 5 <A> button can Reset Alarms - If this option is On, Pressing the <A> button (provided Option 3 is also On) will reset an alarm condition without having to enter a

user code.

Option 6 <A> button can Arm Latchkey Mode - This option enables single button Arming of

the alarm in Latchkey report mode using the <A> button. For single button Arm




Option 7 <A> button can Disarm During Exit Delay - This option allows single button Disarming using the <A> button provided the Armed Mode exit delay is active. If the

exit delay has expired the <A> button cannot be used to disarm the alarm. For single

button disarm operation to work options 2 & 3 must be off at location P45E

Option 8 <A> button can Disarm Stay Mode During Exit Delay - This option allows single button Disarming of Stay Mode using the <A> button provided the Stay Mode exit

delay is active. If the Stay Mode exit delay has expired the <A> button cannot be



Keypad Button Area AssignmentKeypad Button Area AssignmentKeypad Button Area AssignmentKeypad Button Area Assignment

Keypad B Key Areas

KEYPAD BUTTON AREA ASSIGNMENT - P80E 1-8E (APPLIES TO CROW LCD

KEYPAD ONLY)



Option 1 Area “A” - This option assigns the keypad button to Area A. If a keypad button is assigned to only Area A it can only Arm or Disarm that area.

Option 1 Area “B” - This option assigns the keypad button to Area B. If a keypad button is assigned to only Area B it can only Arm or Disarm that area.

Keypad Button Area OptionsKeypad Button Area OptionsKeypad Button Area OptionsKeypad Button Area Options

Keypad B Key Options

KEYPAD BUTTON AREA OPTIONS - P81E 1-8E (APPLIES TO CROW LCD KEYPAD

ONLY)

Option 1 - button can Arm

Option 2 - button can Arm STAY Mode

Option 3 - button can Disarm at All Times

Option 4 - button can Disarm Stay Mode at All Times

Option 5 - button can Reset Alarms

Option 6 - button can Arm Latchkey Mode

Option 7 - button can Disarm During Exit Delay

Option 8 - button can Disarm Stay Mode During Exit Delay

Option 1 button can Arm - This option enables single button Arming using the button. For single button operation to work options 2 & 3 must be off at location

P45E.

92

Option 2 button can Arm Stay Mode - This option enables single button Arming of Stay Mode using the button. For single button operation to work options 2 & 3 must

be off at location P45E.

(NOTE: Following arming of Stay Mode, if the <ENTER> button is pressed, all

entry & exit delays will be reset to zero for that armed period).

Option 3 button can Disarm at All Times - This option enables single button Disarming using the button. For single button disarm operation to work options 2 & 3 must

be off at location P45E

Option 4 button can Disarm Stay Mode at All Times - This option enables single button Disarming of Stay Mode using the button. For single button disarm


Option 5 button can Reset Alarms - If this option is On, Pressing the button (provided Option 3 is also On) will reset an alarm condition without having to enter a

user code.

Option 6 button can Arm Latchkey Mode - This option enables single button Arming of the alarm in Latchkey report mode using the button. For single button Arm




Option 7 button can Disarm During Exit Delay - This option allows single button Disarming using the button provided the Armed Mode exit delay is active. If the

exit delay has expired the button cannot be used to disarm the alarm. For single

button disarm operation to work options 2 & 3 must be off at location P45E

Option 8 button can Disarm Stay Mode During Exit Delay - This option allows single

button Disarming of Stay Mode using the button provided the Stay Mode exit

delay is active. If the Stay Mode exit delay has expired the button cannot be



Keypad to Output Mask Keypad to Output Mask Keypad to Output Mask Keypad to Output Mask KEYPAD to OUTPUT MASK - P82E 1-8E





A Keypad can be assigned to an Output or multiple Outputs. If a Keypad is not assigned to

an Output a User cannot turn that Output On or Off from the Keypad. This feature is useful

when using the access control features of the panel, eg a User may be allowed to operate

more than one Output with their code but they will be limited to just the Output assigned to

the Keypad they are using.

<Control> Button to Output Mask <Control> Button to Output Mask <Control> Button to Output Mask <Control> Button to Output Mask <CONTROL> BUTTON to OUTPUT MASK - P83E 1-8E





The <CONTROL> button at a Keypad can be assigned to an Output or multiple Outputs. If

the <CONTROL> button is not assigned to an Output a User cannot access Local Control

Mode (by pressing the <CONTROL> button) and turn that Output On or Off from the

Keypad. This feature is useful if Outputs are being used to control devices such as lights, etc

and you wish to be able to turn them On or Off from a keypad. By limiting the access to

93

Outputs via the <CONTROL> button you can avoid conflict with alarm outputs (eg the User

can be denied access to outputs that are being used for alarm functions).

94

Keyboard Panic, Fire and Medical Alarms to Keyboard Panic, Fire and Medical Alarms to Keyboard Panic, Fire and Medical Alarms to Keyboard Panic, Fire and Medical Alarms to

Outputs and KP BuzzerOutputs and KP BuzzerOutputs and KP BuzzerOutputs and KP Buzzer

Keypad Panic Alarm to Output Keypad Panic Alarm to Output Keypad Panic Alarm to Output Keypad Panic Alarm to Output

KEYPAD PANIC ALARM to OUTPUT - P84E 1-8E (includes <PANIC>, <1> & <3> or <CONTROL> & <CHIME>)





A Keypad generated Panic Alarm (either pressing the <PANIC> button, <1> & <3> or

<CONTROL> & <CHIME> together) can be assigned to an Output or multiple Outputs. This

can be used to operate an audible or visual alarm connected to the Output.

Keypad Fire Alarm to Output Keypad Fire Alarm to Output Keypad Fire Alarm to Output Keypad Fire Alarm to Output

KEYPAD FIRE ALARM to OUTPUT - P85E 1-8E (includes <A> & or <4> & <6>)





A Keypad generated Fire Alarm (either pressing the <A> & or <4> & <6> together)

can be assigned to an Output or multiple Outputs. This can be used to operate an audible or

visual alarm connected to the Output.

Keypad Medical Alarm to Output Keypad Medical Alarm to Output Keypad Medical Alarm to Output Keypad Medical Alarm to Output

KEYPAD MEDICAL ALARM to OUTPUT - P86E 1-8E (includes & <CHIME> or <7> & <9>)





A Keypad generated Medical Alarm (either pressing the & <CHIME> or <7> & <9>

together) can be assigned to an Output or multiple Outputs. This can be used to operate an

audible or visual alarm connected to the Output.

Keypad Duress Alarm to Output Keypad Duress Alarm to Output Keypad Duress Alarm to Output Keypad Duress Alarm to Output

KEYPAD DURESS ALARM to OUTPUT - P87E 1-8E





A Keypad generated Duress Alarm (see P25E2E) can be assigned to an Output or multiple

Outputs. This can be used to operate an audible or visual alarm connected to the Output. A

Duress alarm is created when the alarm is Disarmed with the Duress digit preceding a valid User

Code.


95

Keypad Tamper Switch Alarm to Output Keypad Tamper Switch Alarm to Output Keypad Tamper Switch Alarm to Output Keypad Tamper Switch Alarm to Output

KEYPAD TAMPER SWITCH ALARM to OUTPUT - P88E 1-8E





If the keypad has a Tamper Switch fitted and this switch is activated, the Tamper Alarm can

be assigned to an Output or multiple Outputs. This can be used to operate an audible or

visual alarm connected to the Output.

Keypad Wrong Code Alarm to Output Keypad Wrong Code Alarm to Output Keypad Wrong Code Alarm to Output Keypad Wrong Code Alarm to Output

KEYPAD WRONG CODE ALARM to OUTPUT - P89E 1-8E





If someone is attempting disarm the alarm by trying various code combinations and they

enter in 4 wrong codes the panel will go into a “Wrong Code” tamper alarm. The Alarm can

be assigned to an Output or multiple Outputs. This can be used to operate an audible or

visual alarm connected to the Output. A correct code entry will reset the tamper alarm.

Manual Panic Alarm Beeps to Keypad Manual Panic Alarm Beeps to Keypad Manual Panic Alarm Beeps to Keypad Manual Panic Alarm Beeps to Keypad

MANUAL PANIC ALARM BEEPS TO KEYPAD - P90E 1-8E





When a keypad generated Panic Alarm is generated, the alarm can be silent or it can operate

the buzzer in the keypad.

Manual Fire Alarm Beeps to Keypad Manual Fire Alarm Beeps to Keypad Manual Fire Alarm Beeps to Keypad Manual Fire Alarm Beeps to Keypad

MANUAL FIRE ALARM BEEPS TO KEYPAD - P91E 1-8E





When a keypad generated Fire Alarm is generated, the alarm can be silent or it can operate

the buzzer in the keypad.

Manual Medical Alarm Beeps to Keypad Manual Medical Alarm Beeps to Keypad Manual Medical Alarm Beeps to Keypad Manual Medical Alarm Beeps to Keypad

MANUAL MEDICAL ALARM BEEPS TO KEYPAD - P92E 1-8E






96

When a keypad generated Medical Alarm is generated, the alarm can be silent or it can

operate the buzzer in the keypad.

Wrong Code orWrong Code orWrong Code orWrong Code or Keypad Tamper Beeps To Keypad Keypad Tamper Beeps To Keypad Keypad Tamper Beeps To Keypad Keypad Tamper Beeps To Keypad

WRONG CODE or KEYPAD TAMPER SWITCH ALARM BEEPS TO KEYPAD - P93E 1-8E





If someone enters in an incorrect code more than 4 times or a Keypad Tamper Switch Alarm

is generated, the alarm can be silent or it can operate the buzzer in the keypad. The selected

keypad, e.g. P93E1E for keypad number 1 is the one at which the alarm has occurred and

the options 1-8 are the keypads that will beep in alarm.

Keypad Chime Timer Keypad Chime Timer Keypad Chime Timer Keypad Chime Timer CHIME ALARM KEYPAD BEEP TIME - P94E 1-8E (Value = 0-255 1/10th Second)

When a Chime Zone is activated it can operate an Output and/or beep the keypad buzzer.

There is a separate Chime timer for each of the 8 keypads. If the value is made “0” for a

keypad the Chime Zone will not beep the keypad buzzer. The Keypad Chime Timer can be

set to a value from 1-255. The units are in 1/10th second increments. This means that a

value of 10 will beep the keypad buzzer for 1 second.

Proximity Reader OptionsProximity Reader OptionsProximity Reader OptionsProximity Reader Options

Proximity Reader Led To Output Mapping Proximity Reader Led To Output Mapping Proximity Reader Led To Output Mapping Proximity Reader Led To Output Mapping

PROXIMITY READER LED to OUTPUT MAPPING - P98E 1-8E









If a proximity reader is connected to the control panel it may be desirable to have the LED

provide some form of indication such as Arm/Disarm state, etc. By using this location it is

possible to link the LED at a reader number to follow the programming of an output. The LED

can be used to indicate Arm/Disarm state, Stay Mode Arm/disarm, output On/Off, etc. If

chirps have been assigned to access tags/cards (P46E4E) and the output the reader LED is

set to follow has the chirps assigned (P50E-P53E), then the output must have a minimum

pulse time (P39E) of 10 for it to work correctly.

The proximity reader keypad address number is set at P99E as detailed below.

Learn ProxLearn ProxLearn ProxLearn Proximity Reader Keypad Address Number imity Reader Keypad Address Number imity Reader Keypad Address Number imity Reader Keypad Address Number

LEARN PROXIMITY READER KEYPAD ADDRESS NUMBER - P99E 1-8E (Value = Keypad Address 1-8)

When a Proximity reader is connected to the panel it must have a unique keypad address

number assigned so that any program options can be assigned to that specific reader. To


97

program the keypad address you must first connect the reader to the panel via the keypad

buss. Then from installer program mode, enter in P99E followed by the keypad address you

wish to assign to the reader (eg P99E4E will assign keypad address 4). To assign this keypad

address to a selected reader you have to present a tag or card 5 times within 10 seconds to

learn the keypad address number. The tag or card does not have to be enrolled at the panel

to set the keypad address. When the address has been learnt by the reader it sends an

acknowledgement back to the panel which will stop the learn mode. To assign a different

address to another reader you must go through the same process again only this time

entering in a different keypad address number (eg P99E5E for keypad address 5). Repeat

the process until all readers have been assigned a unique keypad address. Now any keypad

specific options can be assigned to the readers (eg assign areas/outputs or users to the

reader).

If you do not assign a unique address to every keypad and reader connected to the keypad buss, a conflict will exist that will cause erratic operation. Each reader or keypad MUST have a different address.

NOTENOTENOTENOTE

The proximity and arming readers flash out the assigned keypad address number on their LED whenever the panel is in “Installer Program” Mode. This allows quick identification of the

assigned address for each reader..


98

KeyKeyKeyKey----switchesswitchesswitchesswitches

The two Key-Switch inputs are available on the panel tamper. Normally the panel tamper is

a short-cut, however if the tamper input is wired as per the type 14 option shown on page

12, the 4k7 resistor becomes Key-switch number 1 and the 8k2 resistor becomes Key-switch

number 2 (the 2k2 still acts as the tamper resistor). If the tamper input is shorted out or cut

the panel will still go into system tamper alarm but provided the 2k2 resistor is maintained

then shorting or opening the 4k7 or 8k2 resistors will operate the key-switch functions.

KeyKeyKeyKey----Switch Area AssignmentSwitch Area AssignmentSwitch Area AssignmentSwitch Area Assignment KEY-SWITCH AREA ASSIGNMENT - P111E 1-2E

(1 = Key-switch # 1, 2 = Key-switch # 2)



Option 1 Area “A” - This option assigns the key-switch to Area A. If a key-switch is assigned to only Area A it can only Arm or Disarm that area.

Option 2 Area “B” - This option assigns the key-switch to Area B. If a key-switch is assigned to only Area B it can only Arm or Disarm that area.

KeyKeyKeyKey----Switch Arm/Disarm OptionsSwitch Arm/Disarm OptionsSwitch Arm/Disarm OptionsSwitch Arm/Disarm Options

KEY-SWITCH ACCESS & OPERATIONAL OPTIONS - P112E 1-2E

(1 = Key-switch # 1, 2 = Key-switch # 2)

Option 1 - Key-Switch can Arm

Option 2 - Key-Switch can Arm Stay Mode

Option 3 - Key-Switch can Disarm

Option 4 - Key-Switch can Disarm Stay Mode

Option 5 - Key-Switch has Security Guard Options

Option 6 - Key-Switch will Arm Latchkey Mode

Option 7 - Key-Switch is NO (Normally Open)

Option 8 - Key-Switch is Momentary

Option 1 Key-Switch can Arm - This option enables Arming of the assigned Area via the Key-switch.

Option 2 Key-Switch can Arm Stay Mode - This option enables Stay Mode Arming of the assigned Area via the Key-switch.

Option 3 Key-Switch can Disarm - This option enables Disarming of the assigned Area via the Key-switch.

Option 4 Key-Switch can Disarm Stay Mode - This option enables Stay Mode Disarming of the assigned Area via the Key-switch.

Option 5 Key-Switch has Security Guard Options - If the key-switch has option 5 on, they can Arm all Areas assigned, but they may only Disarm if the panel is currently Armed

and in the alarm state.

Option 6 Key-Switch will Arm Latchkey Mode - If the panel is armed by a key-switch with this option on, then the panel will be armed in Latchkey mode. This means that when

the alarm is disarmed by a key-switch with this option off, or a code with option 6 at

P4E off, then a disarm report will be sent. The option is designed to alert the alarm

owner when children have returned home and disarmed the alarm.


99

Option 7 Key-Switch is NO (Normally Open) - The key-switch can be a NO (Normally Open) or a NC (Normally Closed) key-switch. The normal, or rest state, of the key-switch

can be programmed at this location. If the key-switch contacts usually rest in the

open state and close when the key-switch is operated you should turn on option 7.

Option 8 Key-Switch is Momentary - The operation of the key-switch can be momentary or latching. If option 8 is on, the key-switch operation is assumed to be momentary.

This means that each time the key-switch is operated then released the area will

toggle its current state (I.e. if armed it will become disarmed or vice versa). If this

option is turned off it is assumed that the key-switch is a latching type. This means

that when the key-switch is operated and the key removed the contacts remain in the

same state. When a latching key-switch is used, turning on the switch will arm the

area and turning it off will disarm the area.

100

ZonesZonesZonesZones

Zone Area AssignmentZone Area AssignmentZone Area AssignmentZone Area Assignment ZONE AREA ASSIGNMENT - P121E 1-16E



Option 1 Area “A” - This option assigns the Zone to Area A. If a Zone is assigned only to Area A it will activate if Area A is armed. If the zone is in both area A & B then it will

activate only when both areas are armed.

Option 2 Area “B” - This option assigns the Zone to Area B. If a Zone is assigned only to Area B it will activate if Area B is armed. If the zone is in both area A & B then it will

activate only when both areas are armed.

The output day mode timer is how long an output will turn on following a day zone

unsealing. The Day Mode Timer is in 1/10th Sec intervals eg 20=2 Seconds.

Zone Alarm Type OptionsZone Alarm Type OptionsZone Alarm Type OptionsZone Alarm Type Options

Zone Options AZone Options AZone Options AZone Options A

ZONE OPTIONS A - P122E 1-16E

Option 1 - Zone is Active

Option 2 - Zone is N/O

Option 3 – Not an Exit Delay Zone (Available from panel Ver:9.06+)

Option 4 - Keypad Zone

Option 5 - Zone is a Radio Zone

Option 6 - Zone is a Stay Mode Zone

Option 7 - Zone can be Manually Bypassed

Option 8 - Zone can be Auto-Bypassed

Option 1 Zone is Active - If this option is on the zone is turned on. If it is turned off the zone will not be monitored by the panel. The panel can provide up to 16 zones but is

configured by default as an 8 zone panel with this option turned off for zones 9-16.

Option 2 Zone is N/O - This option only applies if the zone input is set to type 14 (zone doubling) at location P125E. When configured as type 14 there are three resistors

wired in series on the input, a 2k2 tamper resistor, a 4k7 low zone resistor and an

8k2 high zone resistor. At this point, the zone can be set as having a N/C (Normally

closed) alarm contact where the EOL resistor is shorted out in the sealed state or it

can be set as a N/O (Normally open) alarm contact where the EOL resistor is in circuit

in the sealed state. If this option is turned on it assumes that the alarm contact is

N/O.

Option 3 Not an Exit Delay Zone - If this option is turned on, the zone will not have any exit

delay and will cause an instant alarm if triggered during the exit delay time. Also you

MUST ensure that if this option is turned on for a zone, that same zone should not

have any entry delay (P144E) programmed. If the zone does have an entry delay the

zone can activate during the exit time thereby starting an entry delay on the same

zone which means the user might not be aware of the pending alarm and leave the

101

premises. If the zone has no entry delay and the zone is triggered during the exit

time the alarm will then be instant, alerting the user that they deviated off the exit

route.

Option 4 Keypad Zone - If this option is on, the Zone will follow the Input at the corresponding Proximity Reader. If the Proximity Reader is set to Keypad # 1 the

input will be either zone 1 or zone 9, eg if P122E1E (zone #1) had option 4 on then

the input at reader one will operate zone 1. If P122E9E (zone #9) had option 4 on

then the input at reader one will operate zone 9. Proximity reader 1 can operate

zones 1 or 9 through to proximity reader 8 can operate zones 8 or 16. To Seal the

Zone at the Proximity Reader, you MUST Configure and Fit the Appropriate EOL Resistor At The Panel, otherwise the Zone will Remain Open. Also, Option-2 above

(Zone is Normally Open) MUST be OFF at P122E to be able to seal the Keypad Zone.

Option 5 Zone is a Radio Zone - If this option is on the panel does not scan the hardwired zone input terminal but instead is looking for a radio zone signal. The correct radio

type should be set at location P127E to ensure that the radio zone works correctly.

Option 6 Zone is a Stay Mode Zone - If this option is on the zone will be active when Stay

Mode is armed. This feature is normally used for arming just part of the alarm at

night time.

Option 7 Zone can be Manually Bypassed - If this option is on the zone can be Manually Bypassed at the keypad using the <BYPASS> button. A zone must be Bypassed while

in the disarmed state. Once the area with the bypassed zone has been armed then

disarmed, the manual bypass is removed and the zone must be manually bypassed

again before arming if required. If a zone is configured as a 24 Hour zone (P123E

Options 3,4 & 5), they can also Manually Bypassed but in this case the Bypass must

be manually removed to re-instate the zone.

Option 8 Zone can be Auto-Bypassed - If this option is on the zone will be Auto-Bypassed if unsealed at the expiry of the exit delay. If a zone is unsealed at the time of arming

and remains unsealed when the exit delay expires and this option is on for that zone

it will be automatically bypassed by the panel. If the zone seals after that time it will

be re-instated automatically and can then cause an alarm. On disarming of the alarm

any auto-Bypasses are removed.

Zone Options BZone Options BZone Options BZone Options B

ZONE OPTIONS B - P123E 1-16E

Option 1 - Zone is a Handover Zone

Option 2 - Zone is a Two Trigger Zone

Option 3 - Zone is a 24 Hour Zone

Option 4 - Zone is a 24 Hour Auto-reset Zone

Option 5 - Zone is a 24 Hour Fire Zone

Option 6 – Available from Ver:9.00-9.02 (Zone is a One Shot Zone=Siren Lockout), then Spare

Option 7 - Zone is a Chime Zone

Option 8 - Zone is a Permanent Chime Zone

Option 1 Zone is a Handover Zone - A Handover Zone is one that its entry delay will apply

provided a Non-Handover entry zone is triggered first. If no other entry delay zones

are triggered before the handover zone the entry delay on that zone does not apply

and the alarm will become instant (no entry delay).

Option 2 Zone is a Two Trigger Zone - If this option is on the zone will have to trigger twice

within the two trigger time (P25E5E) before it will cause an alarm. If the zone does

not trigger a second time before the two trigger time expires, the count is reset and it

will take another two triggers to cause an alarm on this zone. If more than one zone

is set-up as a two trigger zone, then a single trigger from two separate zones within

the two trigger time can also cause an alarm. If the zone becomes faulty and stays in


102

alarm once triggered it will also cause an alarm provided it remains in alarm for

longer than the two trigger time.

Option 3 Zone is a 24 Hour Zone - If this option is on the zone will be constantly monitored

regardless of the arm/disarm state of the panel. If the 24 Hour zone also has an

entry delay programmed (P144E), this delay will apply. If the 24 Hour zone activates

but then resets before the entry delay expires no alarm will be generated. This

feature can be useful for monitoring plant type alarms such as freezer alarms. Once

the alarm has been generated it must be cleared by entry of a valid User code.

Option 4 Zone is a 24 Hour Auto-reset Zone - If this option is on the zone will be constantly

monitored regardless of the arm/disarm state of the panel. If the 24 Hour zone also

has an entry delay programmed (P144E), this delay will apply. If the 24 Hour zone

activates but then resets before the entry delay expires no alarm will be generated.

Once an alarm has been generated with a 24 Hour Auto-reset zone, the alarm will be

removed automatically once the input reseals.

Option 5 Zone is a 24 Hour Fire Zone - If this option is on the zone will be constantly

monitored regardless of the arm/disarm state of the panel. If the 24 Hour Fire zone

also has an entry delay programmed (P144E), this delay will apply. If the 24 Hour

Fire zone activates but then resets before the entry delay expires no alarm will be

generated. Once the alarm has been generated it must be cleared by entry of a valid

User code. The 24 Hour Fire Zone will also cause an alarm output to pulse the alarm

to differentiate a fire alarm from a burglar alarm (ie a fire alarm will switch the output

on and off at the pulse timer rate whereas a burglar alarm on the same output will

sound continuously).

Option 7 Zone is a Chime Zone - If this option is on, the zone will operate Chime mode when

disarmed. When the alarm is armed the Chime Mode is disabled for this zone. A

Chime zone can sound the keypad buzzer or operate an output to indicate that the

zone is unsealed. It is normally used to monitor areas during the daytime.

Option 8 Zone is a Permanent Chime Zone - If this option is on, the zone will operate Chime

mode when armed or disarmed. When the alarm is armed the zone will continue to

only be a Chime Mode Zone and will not cause a burglar alarm. A Chime zone can

sound the keypad buzzer or operate an output to indicate that the zone is unsealed.

Zone Options CZone Options CZone Options CZone Options C

ZONE OPTIONS C - P124E 1-16E

Option 1 - Can Arm if Zone is not Ready

Option 2 - Will Send Multiple Reports to Dialler

Option 3 - Zone is Monitored for Inactivity

Option 4 - Zone is on Soak Test

Option 5 - Zone will report to Area B Account Number

Option 6 - Zone will Not Report 24 hour Alarms via Dialler

Option 7 - Pulse Output on Kiss-off Following a Zone Alarm (Available from panel Ver:9.06+)

Option 8 - Exit Terminator Zone (Available from panel Ver:9.06+)

Option 1 Can Arm if Zone is not Ready - If this option is turned on, plus Options 7 or 8 are on at P45E (cannot Arm if zones not sealed/Ready), this zone can be unsealed and

the panel can still be armed. This option allows the panel to still be armed if a low

security zone is unsealed yet still stopping arming if a high security zone is unsealed.

Option 2 Will Send Multiple Reports to Dialler - If this option is turned on, a zone will send

an alarm report to the monitoring station every time it is activated. If the option is

turned off, the zone can only send one alarm report per armed cycle.

Option 3 Zone is Monitored for Inactivity - If this option is on the zone will be checked to see that it operates during the disarmed state. If it is not operated within the time set

at P163E a “Sensor-watch” alarm will be generated. This feature is designed to detect

a faulty zone that is not operating normally or one that has had it’s detection area

blocked. If a detector has this option turned on and it doesn’t operate when

disarmed, the timer at location P163E will start to count down. The timer is stopped

when the area assigned to the zone is armed and resumes with the saved value when

disarmed again. The timer is reset back to the original value every time the zone

operates while disarmed.


103

Option 4 Zone is a Soak Test Zone - If a zone is suspected of being faulty and is causing false alarms, you can turn it into a Soak Test Zone and it will still be monitored for

alarms when armed but it will not cause the sirens to sound or report to the dialler.

The Soak Test zone will still be logged in the event memory however so it is possible

to check the activity of the zone, via the memory, and after a suitable period of no

alarms it can be re-instated as part of the alarm by removing the Soak Test option.

Option 5 Zone will report to Area B Account Code - If a zone is in Areas A & B and it goes into alarm, it will default to reporting on the Area A Account Code (see P62E). By

turning this option on when a zone is in both areas it will report to Area B account

Code.

Option 6 Zone will Not Report 24 Hour Alarms via Dialler - If this option is turned on and the zone is set as a 24 Hour type, when an alarm is generated, the alarm will not be

transmitted to the monitoring station via the dialler.

Option 7 Pulse Output on Kiss-off Following a Zone Alarm - If this option is turned on, when an alarm is reported to monitoring and is kissed off, any Output with Option 4

ON at P36E will pulse for 2 seconds.

Option 8 Exit Terminator Zone - If this option is on, when the zone unseals during the exit delay time and then seals again the panel will cancel any remaining exit delay time

and arm in 3 seconds from the time the zone was sealed. The zone can also be left

unsealed at the time of arming and will terminate the exit delay 3 seconds after it is

sealed. Once armed, the exit terminator zone will cause an alarm if unsealed again

(the alarm will be delayed if an entry delay is programmed (P144E), otherwise it will

be instant).

Zone EOL (EndZone EOL (EndZone EOL (EndZone EOL (End----OfOfOfOf----Line) Options and Line) Options and Line) Options and Line) Options and

Vibration SettingsVibration SettingsVibration SettingsVibration Settings On the Runner-16 there are 8 hardwired zone inputs and on the Runner-8 there are 4

hardwired zone inputs. Each of these inputs can have different EOL (End-of-Line)

configurations if desired. The Zone inputs can be;

- A short circuit wire loop (Type 0) – Refer to pages 11~13 for wiring examples.

- One of 11 different (Types 1-11) single resistor values that MUST be wired in Series (In-

Line) with the Zone Detection Device (Types 1-11) – Refer to pages 11~13 for examples.

- Runner-16 can provide 8 zones with tamper while Runner-8 can provide 4 zones with

tamper (Types 12, 13) – Refer to pages 11~13 for wiring examples.

- When Zone Doubling, the Runner-16 can provide 16 zones with Tamper (Type 14) or 16

zones without Tamper (Type 15) – Refer to pages 11~13 for wiring examples.

- When Zone Doubling, the Runner-8 can provide 8 zones with tamper (Type 14) or 8 zones

without Tamper (Type 15) – Refer to pages 11~13 for wiring examples.

See Zone Inputs on page 10 for the resistor combinations and colour codes.

Zone EOL (EndZone EOL (EndZone EOL (EndZone EOL (End----OfOfOfOf----Line) Options Line) Options Line) Options Line) Options ---- P125 P125 P125 P125EEEE 1 1 1 1----8888EEEE

Option 0 - Short Circuit Loop Option 8 - 6k8

Option 1 - 1k Option 9 - 10k

Option 2 - 1k5 Option 10 - 12k

Option 3 - 2k2 Option 11 - 22k

Option 4 - 3k3 Option 12 - 2k2 // 4k7


Option 6 - 4k7 Option 14 - 2k2 // 4k7 // 8k2


Zone RespZone RespZone RespZone Response Timeonse Timeonse Timeonse Time

There are 8 hardwired zone inputs on the panel. The response time (how quickly the input

responds to an input trigger) can be varied for each zone. The first 8 settings are very fast

EOL Resistors in Options 1~11 and the 2k2 & 3k3 in Options 12~14 MUST be connected in Series with the Zn Circuit. The 4k7, 6k8 & 8k2 EOL’s in Options 12~15 MUST be connected in Parallel Across the Alarm (Relay) Contacts of the Detection Device.


104

response times normally used when vibration sensors are connected to a zone input.

Response Settings 1-8 (vibration) can only be applied to zones 1-8 and the zone EOL setting

(P125E) must be set to type 3 (2k2). Zone doubling is not available when vibration settings

are used.

The response settings 9-26 start at about 200 ms for setting 9 through to 1.05 sec for

setting 26. If zone doubling is turned on, both zones on an input will have the same

response time (zones 1 & 9 would have the same time).

ZONE RESPONSE TIME - P126E 1-8E

Response Setting 1 - Highest Vibration setting

Response Setting 2 - Middle Vibration setting






Response Setting 8 - Lowest Vibration setting

Response Setting 9 - 200 ms



















105

Radio Zone Detector TypeRadio Zone Detector TypeRadio Zone Detector TypeRadio Zone Detector Type Any of the 16 zones can be made radio zones. There are multiple types of radio detectors

that can be used on the panel. It is important to set the correct radio type for the detector

being used so that all of the special functions such as battery low signals, tamper alarms,

reed switch open/close signals and supervision signals can all be monitored correctly.

RADIO ZONE DETECTOR TYPE - P127E 1-16E

Radio Type 0 - Generic

Radio Type 1 - Crow Merlin PIR (supervised signal ignored)

Radio Type 2 - Crow Merlin PIR (supervised signal active)

Radio Type 3 - CROW Freewave with checksum (supervised signal active)

Radio Type 4 - CROW Freewave with checksum (Non-supervised)

Radio Type 5 - Crow AE series battery Low

Radio Type 6 - Crow AE series Radio Reed Switch

Radio Type 11 - Ness Radio devices Battery Low

Radio Type 12 - Ness Radio Reed Switch

Radio Type 21 - Electronics Line Cougar Radio PIR

Radio Type 31 - Visonic K900 Radio PIR

Radio Type 32 - Visonic Powercode (supervised signal ignored)

Radio Type 33 - Visonic Powercode (supervised signal active)

Radio Type 34 - Siemens (supervised signal ignored)

Radio Type 35 - Siemens (supervised signal active)

Type 0 Generic - If you wish to use a detector that is not on the above list, then set the type to a “0” and the panel will still respond to the radio device every time the learnt

code is received. However, NO Low Bat, Tamper or Supervision will be monitoring.

Type 1 Crow Merlin PIR (unsupervised) - If a Crow Merlin radio PIR is used on the panel select Type 1 so the panel correctly recognizes the alarm, tamper & battery low signal

from the device. The automatic supervised signal sent every 40 minutes by the PIR is

ignored in this mode.

Type 2 Crow Merlin PIR (supervised) - If a Crow Merlin radio PIR is used selecting Type 2 will allow the panel to correctly recognize the alarm, tamper & battery low signal

from the device. Selecting this option also starts the supervise timer (P25E4E). The

supervise timer is constantly being reset while valid supervisory signals are being

received from the detector. If no supervise signals are received from the PIR within

the supervise timer value a supervised alarm is generated.

Type 3 CROW Freewave® with checksum (supervised signal active) - If a Crow radio

PIR is used selecting Type 3 will allow the panel to correctly recognize the alarm,

tamper & battery low signal from the device. Selecting this option also starts the

supervise timer (P25E4E). The supervise timer is constantly being reset while valid

supervisory signals are being received from the detector. If no supervise signals are

received from the PIR within the supervise timer value a supervised alarm is

generated.

Type 4 CROW Freewave® with checksum (non-supervised) - If a Crow radio PIR is

used, selecting Type 4 will allow the panel to correctly recognize the alarm, tamper &

battery low signal from the device. The automatic supervisory signal sent by the PIR

is ignored in this mode.

Type 5 Crow AE Series Battery Low - If a Crow (AE) radio pendant or PIR is used on the panel selecting Type 5 allows the panel to correctly recognize the battery low and

tamper signals from Crow (AE) devices.

Type 6 Crow AE Series Radio Reed Switch - If a Crow (AE) radio reed switch is used on the panel selecting Type 6 allows the panel to correctly recognize the open and closed

signals from the reed switch so the zone LED can follow the correct state of the reed

switch (ie open or closed). It also recognizes the battery low signal from the Crow

(AE) device.


106

Type 11 Ness Battery Low - If a Ness radio pendant or PIR is used on the panel selecting Type 11 allows the panel to correctly recognize the battery low and tamper signals

from Ness devices.

Type 12 Ness Radio Reed Switch - If a Ness radio reed switch is used on the panel selecting Type 12 allows the panel to correctly recognize the battery low and tamper signals

from the Ness device. It also recognizes the open and closed signals from the reed

switch so the zone LED can follow the correct state of the reed switch (ie open or

closed)

Option 21 Electronics Line Radio PIR - If an Electronics Line radio PIR (Cougar) is used on the panel selecting Type 21 allows the panel to correctly recognize the alarm, tamper

& battery low signal from this device.

Option 31 Visonic Radio PIR - If a Visonic K900 radio PIR is used on the panel selecting Type 31 allows the panel to correctly recognize the alarm, tamper & battery low signal

from this device.

Option 32 Visonic Powercode (unsupervised) - If a Visonic Powercode radio device is used on the panel selecting Type 32 allows the panel to correctly recognize the alarm,

tamper and battery low signal from the device. The supervisory signal sent by the

device is ignored in this mode.

Option 33 Visonic Powercode (supervised) - If the Visonic Powercode range of radio PIR or

reed switch are used on the panel selecting Type 33 allows the panel to correctly

recognize the alarm, tamper & battery low signals from the devices as well as the

open/close signal from the reed switch. Selecting this option also starts the supervise

timer (P25E4E). The supervise timer is constantly being reset while valid supervisory

signals are being received from the detector. If no supervise signals are received

from the PIR within the supervise timer value a supervised alarm is generated.

Option 34 Reserved for future use.

Option 35 Reserved for future use.

Zone Alarms to Output andZone Alarms to Output andZone Alarms to Output andZone Alarms to Output and Key Key Key Keypad pad pad pad Buzzer Buzzer Buzzer Buzzer

MappingMappingMappingMapping

Armed Zone Alarms to OutputArmed Zone Alarms to OutputArmed Zone Alarms to OutputArmed Zone Alarms to Output

ARMED ZONE ALARMS to OUTPUT - P128E 1-16E






107

If an Area is Armed and a zone assigned to that Area activates, the zone can trigger selected

Outputs for local alarm signaling. This location assigns Zones to Outputs for alarms that

occur when in the Full Armed State.

Stay Mode Zones Alarms to Output Stay Mode Zones Alarms to Output Stay Mode Zones Alarms to Output Stay Mode Zones Alarms to Output

STAY MODE ZONE ALARMS to OUTPUT - P129E 1-16E





If an Area has Stay Mode Armed and a zone assigned to that Area activates, the zone can

trigger selected Outputs for local alarm signalling. This location assigns Zones to Outputs for

alarms that occur when Stay Mode is Armed.

24 Hour Zone Alarms to Output 24 Hour Zone Alarms to Output 24 Hour Zone Alarms to Output 24 Hour Zone Alarms to Output

24 HOUR ZONE ALARMS to OUTPUT - P130E 1-16E





If a zone is programmed as a 24 Hour type and it activates, the zone can trigger selected

Outputs for local alarm signalling. If the zone is a standard 24 hour type (P123E3E) the

output will turn for the full reset time, if it is an Auto-reset type (P123E4E) the output will

either turn off when the reset time expires or if the input clears and if it is a Fire type

(P123E5E) the output will pulse at a rate equal to the pulse time for that output.

Chime Zone Alarms to Output Chime Zone Alarms to Output Chime Zone Alarms to Output Chime Zone Alarms to Output

CHIME ZONE ALARMS to OUTPUT - P131E 1-16E





If a zone is programmed as a Chime zone (P123E7E) and it activates, the zone can trigger

selected Outputs for local alarm signalling. The output will operate for the Chime to Output

time at location P41E. The zone must clear before the output can be activated again.

Zone Tamper Alarms to Output Zone Tamper Alarms to Output Zone Tamper Alarms to Output Zone Tamper Alarms to Output

ZONE TAMPER ALARMS to OUTPUT - P132E 1-16E





If a hardwired zone is programmed to allow tamper monitoring (P125E types 12,13 & 14), or the

zone is a radio detector with tamper, the zone tamper can trigger selected Outputs for local alarm

signalling.


108

Armed Zone Alarm Beeps to Keypad Armed Zone Alarm Beeps to Keypad Armed Zone Alarm Beeps to Keypad Armed Zone Alarm Beeps to Keypad

ARMED ZONE ALARM BEEPS TO KEYPAD - P134E 1-16E





If an Area is Armed and a zone assigned to that Area activates, the zone can sound the buzzer at

selected keypads for local alarm signalling. This location assigns zone alarm beep to a keypad for

alarms that occur when in the Full Armed State.

Stay Mode Zone Alarm Beeps to Keypad Stay Mode Zone Alarm Beeps to Keypad Stay Mode Zone Alarm Beeps to Keypad Stay Mode Zone Alarm Beeps to Keypad

STAY MODE ZONE ALARM BEEPS TO KEYPAD - P135E 1-16E





If an Area is Stay Mode Armed and a zone assigned to that Area activates, the zone can sound

the buzzer at selected keypads for local alarm signalling. This location assigns zone alarm beep to

a keypad for alarms that occur when in Stay Mode is Armed.

24 Ho24 Ho24 Ho24 Hour Zone Alarm Beeps to Keypad ur Zone Alarm Beeps to Keypad ur Zone Alarm Beeps to Keypad ur Zone Alarm Beeps to Keypad

24 HOUR ZONE ALARM BEEPS TO KEYPAD - P136E 1-16E





If a zone is programmed as a 24 Hour type and it activates, the zone can sound the buzzer at

selected keypads for local alarm signalling. If the zone is a standard 24 hour type (P123E3E) or

Fire type (P1235E) the keypad buzzer will sound until reset by a User but if it is an Auto-reset

type (P123E4E) the keypad buzzer will reset when the input clears.

Chime Zone Alarm Beeps to Keypad Chime Zone Alarm Beeps to Keypad Chime Zone Alarm Beeps to Keypad Chime Zone Alarm Beeps to Keypad

CHIME ZONE ALARM BEEPS TO KEYPAD - P137E 1-16E





If a zone is programmed as a Chime zone and it activates, the zone can sound the buzzer at

selected keypads for local alarm signalling. The duration of the Chime beep is programmed at

location P94E. The Chime function can also be locally disabled at each keypad individually if not

required (see Page 43 and 56 for details).

Zone Tamper Alarm Beeps To Keypad Zone Tamper Alarm Beeps To Keypad Zone Tamper Alarm Beeps To Keypad Zone Tamper Alarm Beeps To Keypad

ZONE TAMPER ALARM BEEPS TO KEYPAD - P139E 1-16E





If a hardwired zone is programmed to allow tamper monitoring (P125E types 12, 13 & 14),

or the zone is a radio detector with tamper, the zone tamper can beep the keypad buzzer at

individual keypads.


109

Radio Supervise Fail Beeps to Keypad Radio Supervise Fail Beeps to Keypad Radio Supervise Fail Beeps to Keypad Radio Supervise Fail Beeps to Keypad

RADIO SUPERVISE FAIL BEEPS TO KEYPAD - P140E 1-16E





If a zone is programmed as a radio zone and that type is actively monitoring the supervision

signal, a supervise signal failure from the detector alarm can sound the buzzer at selected

Keypads for local alarm signalling.

Zone Inactivity Alarm Beeps to Keypad Zone Inactivity Alarm Beeps to Keypad Zone Inactivity Alarm Beeps to Keypad Zone Inactivity Alarm Beeps to Keypad

ZONE INACTIVITY ALARM BEEPS TO KEYPAD - P141E 1-16E





If the zone is programmed for inactivity monitoring (P124E3E) and it is not operated within

the time set at P163E a “Sensor-watch” alarm will be generated. A “Sensor-watch” failure

from the detector can sound the buzzer at selected Keypads for local alarm signalling.

Armed Zone Entry Delay Beeps to Keypad Armed Zone Entry Delay Beeps to Keypad Armed Zone Entry Delay Beeps to Keypad Armed Zone Entry Delay Beeps to Keypad

ARMED ZONE ENTRY DELAY BEEPS TO KEYPAD - P142E 1-16E





If the alarm is Armed and a delay zone triggers the entry delay it can also beep the keypad

buzzer to warn that the entry delay is counting down and the alarm should be turned off.

Stay Mode Entry DelayStay Mode Entry DelayStay Mode Entry DelayStay Mode Entry Delay Beeps to Keypad Beeps to Keypad Beeps to Keypad Beeps to Keypad

STAY MODE ENTRY DELAY BEEPS TO KEYPAD - P143E 1-16E





If Stay Mode is Armed and a Stay Mode delay zone triggers the entry delay it can also beep

the keypad buzzer to warn that the entry delay is counting down and the alarm should be

turned off.

Armed Zone Entry Delay Time Armed Zone Entry Delay Time Armed Zone Entry Delay Time Armed Zone Entry Delay Time

ARMED ZONE ENTRY DELAY TIME - P144E 1-16E (Value 0-9999 Seconds)

Each Zone has it’s own Entry Delay time when in the Full Armed State. The delay can be

programmed from 0-9999 seconds in one second increments. If the entry delay is set to “0”

the zone will be an instant zone.

Stay Mode Zone Entry Delay Time Stay Mode Zone Entry Delay Time Stay Mode Zone Entry Delay Time Stay Mode Zone Entry Delay Time

STAY MODE ZONE ENTRY DELAY TIME - P145E 1-16E (Value 0-9999 Seconds)


110

Each Zone has it’s own Entry Delay time when in Stay Mode. The delay can be programmed

from 0-9999 seconds in one second increments. If the entry delay is set to “0” the zone will

be an instant zone.

Zone ReZone ReZone ReZone Re----Trigger Count ( lockout time Trigger Count ( lockout time Trigger Count ( lockout time Trigger Count ( lockout time )

ZONE RE-TRIGGER COUNT - P146E 1-15E (Value 0-15 Triggers)

Each Zone has it’s own alarm Re-trigger Count. A value of 0 programmed at this location

results in unlimited alarms for that zone during an armed period but a count of 1-15 will

shut down the zone once the programmed count has been reached. Disarming the alarm will

reset this count. Warning: If a value of 1 ~ 15 (i.e.: not a ‘0’) is programmed into

this location, the total number of Alarm Triggers during a single Armed Period will

be limited by that value. Eg: If a Zn has a value of 2 in this location, then when the

System is Armed, that Zn will Not activate anymore than twice for the duration of

that Armed Period.

Zone CID Report CodesZone CID Report CodesZone CID Report CodesZone CID Report Codes

Zone AlarmZone AlarmZone AlarmZone Alarm Contact ID Report Code Contact ID Report Code Contact ID Report Code Contact ID Report Code

ZONE ALARM CONTACT ID REPORT CODE - P157E 1-16E (3 digit event code)

Normally a zone alarm would default to reporting a standard “Burglar Alarm” code of “130”

when the zone activates. If the zone is not being used as a burglar alarm and you need to

identify the correct type of alarm event you can change the event code at this location (eg if

zone 5 was a fire sensor you could program a value of “110” at P157E5E).

Zone Near Alarm Contact ID Report Code Zone Near Alarm Contact ID Report Code Zone Near Alarm Contact ID Report Code Zone Near Alarm Contact ID Report Code

ZONE NEAR ALARM CONTACT ID REPORT CODE - P158E 1-16E (3 digit event code)

If the Near & Confirmed zone alarm reporting option was active the default report code for a

“Near Alarm” is “138” when the zone activates for the first time. There should be no reason

to change this code but if some special application was to be used it can be changed at this

location.

Zone Confirmed Alarm Contact ID Report Code Zone Confirmed Alarm Contact ID Report Code Zone Confirmed Alarm Contact ID Report Code Zone Confirmed Alarm Contact ID Report Code

ZONE CONFIRMED ALARM CONTACT ID REPORT CODE - P159E 1-16E

(3 digit event code)

If the Near & Confirmed zone alarm reporting option was active the default report code for a

“Confirmed Alarm” is “139” when a second zone activates within 60 minutes of the near

alarm. There should be no reason to change this code but if some special application was to

be used it can be changed at this location.


111

Zone Alarm Voice Message Number Zone Alarm Voice Message Number Zone Alarm Voice Message Number Zone Alarm Voice Message Number

ZONE ALARM VOICE MESSAGE NUMBER - P160E 1-16E (Value 0-99)

If the Optional Voice Board is fitted and the alarms are to be reported in Voice Format, each

zone can be assigned a voice message to report the alarm type. If this location is set to “0”

the zone will not report via the dialler. If Option 1 at P46E is turned on (use near and

confirmed alarm reporting) the panel will not send an alarm in this format.

Armed and Stay Mode Entry Delay TimesArmed and Stay Mode Entry Delay TimesArmed and Stay Mode Entry Delay TimesArmed and Stay Mode Entry Delay Times

Armed Entry Delay to OArmed Entry Delay to OArmed Entry Delay to OArmed Entry Delay to Output utput utput utput

Zone Entry OP/Away

ARMED ENTRY DELAY BEEPS to OUTPUT - P161E 1-16E

Option 1 - Output 1

Option 2 - Output 2

Option 3 - Output 3

Option 4 - Output 4

Option 5 - Output 5

Option 6 - Output 6

Option 7 - Output 7

Option 8 - Output 8

If the alarm is Armed and a delay zone triggers the entry delay it can also beep an Output to

warn that the entry delay is counting down and the alarm should be turned off.

Stay Mode Entry Delay to Output Stay Mode Entry Delay to Output Stay Mode Entry Delay to Output Stay Mode Entry Delay to Output

Zone Entry OP/Stay

STAY MODE ENTRY DELAY to OUTPUT - P162E 1-16E





If Stay Mode is Armed and a delay zone triggers the entry delay it can also beep an Output

to warn that the entry delay is counting down and the alarm should be turned off.

Zone Watch Dog TimerZone Watch Dog TimerZone Watch Dog TimerZone Watch Dog Timer

Zone inactivity timer Zone inactivity timer Zone inactivity timer Zone inactivity timer

SENSOR WATCH TIME - P163E 1-16E (Value 0-9999 Minutes)

If the zone is programmed as a “Sensor-Watch” zone (P124E3E) and it is not operated within

the time set at this location a “Sensor-watch” alarm will be generated. If a detector has this

option turned on and it doesn’t operate when disarmed, this timer will start to count down

for the zone/s concerned. The timer is stopped when the area assigned to the zone/s is

armed and resumes with the saved value when disarmed again. The timer is reset back to

the original value every time the zone operates while disarmed.


112

Learn/Find and Delete Radio Zone CodesLearn/Find and Delete Radio Zone CodesLearn/Find and Delete Radio Zone CodesLearn/Find and Delete Radio Zone Codes

Learn Radio Zone CodesLearn Radio Zone CodesLearn Radio Zone CodesLearn Radio Zone Codes

LEARN RADIO ZONE CODES - P164E 1-16E

A RADIO Zone must be enrolled into the panel before it can be used.

To learn a Radio Zone you must first have a compatible receiver connected to the panel

keypad buss. With the receiver connected and the panel in program mode, entering P164E

then the zone number you wish to enroll, eg 5E for zone 5, the keypad will start to beep to

indicate that learn mode has been started and the LED on the receiver will flash. Now

operate the detector you wish to learn into Zone 5 slot. Once the transmitted code has been

received by the panel and saved, the keypad will stop beeping and the LED on the receiver

will stop flashing.

When learning a new radio zone the panel checks all possible locations (including pendants)

before saving the new code to ensure that the code has not already been loaded into

another slot. If the code already exists, the keypad will indicate which slot the code is

already installed at. A number from 1-16 indicates a zone slot and a number from 21-100

indicates a user slot.

DelDelDelDelete a Radio Zone Codeete a Radio Zone Codeete a Radio Zone Codeete a Radio Zone Code

DELETE a RADIO ZONE CODE - P165E 1-16E

If you wish to delete a single Radio Zone, pressing P165E then the Zone number while in

Program Mode will delete the stored code against that Zone, eg P165E 5E will remove the

code stored for Zone 5.

Find a Zone LocationFind a Zone LocationFind a Zone LocationFind a Zone Location

FIND a RADIO ZONE LOCATION - P166E 0E

If you have a Radio detector loaded into the panel but are unsure which location (Zone #),

pressing P166E then 0E while in Program Mode on an LED Keypad will start “Find” Mode.



mode has been started and the LED on the Receiver will flash. Now operate the Radio

Detector you wish to find. If the Radio Detector is in memory the keypad will display the

number (1-16 indicates a zone, and 21-100 indicates a user). The keypad will stop beeping

and the LED on the Receiver will stop flashing.

ZONE NEAR ALARM to OUTPUTZONE NEAR ALARM to OUTPUTZONE NEAR ALARM to OUTPUTZONE NEAR ALARM to OUTPUT

ZONE NEAR ALARM to OUTPUT - P167E 1-16E





If zones are programmed for near and confirmed alarms (P64E option 1 on), it is also

possible to get an indication of a Near Alarm from any of the 8 Outputs using this

program location. A Near Alarm is the first alarm during an armed period.

Note-1: Runner-16 has 4 x On-Board Outputs. Outputs 5~8 will Only available if the

Optional 4xOutput Relay Board is fitted to the Runner-16.

Note-2: Runner-8 has 2 x On-Board Outputs. Outputs 3~8 will Only available if 2 sets of the

Optional 4xOutput Relay Boards are fitted to the Runner-8.


113

ZONE CONFIRMED ALARM to OUTPUTSZONE CONFIRMED ALARM to OUTPUTSZONE CONFIRMED ALARM to OUTPUTSZONE CONFIRMED ALARM to OUTPUTS

ZONE COMFIRMED ALARM to OUTPUT - P168E 1-16E





If zones are programmed for near and confirmed alarms (P64E option 1 on), it is also

possible to get an indication of a Confirmed Alarm from any of the 8 Outputs using this

program location. A Confirmed Alarm is the second alarm from a different zone to the

one that caused the Near Alarm and must happen within 45 minutes of the near alarm.

Note-1: Runner-16 has 4 x On-Board Outputs. Outputs 5~8 will Only available if the

Optional 4xOutput Relay Board is fitted to the Runner-16.

Note-2: Runner-8 has 2 x On-Board Outputs. Outputs 3~8 will Only available if 2 sets of the

Optional 4xOutput Relay Boards are fitted to the Runner-8.


114

Time ZonesTime ZonesTime ZonesTime Zones

Holidays Holidays Holidays Holidays HOLIDAYS - P170E 1-8E (DDMMYY)

It is possible to pre-program up to 8 holidays. Holidays can override the time-zone function

on the programmed day. For example, if an output was automatically controlled by a time-

zone, the pre-programmed holidays can stop the output from turning on or off on a holiday.

A holiday consists of a single day programmed by Date/Month/Year (DDMMYY). The holiday

begins at the start of the day (00:00:00) and finishes immediately before midnight

(23:59:59) on the programmed date. Holidays can be programmed in any order (although

for simplicity it is recommended that they are programmed in chronological order) and the

panel automatically removes them once the day ends. If you wish to manually remove a

programmed holiday you must program in 000000 at the holiday location. If the holiday date

you are attempting to enter is older than the current date the panel will not save the data eg

if the current date was 111204 (11th of December 2004) and you tried to enter in 101204

(10th of December 2004) the panel will not save the programmed holiday as the day has

already elapsed.

Time Zone DaysTime Zone DaysTime Zone DaysTime Zone Days TIMEZONE DAYS - P171E 1-8E

Option 1 - Sunday

Option 2 - Monday

Option 3 - Tuesday

Option 4 - Wednesday

Option 5 - Thursday

Option 6 - Friday

Option 7 - Saturday

Option 8 - Invert

The Time-zone days are the days that the time-zone will be active. You can select any

combination of the days, eg days 2,3,4,5,6 for Monday to Friday or 1&7 for Saturday &

Sunday, etc. The invert function selects all times outside those selected. There are 8 Time-

zones that can be programmed.


115

Time Zone Start and Stop TimesTime Zone Start and Stop TimesTime Zone Start and Stop TimesTime Zone Start and Stop Times

Time Zone Start TimeTime Zone Start TimeTime Zone Start TimeTime Zone Start Time

TIMEZONE START TIME - P172E 1-8E (HHMM)

The Time-zone start time is when the time-zone begins. It would normally be set to the

beginning of the day, E.g. if you were automatically arming and disarming an area with a

time-zone and you wanted it to disarm when the time-zone started you would set the start

time to about 0830. The start time is programmed in 24 hour format (eg 0000-2359).

If you are setting up the time-zone during the active period (eg if the time-zone goes from

0830-1700 and the current time is 1200) you will have to wait until the next minute expires

before the panel will update the time-zone status. You can see if the time-zone is active at

location P200E4E.

Time Zone End TimeTime Zone End TimeTime Zone End TimeTime Zone End Time

TIMEZONE END TIME - P173E 1-8E (HHMM)

The Time-zone end time is when the time-zone finishes. It would normally be set to the end

of the day, eg if you were automatically arming and disarming an area with a time-zone and

you wanted it to arm when the time-zone ended you would set the end time to about 1700.

The Time-zone end is active at the end of the programmed minute eg if the time-zone end

time was set to 1700, the actual time that the time-zone operates will be at 17:01. The end

time is programmed in 24 hour format (eg 0000-2359)

Time Zone OptionsTime Zone OptionsTime Zone OptionsTime Zone Options

TIMEZONE OPTIONS - P174E 1-8E

1 = Ignore Holidays

2-8 = Spare

If option 1 is turned on for a Time-zone, that time-zone will not be disabled when a holiday

occurs. Normally when a holiday occurs all Time-zones will be disabled but if this option is

turned on the Time-zone will not be affected when a holiday is active.

116

Dialler

Dialler OptionsDialler OptionsDialler OptionsDialler Options DIALLER OPTIONS - P175E 1E

Option 1 - Dialler is Enabled

Option 2 - Fax Defeat

Option 3 - Disable Telephone Line Monitoring

Option 4 - Pulse Dialling (NOTE: For DTMF 4 & 5 must be OFF)

Option 5 - Reverse Pulse Dialling (NOTE: For DTMF 4 & 5 must be OFF)

Option 6 - Long DTMF Dialling Digits (Must be ON for Australia)

Option 7 - Auto-detect Modem

Option 8 - Force V21 Mode

Option 1 Dialler is Enabled - If this option is turned off the dialler will be disabled. The option must be on to allow the dialler to make calls.

Option 2 Fax Defeat - The panel can automatically answer an in-coming call in two ways. The first is to set the auto-answer ring count to a convenient number (P175E4E) and let

the phone ring until this number is reached at which time the panel will answer the

call. The second method is to use fax defeat which entails calling the panel and letting

it ring no more than 4 times, hanging up, then ringing back within 45 seconds. The

panel will now answer the call on the first ring. There is also a manual answer

function described on page 54.

Option 3 Disable Telephone line Monitoring - If the panel is connected to a poor telephone

line and the line failure alarm is appearing regularly, by turning this option on the

panel will not do the line test.

Option 4 Pulse Dial - If this option is Off the panel will dial in DTMF format, if On then the panel will dial using Pulse Dialling format

Option 5 Reverse Pulse Dial - If this option is On, and option 4 is On, then the panel will dial

using Reverse Pulse Dialling format (eg the number 9 = 1 pulse). If this option is Off

and Option 4 is On, the panel will dial in normal Pulse format (eg the number 9 = 9

pulses).

Option 6 Long DTMF Dialling Digits - If this option is Off, the panel will dial using normal dialling (75ms on & 75ma off). If it is On, the panel will dial using the long tones

(100ms on & 100ms off) (Must be ON for Australia).

Option 7 Auto-detect Modem - If this option is on, the panel will answer an in-coming call with the V21 acknowledge tone. If the modem does not respond within 5 seconds the

panel will then generate the acknowledge tones for BELL-103 format. It will repeat

this cycle twice and then hang-up if no communication with a modem is established.

Option 8 Force V21 Mode - The dial up panel to PC link can be established using either Bell 103 or V21. If the auto-detect function at option 7 does not result in the best format

for your modem then you can force the panel to only communicate in one format. If

the LED is off the format is BELL103, LED on means V21.


117

DialDialDialDialllller Options er Options er Options er Options BBBB

DIALLER OPTIONS B - P175E 2E

Option 1 - Step to next Number (Must be OFF for Domestic Dialling)

Option 2 - Upload/download uses Call-back Number

Option 3 - Upload/download only if Disarmed

Option 4 - Send Test Calls Only if Armed

Option 5 - Test Time Period is in days

Option 6 - Hold line open following Domestic/Voice report for DTMF control

Option 7 - First to Open Last to Close Reporting (Must be OFF to Report Open/Close)

Option 8 - Answer After 1 ring for Two Way Voice Call-back Mode

Option 1 Step to next Number - If more than one telephone number is programmed, this

option will force the dialler to step through each number after a call. If this option is

off the dialler will make all calls to the first number before moving on to the next

number (Must be OFF for Domestic Dialling and Should be OFF for CID).

Option 2 Upload/download uses Call-back Number - A Telephone number can be programmed as a Call-back number. If this option is turned on, and a PC contacts the

panel a direct connection cannot be made with the PC. The panel will hang-up the call

and dial the PC back on the Call-back number.

Option 3 Upload/download only if Disarmed - If this option is turned on, and a PC attempts to contact the panel while the alarm is Armed a direct connection cannot be

made as the panel will not answer the call. If the panel is Disarmed a connection can

be established.

Option 4 Send Test Calls Only if Armed - If this option is On the panel will only send a daily test call if it is Armed. This option assumes that the normal arm/disarm signals sent

on a daily basis can serve as a test and that the connection only needs to be verified

daily if the panel is left in the armed state for periods longer than 24 hours.

Option 5 Test Time Period is in days - Is this option is turned off, the test time period (P175E5E) will be set in hours. If this option is turned on the test time period will be

in days.

Option 6 Hold line open following Domestic/Voice report for DTMF control - If this option is On the dialler will keep the telephone line open after being kissed-off

following a Domestic or Voice alarm call so that the person at the phone can then use

their DTMF codes to arm/disarm the system or turn on the optional microphone if

required.

Option 7 First to Open Last to Close Reporting - If this option is on and the alarm is split into two Areas, then the “Arm” report to the monitoring station will only be sent when

both areas are armed and it will be a single report on Area A account code (last to

close). On Disarming of the alarm the disarm report will be sent when either Area is

disarmed (first to open). Only one disarm report will be sent using the Area A account

code. If zones in both areas are bypassed, the bypass report for all zones will only be

sent when both areas are armed (last to close) but the Bypass restore reports will be

sent only when the Area associated with the zone is disarmed. In this way if an area

remains armed and it’s associated bypassed zone/s are still bypassed the monitoring

station knows that the bypasses have not been removed yet. (Must be OFF to Report (Arm / Disarm) Open /Close when NOT a partitioned System).

Option 8 Answer After 1 ring for Two Way Voice Call-back Mode – if this option is turned ON and a full duplex voice board is fitted, the panel will answer an in-coming call

after 1 ring and automatically enter full duplex two way voice mode. For full duplex

voice mode to be active for call-back, option 5 at P183E must be turned OFF.


118

Auto Answer Ring countAuto Answer Ring countAuto Answer Ring countAuto Answer Ring count

AUTO-ANSWER RING COUNT - P175E 3E (Value 0-99)

If the dialler is set to answer an in-coming call for remote control or upload/download the

number of rings before answering the call can be set at this location. There is also a manual

answer function described on page 54.

Test Call optionsTest Call optionsTest Call optionsTest Call options

TIME to the FIRST DIALLER TEST CALLTIME to the FIRST DIALLER TEST CALLTIME to the FIRST DIALLER TEST CALLTIME to the FIRST DIALLER TEST CALL

Test Resync HHMM

TIME to the FIRST DIALLER TEST CALL - P175E 4E (Value 0000-2359)

If the dialler is set to send Automatic Test Calls, the start time for the first call is set at this

location. This allows the test call to be linked to a quite period where the line would not

normally be used (eg 2300)

Test Call Time PeriodTest Call Time PeriodTest Call Time PeriodTest Call Time Period

TEST CALL TIME PERIOD - P175E 5E (Value 0-255 Hours)

When reporting in Contact ID format, the panel can send regular test calls to the monitoring

company to check the integrity of the panel and the line. The regularity of the test calls is

set at this location. It would normally be set to a value of 24 so that a test call is sent one a

day. The start time for the first test should also be set at location P175E4E.

Keypad ListenKeypad ListenKeypad ListenKeypad Listen----In and Output OptionsIn and Output OptionsIn and Output OptionsIn and Output Options

Keypad ListenKeypad ListenKeypad ListenKeypad Listen----In OptionsIn OptionsIn OptionsIn Options

KEYPAD LISTEN-IN OPTIONS - P175E 6E

Option 1 - Listen-in Enabled when dialling only and in Disarmed State

Option 2 - Listen-in Enabled when dialling only and in Armed State

Option 3 - Listen-in Enabled when dialling only and in Monitor Mode

Option 4 - Listen-in Enabled through the entire call only in Disarmed state

Option 5 - Listen-in Enabled through the entire call only in Armed State

Option 6 - Listen-in Enabled through the entire call only in Monitor Mode

Option 7 - Listen-in Enabled when the panel answers a call

Option 8 - Listen-in on at All Times

The panel provides the facilities to use the buzzer in the keypad as a speaker to listen to the

call being made by the dialler. To use this feature a 5th wire must be connected between the

panel and a keypad using the listen-in terminals. The options above allow many

combinations of the listen-in to be used or it can be disabled by selecting no options.


119

Output # 1 ListenOutput # 1 ListenOutput # 1 ListenOutput # 1 Listen----In OptionsIn OptionsIn OptionsIn Options

OUTPUT # 1 LISTEN-IN OPTIONS - P175E 7E

Option 1 - Listen-in Enabled when dialling only and in Disarmed State

Option 2 - Listen-in Enabled when dialling only and in Armed State

Option 3 - Listen-in Enabled when dialling only and in Monitor Mode

Option 4 - Listen-in Enabled through the entire call only in Disarmed state

Option 5 - Listen-in Enabled through the entire call only in Armed State

Option 6 - Listen-in Enabled through the entire call only in Monitor Mode

Option 7 - Listen-in Enabled when the panel answers a call

Option 8 - Listen-in on at All Times

The panel provides the facilities to use a speaker connected to Output # 1 to listen to the

call being made by the dialler. For this to happen the device connected to output # 1 must

be an 8Ώ horn speaker. The options above allow many combinations of the listen-in to be

used or it can be disabled by selecting no options.

Dialling PreDialling PreDialling PreDialling Pre----Fix NumberFix NumberFix NumberFix Number DIALLING PRE-FIX NUMBER - P175E 8E (Value 1-16 digits)

The panel can be programmed with a Pre-fix telephone number. The Pre-fix number can be

up 16 digits long. The Pre-fix number can be dialled before any of the 8 Telephone numbers

if required (P183E Option 7).

Keypad Panic, Fire and Medical Alarms CID Keypad Panic, Fire and Medical Alarms CID Keypad Panic, Fire and Medical Alarms CID Keypad Panic, Fire and Medical Alarms CID

Report CodeReport CodeReport CodeReport Code

“PANIC” ALARM CONTACT ID REPORT CODE “PANIC” ALARM CONTACT ID REPORT CODE “PANIC” ALARM CONTACT ID REPORT CODE “PANIC” ALARM CONTACT ID REPORT CODE

“PANIC” ALARM CONTACT ID REPORT CODE - P175E 9E (3 digit event code)

Normally a keypad initiated Panic alarm would default to reporting a standard “Panic Alarm”

code of “120”. If the panic alarm is being used for some other purpose and you need to

identify the correct type of alarm event you can change the event code at this location.

“FIRE” ALARM CONTACT ID REPORT CODE “FIRE” ALARM CONTACT ID REPORT CODE “FIRE” ALARM CONTACT ID REPORT CODE “FIRE” ALARM CONTACT ID REPORT CODE

“FIRE” ALARM CONTACT ID REPORT CODE - P175E 10E (3 digit event code)

Normally a keypad initiated Fire alarm would default to reporting a standard “Fire Alarm”

code of “110”. If the fire alarm is being used for some other purpose and you need to

identify the correct type of alarm event you can change the event code at this location.

“MEDICAL” ALARM CONTACT ID REPORT CODE “MEDICAL” ALARM CONTACT ID REPORT CODE “MEDICAL” ALARM CONTACT ID REPORT CODE “MEDICAL” ALARM CONTACT ID REPORT CODE

“MEDICAL” ALARM CONTACT ID REPORT CODE - P175E 11E (3 digit event code)

Normally a keypad initiated Medical alarm would default to reporting a standard “Medical

Alarm” code of “100”. If the medical alarm is being used for some other purpose and you

need to identify the correct type of alarm event you can change the event code at this

location.

120

Output, Microphone &Output, Microphone &Output, Microphone &Output, Microphone & Voice Kiss OFF DTMF Voice Kiss OFF DTMF Voice Kiss OFF DTMF Voice Kiss OFF DTMF

Remote CodesRemote CodesRemote CodesRemote Codes

OUTPUT DTMF CONTROL CODE NUMBER OUTPUT DTMF CONTROL CODE NUMBER OUTPUT DTMF CONTROL CODE NUMBER OUTPUT DTMF CONTROL CODE NUMBER

OUTPUT DTMF CONTROL CODE NUMBER - P175E 12E (Value 1-4 digit code 0-9999)

The panel can be configured to allow remote operation of the Outputs via a remote

telephone. The code programmed at this address is the DTMF code that must be used when

performing this function. When dialling the panel and it has answered the call, after waiting

for the panel modem tones to stop you can enter in the 4 digit DTMF code plus the Output

number you wish to control, eg <1> for Output # 1, and the current status will be given of

the Output associated with the code entered. After that, if you press the “*” button on the

telephone, the status of the output will toggle eg if it was previously On it will change to Off

or vice versa. When finished you simply hang-up and 15 seconds later the panel will release

the line. To perform this function when using the Runner-8, the Voice Board MUST be fitted, as the Runner-8 does Not have a built-in DTMF Decoder.

121

MICROPHONE ON/OFF DTMF CODE NUMBER MICROPHONE ON/OFF DTMF CODE NUMBER MICROPHONE ON/OFF DTMF CODE NUMBER MICROPHONE ON/OFF DTMF CODE NUMBER

Monitor DTMF

MICROPHONE ON/OFF DTMF CODE NUMBER - P175E 13E (Value 1-4 digit code 0-9999)

The panel can be configured to allow remote listen-in via an on-site microphone. The Voice Board must be fitted to both the Runner-16 and the Runner-8 for the microphone

feature to be available. The code programmed at this address is the DTMF code that must

be used when turning the microphone On or Off. When you call the panel and it answers the

call, after waiting for the panel modem tones to stop, you can enter in the 4 digit DTMF code

plus the <*> button on the telephone. This will turn the Microphone On. By Pressing the

<*> button again the microphone will be turned Off. When finished you simply hang-up and

15 seconds later the panel will release the line.

DIALLER ACKNOWLEDGE DTMF CODE NUMBER DIALLER ACKNOWLEDGE DTMF CODE NUMBER DIALLER ACKNOWLEDGE DTMF CODE NUMBER DIALLER ACKNOWLEDGE DTMF CODE NUMBER

DIALLER ACKNOWLEDGE DTMF (Domestic/Voice Dial) CODE NUMBER - P175E 14E

(Value 1-4 digit code 0-9999)

If the Runner-16 panel is set to report in Domestic or Voice reporting formats, you can

simply kiss-off (acknowledge) the alarm by pressing the <#> button on the remote

telephone. Alternatively if you require a more secure kiss-off method to ensure that the

alarm is only kissed off by the correct person, you can program a 1-4 digit code at this

location. If a code is programmed at this location you must enter in the code followed by the

<#> button to kiss-off the alarm event. To perform this function when using the Runner-8, the Voice Board MUST be fitted, as the Runner-8 does Not have a built-in DTMF Decoder.

FORCE TEST CALL DTMF CODE NUMBER FORCE TEST CALL DTMF CODE NUMBER FORCE TEST CALL DTMF CODE NUMBER FORCE TEST CALL DTMF CODE NUMBER

FORCE TEST CALL DTMF CODE NUMBER - P175E 15E (Value 1-4 digit code 0-9999)

If a user wishes to remotely force a test call from the panel to a monitoring company using

the Contact ID test message, you can dial the panel and when it answers enter the code

programmed at this location on the telephone. To perform this function when using the Runner-8, the Voice Board MUST be fitted, as the Runner-8 does Not have a built-in DTMF Decoder.

If a voice board is fitted you can assign a voice message (see P176E11E below) to indicate

that the function was started. If no voice board is fitted but there is a DTMF IC fitted to the

panel you will get 3 short beeps after the code is entered to indicate the function was

started. Once you hang-up the phone the panel will then make a call to the monitoring

company and send a manual test call message. If no code is programmed at this location (ie

“0”) the function will be disabled. The code can be a 1-4 digit number as required.

NOTE: If using this remote test code and any of the other remote DTMF codes at locations

(P63E, P175E12E, P175E13E & P175E14E) you should make this code a 4 digit code to

ensure the panel knows what function is being operated. If no other DTMF remote functions

are being used this code can be a single digit. It is also possible to force a locally generated

test call from the panel keypad by pressing and Holding the <CONTROL> button then

Immediately press and Hold the <0> button. This will force a test call to the monitoring

company.


122

Miscellaneous Voice Reporting Message Miscellaneous Voice Reporting Message Miscellaneous Voice Reporting Message Miscellaneous Voice Reporting Message

Numbers Numbers Numbers Numbers KEYPAD or RADIO PANIC ALARM VOICE MESSAGE NUMBER - P176E 1E (Value 0-99)

FIRE ALARM VOICE MESSAGE NUMBER - P176E 2E (Value 0-99)

MEDICAL ALARM VOICE MESSAGE NUMBER - P176E 3E (Value 0-99)

AC FAIL ALARM VOICE MESSAGE NUMBER - P176E 4E (Value 0-99)

AC RESTORE VOICE MESSAGE NUMBER - P176E 5E (Value 0-99)

BATTERY LOW ALARM VOICE MESSAGE NUMBER - P176E 6E (Value 0-99)

BATTERY RESTORE VOICE MESSAGE NUMBER - P176E 7E (Value 0-99)

TAMPER ALARMS VOICE MESSAGE NUMBER - P176E 8E (Value 0-99)

DURESS ALARM VOICE MESSAGE NUMBER - P176E 9E (Value 0-99)

LATCHKEY DISARM VOICE MESSAGE NUMBER - P176E 10E (Value 0-99)

MANUAL TEST CALL INITIATED VOICE MESSAGE NUMBER - P176E 11E (Value 0-99)

If a Voice Board is connected to the panel it is possible to send various alarm messages to

identify the type of alarm. If the above locations are programmed with a “0” then the event

will not report in Voice or Domestic format

123

Telephone NumbersTelephone NumbersTelephone NumbersTelephone Numbers

Programming Telephone NumbersProgramming Telephone NumbersProgramming Telephone NumbersProgramming Telephone Numbers


TELEPHONE NUMBERS - P181E 1-8E (Value 1-16 digit number)

The Telephone Numbers can be up to 16 digits long. They can also include some special functions

or characters as per the chart below.

CID (ContactCID (ContactCID (ContactCID (Contact----ID) Monitoring Account Code NumbersID) Monitoring Account Code NumbersID) Monitoring Account Code NumbersID) Monitoring Account Code Numbers

MONITORING ACCOUNT CODE NUMBER - P62E 1-2E (1 = Area A, 2 = Area B) (Value

0000-FFFF)

When the dialler is reporting to a monitoring station there must be a unique account code

programmed to identify the panel. There is an account code for each area. The account code is 4

digits. Each digit can be a number from 0-9 as well as the special characters B,C,D,E & F. The

chart below shows how the special characters are entered.

LED KEYPAD

BUTTON

LED KEYPAD

INDICATION

LCD KEYPAD

BUTTON

LCD KEYPAD

CID & 4+2 INDICATIONS

LCD KEYPAD

TELEPHONE INDICATIONS

CID & 4+2

SPECIAL

CHARACTERS

TELEPHONE NUMBER

SPECIAL FUNCTION

“BYPASS” - CONTROL & 0

- DELETE # DELETE # DELETE #

“PANIC” 11 CONTROL

& 2

B # “B” “#”

“MEMORY” 12 CONTROL

& 3

C * “C” “*”

“CONTROL” 13 CONTROL

& 4

D - “D” “2.5 sec

Pause”

“ARM” 14 CONTROL

& 5

E w “E” “Wait for

2nd Dial-tone”

“STAY” 15

CONTROL

& 6

F = “F” “5 sec

Pause”

Reporting FormatsReporting FormatsReporting FormatsReporting Formats

TelephoTelephoTelephoTelephone Number Report Formatsne Number Report Formatsne Number Report Formatsne Number Report Formats

TELEPHONE NUMBER REPORT FORMATS - P182E 1-8E

Option 0 – No Dialling (Must Program as a ‘0’ if the Ph Number is to be used as ‘Call-Back’ #)

Option 1 - Contact ID

Option 2 - Domestic Dial

Option 3 - Pager

Option 4 - Voice Dialler


124

Option 5 - 4 + 2 (Pulsed) 10 pps (1400 Hz Handshake, 1900 Hz transmit Tone)




Option 9 - 4 + 2 DTMF (with Checksum)

Option 10 - SIA

Option 11 - SIA Slow

Option 0 No Reporting - If the option is programmed as “0”, the panel will not report in any format for the selected telephone number. If the number is to be used as a Call-back number this

option should be programmed as a “0”.

Option 1 Contact ID - If this option is set for the telephone number, the panel will send a

Contact ID message to a Monitoring Station.

Option 2 Domestic Dial - If this option is set for the telephone number, the panel is expecting to dial a residential telephone number when an alarm occurs. The message sent

consists of a siren tone over the phone to alert the person called that an alarm is in

progress. The alarm can be cancelled by the person called by pressing the “#” button

on a touch tone phone during the quiet period. If there is a code programmed at

location P175E14E the alarm must be kissed off by entering in the code then “#”. If

the alarm is cancelled by a valid user code the dialler will stop any further calls. If Option 1 at P46E is turned on (use near and confirmed alarm reporting) the panel will

not send an alarm in this format.

Option 3 Pager - Report alarm events using "Pager" format. This format utilizes Telecom’s 026 pager network or other public subscriber networks, etc, to send numeric

messages to a compatible pager. The panel sends a 12 digit numeric number to the

pager consisting of the account code (P62E) the 3 digit CID event code for the alarm

event and a 3 digit zone number to identify the zone in alarm.

Option 4 Voice Dialler - If the optional voice board is fitted to the panel then selecting this option for the telephone number will allow preset voice messages to be sent via the

telephone following an alarm. The kiss off method to acknowledge the alarm message

is the same as the Domestic Format. If Option 1 at P46E is turned on (use near and

confirmed alarm reporting) the panel will not send an alarm in this format.

Option 5 4 + 2 (10 pps) - This option transmits a 4 digit account code followed by a 2 digit event code to a central monitoring station. The handshake tone from the monitoring

station must be 1400 Hz and the transmit tone from the panel will be at 1900Hz at

10 pulses per second.









20 pulses per second

Option 9 4 + 2 (DTMF) - This option transmits a 4 digit account code followed by a 2 digit event code plus a checksum using DTMF signals to a central monitoring station. The

handshake tone from the monitoring station must be 1400 Hz /2300 Hz.

Option 10 SIA – This option selects FSK SIA format. If using SIA format, ensure that the

monitoring receiver does not generate a 4+2 2300hz acknowledge tone before

the SIA acknowledge tone because the 4+2 tone accuracy is +/– 5% which can

make it the same as the SIA acknowledge tone.

Option 11 SIA Slow - This option selects FSK SIA Slow format. This format is similar

to option 10 except every signal will be sent separately with a kiss-off after each

signal whereas option 10 will send all signals in one continuous burst with one

kiss-off at the end.


125

TELEPHONE NUMBER REPORT OPTIONSTELEPHONE NUMBER REPORT OPTIONSTELEPHONE NUMBER REPORT OPTIONSTELEPHONE NUMBER REPORT OPTIONS TELEPHONE NUMBER REPORT OPTIONS - P183E 1-8E

Option 1 - Stop Dialling if Kissed Off (See Note below for Domestic/Voice Dialling)

Option 2 - Monitor Call Progress

Option 3 - Blind Dial

Option 4 - Use Group Numbers for Contact ID Reporting

Option 5 - Stay On-line after Alarm report for two way voice

Option 6 - Auto Kiss-off for Voice/Domestic Reporting

Option 7 - Use the Dial Pre-fix Number

Option 8 - Used as the Call-back Number

Option 1 Stop if Kissed Off - If this option is turned on for the telephone number, the dialler will stop sending the alarm if the signal is kissed-off and will not proceed with any

other telephone numbers for that event. If not kissed-off, the dialler will start dialling

any other programmed numbers. If the event is not kissed-off from any of the

telephone numbers and the maximum re-tries limit is reached, then the event is

marked as unsent and will be added to the next event that causes the dialler to

report. If this option is off, the dialler will send the event for the maximum re-tries

count or until kissed-off but it will then proceed to report the same event to any other

telephone numbers programmed. NOTE: If Alarms are reported in Domestic or

Voice mode and you have more than one (1) telephone number to be called, then Turn OFF this option if you want the alarms to be reported to Both numbers.

Option 2 Monitor Call Progress - Monitor call progress means that the dialler monitors the status of the dialling tones to determine whether the call is valid or not. If the call is

not valid, eg engaged, the panel will know and hang up the call and try again.

Option 3 Blind Dial - When the dialler makes a call it looks for dial tone before making the

call. If no dial tone is detected the panel hangs up and attempts another call. The

panel will do this 3 times and if dial tone is still not detected it will make the call

anyway. If blind dial is on, the panel skips the dial tone detection and dials 4 seconds

after looping the line (used where non standard or low level dial tone exists).

Option 4 Use Group Numbers for Contact ID Reporting - When sending an alarm using Contact ID, the panel can send separate account codes to report the two areas or,

use one account code (P62E1E Area A) and use the group number to identify the two

areas. Turning this option on sends one account with group numbers.

Option 5 Stay On-line after Alarm report for two way voice – if this option is turned ON and a full duplex two way voice board is fitted, the panel will send a command to the

monitoring company in CID or SIA formats to tell the receiver to stay on-line so the

operator can listen or talk to the site (full duplex two way voice). See also the

instructions on Page 118.

Option 6 Auto Kiss-off for Voice/Domestic reporting (After Max Dial (Re-Tries) Attempts) - If Voice or Domestic Report Format is used and this option is turned On, the alarm will be reported and it can be kissed- off by entering the kiss-off code

(P175E14E) at the telephone but if not kissed-off, the event is automatically removed

from the dialler buffer once the maximum dial re-tries has been reached for the

telephone number. A new event must then be created before the dialler will dial

again.

Option 7 Use the Dial Pre-fix Number - If the Telephone number does not provide sufficient digits for dialling purposes it is possible to program a dial pre-fix number (P175E8E).

The pre-fix can be dialled before the telephone number. Turning this option on dials

the pre-fix first followed by the telephone number.

Option 8 Used as the Call-back Number - Any of the 8 telephone numbers can be designated as the Call-back number. A Call-back number is normally used to allow

the panel to dial a preset number and connect to a modem for upload/download

purposes.


126

Maximum Dial ReMaximum Dial ReMaximum Dial ReMaximum Dial Re----Tries per Telephone Tries per Telephone Tries per Telephone Tries per Telephone

NumberNumberNumberNumber MAXIMUM DIAL RE-TRIES per TELEPHONE NUMBER - P184E 1-8E (Value 0-99)

The maximum dial re-tries is the number of times that the panel will dial a telephone

number in an attempt to get kissed-off.

Dial Dial Dial Dial Reporting Reporting Reporting Reporting OptionsOptionsOptionsOptions

Dialler Reporting Options “A”Dialler Reporting Options “A”Dialler Reporting Options “A”Dialler Reporting Options “A”

DIALLER REPORTING OPTIONS “A” - P186E 1-8E

Option 1 - Report Mains Fail

Option 2 - Report Battery Low

Option 3 - Report Radio Battery Low

Option 4 - Report Line Fail

Option 5 - Report System Tamper

Option 6 - Report Keypad Tamper

Option 7 - Report Zone Tamper

Option 8 - Report Radio Zone Tamper

Option 1 Report Mains Fail - If this option is on the panel will report a Mains fail after the report delay time (P25E6E) has expired.

Option 2 Report Battery Low - If this option is on the panel will report a Battery Low.

Option 3 Report Radio Battery Low - If this option is on the panel will report a Battery Low from any radio zones that have the battery status monitored.

Option 4 Report Line Fail - If this option is on the panel will report a Telephone Line fail. The

panel will send the line fail and the line restore at the same time.

Option 5 Report System Tamper - If this option is on the panel will report a Tamper Alarm on the panel tamper input.

Option 6 Report Keypad Tamper - If this option is on the panel will report a Tamper Alarm from a keypad fitted with a tamper switch or a wrong code alarm from a keypad.

Option 7 Report Zone Tamper - If this option is on the panel will report a Zone Tamper

Alarm.

Option 8 Report Radio Zone Tamper - If this option is on the panel will report a Radio Zone Tamper Alarm.

Dialler Reporting Options “B”Dialler Reporting Options “B”Dialler Reporting Options “B”Dialler Reporting Options “B”

DIALLER REPORTING OPTIONS “B” - P187E 1-8E

Option 1 - Report Duress

Option 2 - Report Supervised Radio Alarm

Option 3 - Report Zone Inactivity Alarm

Option 4 - Report Manual Panic Alarm

Option 5 - Report Manual Fire Alarm

Option 6 - Report Manual Medical Alarm

Option 7 - Report Radio Pendant Panic Alarm

Option 8 - Report Zone Bypasses

Option 1 Report Duress - If this option is on the panel will report a Duress Alarm (see P25E2E).


127

Option 2 Report Supervised Radio Alarm - If this option is on the panel will report a Supervised

radio Alarm (see P25E4E).

Option 3 Report Zone Inactivity Alarm - If this option is on the panel will report a Zone

Inactivity (Sensor-watch) Alarm (see P163E).

Option 4 Report Manual Panic Alarm - If this option is on the panel will report a Keypad

generated Panic Alarm.

Option 5 Report Manual Fire Alarm - If this option is on the panel will report a Keypad

generated Fire Alarm.

Option 6 Report Manual Medical Alarm - If this option is on the panel will report a Keypad

generated Medical Alarm.

Option 7 Report Radio Pendant Panic Alarm - If this option is on the panel will report a Panic

Alarm generated by a radio key (pendant).

Option 8 Report Zone Bypasses - If this option is on the panel will report a Manual or Auto

Bypass on a zone.

Dialler Reporting Options “C”Dialler Reporting Options “C”Dialler Reporting Options “C”Dialler Reporting Options “C”

DIALLER REPORTING OPTIONS “C” - P188E 1-8E

Option 1 - Report Arm/Disarm

Option 2 - Report Stay Mode Arm/Disarm

Option 3 - Report Disarm only after an Alarm

Option 4 - Report Stay Mode Disarm only after an Alarm

Option 5 - Report Stay Mode Zone Alarms

Option 6 - Report Access to Program Mode

Option 7 - Report 24 Hour Alarms for Domestic/Voice Formats

Option 8 - Report Zone Restores

Option 1 Report Arm/Disarm (Must have Option-3 Turned OFF for this to work) - If this option is on then all Arm/Disarm signals will be reported to a Monitoring Station if

Contact ID or 4 + 2 is set as the reporting format.

Option 2 Report Stay Mode Arm/Disarm (Must have Option-4 Turned OFF for this to

work) - If this option is on then all Stay Mode Arm/Disarm signals will be reported to a Monitoring Station if Contact ID or 4 + 2 is set as the reporting format.

Option 3 Send Disarm only after an Alarm - If this option is on, the panel will not normally send an Arm/Disarm signal to the monitoring company, however, if a zone alarm

occurs then the panel will send a Disarm following the disarming of the panel to show

it has been turned off y a valid user. This Option Overrides Option-1.

Option 4 Send Stay Mode Disarm only after an Alarm - If this option is on, the panel will

not normally send a Stay Mode Arm/Disarm signal to the monitoring company,

however, if a zone alarm occurs then the panel will send a Stay Mode Disarm

following the disarming of the panel to show it has been turned off by a valid user.

This Option Overrides Option-2.

Option 5 Report Stay Mode Zone Alarms - If this option is on, the panel will report zone alarms in Stay Mode.

Option 6 Report Access to Program Mode - If this option is on, the panel will report a

Contact ID code to indicate that either Client or Installer program Modes have been accessed.

Option 7 Report 24 Hour Alarms for Domestic/Voice Formats - When the panel is set to send alarms via domestic or voice mode, No alarms will normally be sent for 24 hour

zones. If 24 hour alarms are required to be reported in Domestic/Voice mode then

this option must be turned on.

Option 8 Report Zone Restores - If this option is on, the panel will report all zone restores in Contact ID or 4 + 2 formats. If this option is turned off, the panel will only report the

alarms but Not the restores.

128

Dialler Reporting Options “D”Dialler Reporting Options “D”Dialler Reporting Options “D”Dialler Reporting Options “D”

DIALLER REPORTING OPTIONS “D” - P189E 1-8E

Option 1 - Report Latchkey Disarm

Option 2 - Report Delinquency Alarm

Option 3 - Report Test Calls (Disable when reporting in Domestic/Voice mode)

Option 4 - Report Fuse Failure

Option 5 - Report Output 1 or 2 Fail

Option 6 - Report RTC (Real Time Clock) Time changed

Option 7 - Report Keypad Buss Trouble

Option 8 - Report RF Interference (Jamming) Detected

Option 1 Report Latchkey Disarm - If the panel is armed in Latchkey Report Mode by using a Code, Key-switch, <ARM>, <STAY>, <A> or buttons, any code or key-switch

without the Latchkey option (P4E or P122E Option 6 off) used to Disarm the Alarm

will cause a Disarm report to be sent via the dialler. Normally the report format for

the telephone number would be set to Domestic or Voice reporting.

Option 2 Report Delinquency Alarm - If the panel has been configured for Delinquency monitoring (P67E) and an area has not been armed for the time set at P67E, a

Delinquency Alarm will be sent to the Monitoring Station if Contact ID or 4 + 2 is set

as the reporting format.

Option 3 Send Test Calls - If Contact ID or 4 + 2 formats are used for reporting alarm, the panel can also send Automatic test calls. If this option is turned on the test calls will

be sent but if test calls are not required they can be disabled by turning this option

off. For panel v:9.06 or below, Disable Test Calls for Ph#2~8 to prevent doubling-up. (Disable Test Calls when reporting in Domestic/Voice mode).

Option 4 Report Fuse Failure - The panel has two on-board thermal fuses designed to protect the 12v DC outputs from short circuits. If this option is on and either of these

fuses are open, a report will be sent to the monitoring station if Contact ID is set as

the reporting format.

Option 5 Report Output 1 or 2 Fail - The panel has two high current Outputs (O/P 1 & 2). These Outputs are normally used to drive sirens or strobes for local alarm warning. If

option 8 at location P37E is on for either O/P 1 or 2 the Output status will be

monitored (eg wire to siren has been cut). If this option is on and a fault is detected

on the output, a report will be sent to the monitoring station if Contact ID is set as

the reporting format.

Option 6 Report RTC (Real Time Clock) Time Changed - If the panel clock is changed and this option is turned on, the event will be reported to the monitoring station. (Not

available on the Runner-8) Option 7 Report Keypad Buss Trouble - If any connected keypads are removed from the

system, they will be reported as missing if this option is turned on.

Option 8 Report RF Interference (Jamming) Detected – If the radio receiver detects RF Interference (Jamming) of the radio frequency, the panel can report this event to the

monitoring station if this option is turned on. NOTE: If the keypad indicates ‘RF

Interference’, it is usually because either the installation site or an adjacent site has a Wireless Modem or Router or a High Powered Cordless Phone or similar such Wireless Device. In such cases, your options are to either re-locate the Wireless Receiver that’s connected to the panel so that it is far away from such devices or to re-locate the Wireless device that is causing the Interference.

129

Call Divert Numbers & OptionsCall Divert Numbers & OptionsCall Divert Numbers & OptionsCall Divert Numbers & Options NOTENOTENOTENOTE

This feature is supported only in Australia and New Zealand.

Call Divert Trigger Events Call Divert Trigger Events Call Divert Trigger Events Call Divert Trigger Events

CALL DIVERT TRIGGER EVENTS - P192E 1-2E (1 = Area A Trigger Events, 2 = Area B

Trigger Events)

Option 1 - Divert on Arm

Option 2 - Divert on Disarm

Option 3 - Divert on Stay Mode Arm

Option 4 - Divert on Stay Mode Disarm

Option 5 - Divert on Key-switch Arm/Disarm

Option 6 - Divert on Time-zone Arm/Disarm

Option 7 - Divert on DTMF or PC Arm/Disarm

Option 8 - Divert on single button <ARM> or <STAY>

Option 1 Divert Arm - If this option is on then the Call-Divert On number (P194E1E) will be dialled when the system is Armed. The User Code must have call divert assigned at

P4E option 7 for it to happen. If a User Code does not have option 7 on at P4E the

call divert number will not be dialled (used for cleaner codes and others who should

not be able to remove the call divert function).

Option 2 Divert on Disarm - If this option is on then the Call-Divert Off number (P194E2E) will be dialled when the system is Disarmed. The User Code must have call divert

assigned at P4E option 7 for it to happen. If a User Code does not have option 7 on at

P4E the call divert number will not be dialled (used for cleaner codes and others who

should not be able to remove the call divert function).

Option 3 Divert on Stay Mode Arm - If this option is on then the Call-Divert On number

(P194E1E) will be dialled when the system is Armed in Stay Mode. The User Code

Must have call divert assigned at P4E option 7 for it to happen. If a User Code does

not have option 7 on at P4E the call divert number will not be dialled (used for

cleaner codes and others who should not be able to remove the call divert function).

Option 4 Divert on Stay Mode Disarm - If this option is on then the Call-Divert Off number (P194E2E) will be dialled when the system is Stay Mode Disarmed. The User Code

must have call divert assigned at P4E option 7 for it to happen. If a User Code does

not have option 7 on at P4E the call divert number will not be dialled (used for

cleaner codes and others who should not be able to remove the call divert function).

Option 5 Divert on Key-switch Arm/Disarm - If this option is on then the Call-Divert On and Off numbers (P194E1E & 2E) will be dialled when the system is Armed or

Disarmed with the key-switch.

Option 6 Divert on Time-zone Arm/Disarm - If this option is on then the Call-Divert On and Off numbers (P194E1E & 2E) will be dialled when the system is Armed or Disarmed

by a Time-zone.

Option 7 Divert on DTMF or PC Arm/Disarm - If this option is on then the Call-Divert On and Off numbers (P194E1E & 2E) will be dialled when the system is Armed or

Disarmed by a Remote DTMF code or by a PC connection.

Option 8 Divert on single button <ARM> or <STAY> - If this option is on then the Call-Divert On number (P194E1E) will be dialled when the system is Armed with the

<ARM> or <STAY> buttons. This option must be selected if the Call Divert function is

required and single button arming is being used.


130

Call Divert Numbers & OptionsCall Divert Numbers & OptionsCall Divert Numbers & OptionsCall Divert Numbers & Options (Cont.) (Cont.) (Cont.) (Cont.) NOTENOTENOTENOTE

This feature is supported only on Australia and New Zealand.

Divert Number Dial OptionsDivert Number Dial OptionsDivert Number Dial OptionsDivert Number Dial Options

DIVERT NUMBER DIAL OPTIONS - P193E 1-2E (1 = Divert ON Number, 2 = Divert OFF

number)

Option 1 - Spare

Option 2 - Spare

Option 3 - Blind Dial

Option 4 - Spare

Option 5 - Spare

Option 6 - Spare

Option 7 - Use the Dial Pre-fix Number

Option 8 - Spare

Option 1 Spare

Option 2 Spare

Option 3 Blind Dial - When the dialler makes a divert call it looks for dial tone before making the call. If no dial tone is detected the panel hangs up and attempts another call. The

panel will do this 3 times and if dial tone is still not detected it will make the call

anyway. If blind dial is on, the panel skips the dial tone detection and dials 4 seconds

after looping the line (used where non standard or low level dial tone exists).

Option 4 Spare

Option 5 Spare

Option 6 Spare

Option 7 Use the Dial Pre-fix Number - If the Divert number does not provide sufficient digits for dialling purposes it is possible to program a dial pre-fix number (P175E8E).

The pre-fix can be dialled before the divert number. Turning this option on dials the

pre-fix first followed by the divert number.

Option 8 Spare

Divert NumberDivert NumberDivert NumberDivert Number

DIVERT NUMBER - P194E 1-2E (Value 1-16 digits) (1 = Divert ON Number, 2 = Divert OFF

number)

The call divert numbers are programmed at this location. They are the numbers that must be

dialled to turn the divert On or Off. Option 1 turns call divert ON and Option 2 turns the call

divert OFF.

131

4+2 Program Options4+2 Program Options4+2 Program Options4+2 Program Options

When using the 4+2 Reporting Format the two digit report code can be changed if desired at

the locations below. Also the two digit codes can include the numbers 0-9 as well the special

characters B,C,D,E & F. The chart below shows how to program the special 4+2 characters.

Using the 4+2 CodesUsing the 4+2 CodesUsing the 4+2 CodesUsing the 4+2 Codes

Armed By User 4+2 CodeArmed By User 4+2 CodeArmed By User 4+2 CodeArmed By User 4+2 Code ( User Arm ) ( User Arm ) ( User Arm ) ( User Arm )

ARMED by USER 4+2 CODE - P16E 1-100E User Number (Value 00-FF)

Disarmed By User 4+2 CodeDisarmed By User 4+2 CodeDisarmed By User 4+2 CodeDisarmed By User 4+2 Code ( User open ) ( User open ) ( User open ) ( User open )

DISARMED by USER 4+2 CODE - P17E 1-100E User Number (Value 00-FF)

Zone Alarm 4+2 CodeZone Alarm 4+2 CodeZone Alarm 4+2 CodeZone Alarm 4+2 Code

ZONE ALARM 4+2 CODE - P147E 1-16E Zone Number (Value 00-FF)

Zone Alarm Restore 4+2 CodeZone Alarm Restore 4+2 CodeZone Alarm Restore 4+2 CodeZone Alarm Restore 4+2 Code

ZONE ALARM RESTORE 4+2 CODE - P148E 1-16E Zone Number (Value 00-FF)

Zone Near Alarm 4+2 CodeZone Near Alarm 4+2 CodeZone Near Alarm 4+2 CodeZone Near Alarm 4+2 Code

ZONE NEAR ALARM 4+2 CODE - P149E 1-16E Zone Number (Value 00-FF)

Zone Near Alarm Restore 4+2 CodeZone Near Alarm Restore 4+2 CodeZone Near Alarm Restore 4+2 CodeZone Near Alarm Restore 4+2 Code

ZONE NEAR ALARM RESTORE 4+2 CODE - P150E 1-16E Zone Number (Value 00-FF)

Zone Zone Zone Zone ConfirmedConfirmedConfirmedConfirmed Alarm 4+2 Code Alarm 4+2 Code Alarm 4+2 Code Alarm 4+2 Code

ZONE VERIFIED ALARM 4+2 CODE - P151E 1-16E Zone Number (Value 00-FF)

Zone Zone Zone Zone Confirmed Confirmed Confirmed Confirmed Alarm Restore 4+2 CodeAlarm Restore 4+2 CodeAlarm Restore 4+2 CodeAlarm Restore 4+2 Code

ZONE VERIFIED ALARM RESTORE 4+2 CODE - P152E 1-16E Zone Number (Value 00-FF)

Zone Bypass 4+2 CodeZone Bypass 4+2 CodeZone Bypass 4+2 CodeZone Bypass 4+2 Code

ZONE BYPASS 4+2 CODE - P155E 1-16E Zone Number (Value 00-FF)

Zone Bypass Restore 4+2 CodeZone Bypass Restore 4+2 CodeZone Bypass Restore 4+2 CodeZone Bypass Restore 4+2 Code

ZONE BYPASS RESTORE 4+2 CODE - P156E 1-16E Zone Number (Value 00-FF)

132

Mains/Battery/Tamper/Duress & Arming 4+2 Mains/Battery/Tamper/Duress & Arming 4+2 Mains/Battery/Tamper/Duress & Arming 4+2 Mains/Battery/Tamper/Duress & Arming 4+2

CodesCodesCodesCodes

ACACACAC Fail 4+2 Code Fail 4+2 Code Fail 4+2 Code Fail 4+2 Code

MAINS FAIL 4+2 CODE - P195E 1E (Value 00-FF)

ACACACAC OKOKOKOK 4+2 Code 4+2 Code 4+2 Code 4+2 Code

MAINS FAIL RESTORE 4+2 CODE - P195E 2E (Value 00-FF)

Battery Low 4+2 CodeBattery Low 4+2 CodeBattery Low 4+2 CodeBattery Low 4+2 Code

BATTERY LOW 4+2 CODE - P195E 3E (Value 00-FF)

Battery Battery Battery Battery OKOKOKOK 4+2 Code 4+2 Code 4+2 Code 4+2 Code

BATTERY LOW RESTORE 4+2 CODE - P195E 4E (Value 00-FF)

System Tamper 4+2 CodeSystem Tamper 4+2 CodeSystem Tamper 4+2 CodeSystem Tamper 4+2 Code

SYSTEM TAMPER 4+2 CODE - P195E 5E (Value 00-FF)

System Tamper Restore 4+2 CodeSystem Tamper Restore 4+2 CodeSystem Tamper Restore 4+2 CodeSystem Tamper Restore 4+2 Code

SYSTEM TAMPER RESTORE 4+2 CODE - P195E 6E (Value 00-FF)

DTMF or PC Arm 4+2 CodeDTMF or PC Arm 4+2 CodeDTMF or PC Arm 4+2 CodeDTMF or PC Arm 4+2 Code

DTMF or PC ARM 4+2 CODE - P195E 7E (Value 00-FF)

DTMF or PC Disarm 4+2 CodeDTMF or PC Disarm 4+2 CodeDTMF or PC Disarm 4+2 CodeDTMF or PC Disarm 4+2 Code

DTMF or PC DISARM 4+2 CODE - P195E 8E (Value 00-FF)

Duress ALARM 4+2 CODEDuress ALARM 4+2 CODEDuress ALARM 4+2 CODEDuress ALARM 4+2 CODE

DURESS ALARM 4+2 CODE - P195E 9E (Value 00-FF)

Automatic Test Call 4+2 CodeAutomatic Test Call 4+2 CodeAutomatic Test Call 4+2 CodeAutomatic Test Call 4+2 Code

AUTOMATIC TEST CALL 4+2 CODE - P195E 10E (Value 00-FF)

Armed By <Arm> Button 4+2 CodeArmed By <Arm> Button 4+2 CodeArmed By <Arm> Button 4+2 CodeArmed By <Arm> Button 4+2 Code

ARMED by <ARM> BUTTON 4+2 CODE - P195E 11E (Value 00-FF)

Stay Mode Arm 4+2 CodeStay Mode Arm 4+2 CodeStay Mode Arm 4+2 CodeStay Mode Arm 4+2 Code

STAY MODE ARM 4+2 CODE - P195E 12E (Value 00-FF)

Disarmed By <Arm>or <Stay> Button 4+2 CoDisarmed By <Arm>or <Stay> Button 4+2 CoDisarmed By <Arm>or <Stay> Button 4+2 CoDisarmed By <Arm>or <Stay> Button 4+2 Codededede

DISARMED by <ARM> or <STAY> BUTTON 4+2 CODE - P195E 13E (Value 00-FF)

ARMED by KEYARMED by KEYARMED by KEYARMED by KEY----SWITCH 4+2 CODESWITCH 4+2 CODESWITCH 4+2 CODESWITCH 4+2 CODE

ARMED by KEY-SWITCH 4+2 CODE - P195E 14E (Value 00-FF)


133

DISARMED by KEYDISARMED by KEYDISARMED by KEYDISARMED by KEY----SWITCH 4+2 CODESWITCH 4+2 CODESWITCH 4+2 CODESWITCH 4+2 CODE (OPEN) (OPEN) (OPEN) (OPEN)

DISARMED by KEY-SWITCH 4+2 CODE - P195E 15E (Value 00-FF)

FAFAFAFAIL to ARM by TIMEIL to ARM by TIMEIL to ARM by TIMEIL to ARM by TIME----ZONE 4+2 CODEZONE 4+2 CODEZONE 4+2 CODEZONE 4+2 CODE

FAIL to ARM by TIME-ZONE 4+2 CODE - P195E 16E (Value 00-FF)

“Panic” Alarm 4+2 Code“Panic” Alarm 4+2 Code“Panic” Alarm 4+2 Code“Panic” Alarm 4+2 Code

“PANIC” ALARM 4+2 CODE - P195E 17E (Value 00-FF)

“Panic” Alarm “Panic” Alarm “Panic” Alarm “Panic” Alarm OKOKOKOK 4+2 Code 4+2 Code 4+2 Code 4+2 Code

“PANIC” ALARM RESTORE 4+2 CODE - P195E 18E (Value 00-FF)

“Fire” Al“Fire” Al“Fire” Al“Fire” Alarm 4+2 Codearm 4+2 Codearm 4+2 Codearm 4+2 Code

“FIRE” ALARM 4+2 CODE - P195E 19E (Value 00-FF)

“Fire” Alarm “Fire” Alarm “Fire” Alarm “Fire” Alarm OKOKOKOK 4+2 Code 4+2 Code 4+2 Code 4+2 Code

“FIRE” ALARM RESTORE 4+2 CODE - P195E 20E (Value 00-FF)

“Medical” Alarm 4+2 Code“Medical” Alarm 4+2 Code“Medical” Alarm 4+2 Code“Medical” Alarm 4+2 Code

“MEDICAL” ALARM 4+2 CODE - P195E 21E (Value 00-FF)

“Medical” Alarm “Medical” Alarm “Medical” Alarm “Medical” Alarm OKOKOKOK 4+2 Code 4+2 Code 4+2 Code 4+2 Code

“MEDICAL” ALARM RESTORE 4+2 CODE - P195E 22E (Value 00-FF)

SIA Alarm Report CodesSIA Alarm Report CodesSIA Alarm Report CodesSIA Alarm Report Codes

The programmable SIA alarms events below are changed by programming a value from

1-14 (see chart below). For example, to send the SIA “Emergency Alarm” code when a

keypad panic is generated you must program a value of “7” at location P197E1E.

From the chart below you can select from 14 options that should cover most of the

custom requirements.

As an example, if you required zone 10 to send a fire alarm you would program a value

of 4 at address P196E10E. When you program a particular alarm type at any of the

locations below, the panel will automatically send all of the other associated reports (if

applicable) from the chart. Using the same example, if zone 10 was bypassed and the

SIA report code was set to type 4, the panel will send an “FB” event code to indicate

that it is a fire zone bypass instead of the default burglar alarm bypass (BB).

ZONE ALARM SIA REPORTING CODESZONE ALARM SIA REPORTING CODESZONE ALARM SIA REPORTING CODESZONE ALARM SIA REPORTING CODES

ZONE ALARM SIA REPORTING CODE - P196E 1-16E (Value from 1-14 taken from the

chart below)

“PANIC” ALARM SIA REPORTING CODES“PANIC” ALARM SIA REPORTING CODES“PANIC” ALARM SIA REPORTING CODES“PANIC” ALARM SIA REPORTING CODES

“PANIC” ALARM SIA REPORTING CODE - P197E 1E (Value from 1-14 taken from the chart below)


134

“FIRE” ALARM SIA REPORTING CODES“FIRE” ALARM SIA REPORTING CODES“FIRE” ALARM SIA REPORTING CODES“FIRE” ALARM SIA REPORTING CODES

“FIRE” ALARM SIA REPORTING CODE - P197E 2E (Value from 1-14 taken from the

chart below)

“MEDICAL” ALARM SIA REPORTING CODES“MEDICAL” ALARM SIA REPORTING CODES“MEDICAL” ALARM SIA REPORTING CODES“MEDICAL” ALARM SIA REPORTING CODES

“MEDICAL” ALARM SIA REPORTING CODE - P197E 3E (Value from 1-14 taken from

the chart below)

CHART FOR THE PROGRAMMABLE SIA EVENT CODES

Event Description Program Number

Alarm Restore Bypass Un-Bypass Trouble Trouble Restore

Near Alarm Verified Alarm

Burglary 1 BA BH BB BU BT BJ BA BV

Un-typed Alarm 2 UA UH UB UU UT UJ - -

Hold-up 3 HA HH HB HU HT HJ - -

Fire 4 FA FH FB FU FT FJ FA FM

Medical 5 MA MH MB MU MT MJ - -

Panic 6 PA PH PB PU PT PJ - -

Emergency 7 QA QH QB QU QT QJ - -

Gas 8 GA GH GB GU GT GJ - -

Sprinkler 9 SA SH SB SU ST SJ - -

Water 10 WA WH WB WU WT WJ - -

Heat 11 KA KH KB KU KT KJ - -

Freeze 12 ZA ZH ZB ZU ZT ZJ - -

Equipment 13 IA IR - - - - - -

Equip. Tamper 14 TA TH TB TU TT TJ - -

135

Diagnostic & Default OptionsDiagnostic & Default OptionsDiagnostic & Default OptionsDiagnostic & Default Options

Display Software Version, Keypad Number Display Software Version, Keypad Number Display Software Version, Keypad Number Display Software Version, Keypad Number

and Keypad Areasand Keypad Areasand Keypad Areasand Keypad Areas

Panel Software Version NumberPanel Software Version NumberPanel Software Version NumberPanel Software Version Number

PANEL SOFTWARE VERSION NUMBER - P200E 1E

This location will display the software version of the panel.

Keypad Address NumberKeypad Address NumberKeypad Address NumberKeypad Address Number

KEYPAD ADDRESS NUMBER - P200E 2E

This location will display the keypad number of the keypad currently in program mode.

Areas Assigned To the KeypadAreas Assigned To the KeypadAreas Assigned To the KeypadAreas Assigned To the Keypad

AREAS ASSIGNED to the KEYPAD - P200E 3E

This location will display the Areas assigned to the keypad currently in program mode.

Display Active Time Zones & Battery VoltageDisplay Active Time Zones & Battery VoltageDisplay Active Time Zones & Battery VoltageDisplay Active Time Zones & Battery Voltage

Display TimeDisplay TimeDisplay TimeDisplay Time----Zones Currently ActiveZones Currently ActiveZones Currently ActiveZones Currently Active

DISPLAY TIME-ZONES CURRENTLY ACTIVE - P200E 4E

This location will display which of the 8 Time-zones are currently on.

Display Battery VoltageDisplay Battery VoltageDisplay Battery VoltageDisplay Battery Voltage

DISPLAY BATTERY VOLTAGE - P200E 5E

This location will display the system battery voltage measured by the panel.

Start Walk Test ModeStart Walk Test ModeStart Walk Test ModeStart Walk Test Mode

Walk Test ModeWalk Test ModeWalk Test ModeWalk Test Mode

WALK-TEST MODE - P200E 6E

This address is used to start walk-test mode while in installer or client program mode. By

pressing P200E6E at the keypad, the keypad buzzer will beep at 1 second intervals to

indicate walk-test mode is active. If a siren is connected to an Output and that output has

option 1 turned on at location P36E the siren will give a 1 second beep every time a zone is

triggered while walk-test mode is active. By walking past all of the detectors connected to

the system and activating them, the associated zone will latch up at the keypad to allow

verification that all zones are working properly. By pressing the <Program> or <Enter>

button, walk-test mode will be terminated and the panel will leave program mode. The

results of the walk-test will be saved in the memory event buffer and can be viewed by

accessing memory display mode to verify which detectors were triggered during walk-test


136

mode. If Output 1 or 2 are used for the Audible walk-test indication and a horn speaker is

connected to the output (see P37E1 or 2E option 1), the siren on the output will give a single

tone for the chirp instead of the swept tone used for alarms.

Read or Write to the DTURead or Write to the DTURead or Write to the DTURead or Write to the DTU

Write To EEPROM (DTU) BoardWrite To EEPROM (DTU) BoardWrite To EEPROM (DTU) BoardWrite To EEPROM (DTU) Board

WRITE to EEPROM [DTU] BOARD - P200E 7E

This location is used to copy the panels program configuration to an external EEPROM

memory card (DTU-Data Transfer Unit) which can be plugged into the expansion socket on

the control board. The write protect link on the DTU board must be ON for the data to be

transferred.

Read From EEPROM (DTU) BoardRead From EEPROM (DTU) BoardRead From EEPROM (DTU) BoardRead From EEPROM (DTU) Board

READ from EEPROM[DTU] BOARD - P200E 8E

This location is used to return the panels program configuration from an external EEPROM

memory card (DTU-Data Transfer Unit) which can be plugged into the expansion socket on

the control board.

Restore DefaultsRestore DefaultsRestore DefaultsRestore Defaults

Default Codes & Telephone NumbersDefault Codes & Telephone NumbersDefault Codes & Telephone NumbersDefault Codes & Telephone Numbers

DEFAULT CODES & TELEPHONE NUMBER - P200E 9E

This location is used to return the panels User and Installer Codes plus the Telephone

Numbers & Account Codes to the default settings.

Default All Programming to Factory SettingsDefault All Programming to Factory SettingsDefault All Programming to Factory SettingsDefault All Programming to Factory Settings

DEFAULT ALL PROGRAMMING TO FACTORY SETTINGS - P200E 10E

This location is used to return the panels User and Installer Codes plus the Telephone

Numbers & Account Codes to the default settings.

Clear Memory BufferClear Memory BufferClear Memory BufferClear Memory Buffer

Clear Alarm Memory BufferClear Alarm Memory BufferClear Alarm Memory BufferClear Alarm Memory Buffer

CLEAR ALARM MEMORY BUFFER - P200E 11E

This location is used to clear ALL of the events stored on memory.

Start a CallStart a CallStart a CallStart a Call----BackBackBackBack Call Call Call Call

Initiate a Call to the CallInitiate a Call to the CallInitiate a Call to the CallInitiate a Call to the Call----Back NumberBack NumberBack NumberBack Number

INITIATE A CALL to the CALL-BACK NUMBER - P200E 12E

This location is used to force a call to the call-back number.


137

InstallerInstallerInstallerInstaller

Enter to Installer ModeEnter to Installer ModeEnter to Installer ModeEnter to Installer Mode

ENTER to INSTALLER MODE – P200 13E

If option 2 is Off at P25E 10E (Installer Direct Access), the only way for the installer to

Access Installers Mode is through client mode. The installer must first enter in to client mode

and go to P200E 13E where the Installer can enter the Installers Code. The code will not be

presented on the LCD (confidential), it will be blanked out.

RSSIRSSIRSSIRSSI

Enter to Enter to Enter to Enter to RSSI ModeRSSI ModeRSSI ModeRSSI Mode

ENTER to RSSI MODE – P200 14E (Available from Runner Ver:9.08+. MUST have Freewave 9F (916MHz) Receiver Ver:3.8 or Above and Runner LCD Keypad Ver:2.10 or Above) .

This option can assist in measuring the ‘RSSI’ (Received Signal Strength Indicator) signal

strength from the wireless device and help you decide where to mount it.

The table below can help you "Read" the RSSI signal from the device.

RSSI LEVEL

Wireless Device Reception

100%

The Wireless Device is located in a place with excellent reception

80%

The Wireless Device is located in a place with excellent reception

70%

The Wireless Device is located in a place with very good reception

60%

The Wireless Device is located in a place with very good reception

50%

The Wireless Device is located in a place with good reception

40%

The Wireless Device is located in a place with medium reception

30%

The Wireless Device is located in a place with weak reception

20%

The Wireless Device is located in a place with weak reception

10%

The Wireless Device is located in a place with very low reception!!

0%

No Reception!!!


138

User Privileges ChartUser Privileges ChartUser Privileges ChartUser Privileges Chart

P5E Options:

Option 8: Can force download

Option 7: Learn new radio devices

Option 6: Change DTMF command

Option 5: Change clock

Option 4: Change phone numbers

Option 3: Full access

Option 2: Change others codes Program

Location Option 1: Change own code 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

P1E User codes X X X

P2E User type X

P3E User areas X

P4E User access X

P5E User privileges X

P7E User pendant type X

P8E User radio privileges X

P9E User time zones X

P18E Learn radio user X

P19E Delete radio user X

P20E Find radio user X

P21E Learn radio user X

P22E Delete radio user X

P23E Find radio user X

P25E12E User options (hide user codes to installer) X

P26E (all) Time/Date and Daylight Savings X

P170E Change Holidays X

P63E Area A & B Command Code X

P164E Learn radio zone X

P165E Delete radio zone X

P166E Find radio zone X

P175E3E Auto-answer rings X

P175E4E Time to first test call X

P175E5E Test call period X


139

P5E Options:

Option 8: Can force download

Option 7: Learn new radio devices

Option 6: Change DTMF command

Option 5: Change clock

Option 4: Change phone numbers

Option 3: Full access

Option 2: Change others codes Program Location Option 1: Change own code 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

P175E8E Dial prefix X

P175E12E Output DTMF command control code X

P175E13E Microphone DTMF command control code X

P175E14E Voice/Domestic DTMF acknowledge code X

P175E15E Remote test initiate DTMF code X

P181E Telephone numbers X

P194E Divert telephone numbers X

P200E1E Display panel version # X X

P200E2E Display keypad address X X

P200E3E Areas assigned to this keypad X X

P200E4E Display active time zones X X

P200E5E Display battery voltage X X

P200E6E Enter walk test mode X

P200E12E Initiate call back X X

Dialler InstallationDialler InstallationDialler InstallationDialler Installation The dialler facility of the Runner controller has been designed to provide optimum flexibility in the way in which alarm events are reported. This flexibility includes options for reporting to a central monitoring station using Contact ID format, a domestic reporting option using alternating siren tones, a format for reporting alarms to an alpha numeric pager and a powerful speech (Voice) dialler.

In accordance with the statutory requirements of Telecommunications standards, we must bring the following points to your attention;

In the event of any incorrect operation with the Dialling device of this Runner panel, the user is to arrange with the installer of the device to make the necessary repairs. Should the matter be reported to the telephone service provider as a wiring fault and the fault be proven to be due to the alarm panel, a call out charge will be incurred.

Should the Runner control panel require relocation, the phone line connection must be disconnected before the power is disconnected. Similarly when reconnecting the dialler, it is necessary to power up the Runner panel before connecting the dialler to the telephone line Network.

Connection to the Telephone network should be made in accordance to Telecommunication Regulations of Australia. This connection is to be readily accessible to allow disconnection in the event of a fault. An example of this connection method is shown below.


140

NOTENOTENOTENOTE

The transmit level from this device is set at a fixed level and because of this, there may be circumstances where this device does not give its optimum performance. Before reporting such occurrences as faults, please check the line with a standard PSTN telephone, and do not report a fault unless the telephone performance is impaired.

This automatic dialling equipment shall not be set up to make calls to the "000" Emergency Service.

141

Contact ID Code SummaryContact ID Code SummaryContact ID Code SummaryContact ID Code Summary

In addition to the programmable Contact ID Event Code assignments defined at P157E,

P158E, P159E, P175E (10E-12E), there are a number of fixed event codes. The

programmable and fixed event codes are all listed in the table below. Associated with the

fixed and programmable event codes, there are a number of extension codes that are also

listed below. The list of extension codes is for your reference only and can not be changed in

programming.

Event Type Event Code

Extension Comment

System Tamper 137 000 Panel & Sat Tamper etc

Zone Alarm (wired or wireless) 130 001 to 016 Alarm on Zone 1-16

Zone Tamper - Low (short

circuit)

383 001 to 008 Zone Input 1-8 short circuit

Zone Tamper - High (open

circuit)

383 009 to 016 Zone Input 1-8 open circuit

Zone Tamper - Radio Zone 383 001 to 016 Radio Zone 1-16

Zone Near Alarm 138 001 to 016 Zone Input 1-16

Zone Confirmed Alarm 139 001 to 016 Zone Input 1-16

Radio PIR / Reed Switch

Battery Low

384 001 to 016 Radio Zone 1-16

Radio PIR Supervised Alarm 381 001 to 016 Supervised Radio Zone 1-16

Sensor-watch Alarm 391 001 to 016 Zone 1-16

Zone Excludes 570 001 to 016 Exclude Zone 1-16

Keypad Panic (or 1&3) 120 001 to 008 Panic at keypad #1-8

Radio-Key Panic 120 021 to 100 Panic by Radio User # 21-100

Keypad Fire (4&6) 110 001 to 008 Fire Alarm at keypad #1-8

Keypad Medical (7&9) 100 001 to 008 Medical Alarm at keypad #1-8

Keypad Tamper Switch Alarm 137 001 to 008 Keypad 1-8 Tamper Switch

Activated

Wrong Code Alarm 461 001 to 008 4 Incorrect code entries at KP

# 1-8

Arm/Disarm by "ARM key

(Quick Arm)

408 000 Arm/Disarm by single button

Arm/Disarm by user code 401 001 to 100 Arm/Disarm by User #1-100

Arm/Disarm by Radio-key

(Wireless User)

400 021 to 100 Arm/Disarm by Radio User

#21-100

Arm/Disarm by Key-switch-1 409 000 Key-switch # 1 Arm/Disarm

Arm/Disarm by Key-switch-2 409 001 Key-switch # 2 Arm/Disarm

Arm/Disarm by DTMF or

Up/Download

407 000 Remote Arm/Disarm

Arm/Disarm by Time-Zone 403 000 Time-Zone Arm/Disarm

Latchkey Disarm 642 001 to 100 Latchkey User Disarm

Fail to Arm on Time-Zone 455 000 Auto Arm fail


142

Event Type Event Code

Extension Comment

Delinquency Alarm 454 000 System not Armed within #

days

Stay Mode Arm/Disarm (part set)

441 000 Arm by “Stay” Button

Stay Mode Arm/Disarm (part

set)

441 001 to 100 Stay Mode Arm by User # 1-

100

Stay Mode Arm/Disarm by

Key-switch-1

442 000 Stay Mode Arm by Key-switch

# 1

Stay Mode Arm/Disarm by

Key-switch-2

442 001 Stay Mode Arm by Key-switch

# 2

System Battery Low 302 000 Control Panel Battery low

Mains Fail 301 000 Mains (AC) fail

Fuse Fail 312 000 Fuse 1 or 2 Fail

Radio-key (Wireless Remote

User) Battery Low

384 021 to 100 Radio-key User #21-100 low

batt.

Radio-PIR / Reed Switch / Wireless Device Battery Low

384 001 to 016 Radio Zone 1-16

Automatic TEST Calls 602 000 24 hour test

Manual TEST Calls 601 000 User generated Test Call

Phone Line Failure 351 000 Reported when line is restored

Duress Alarm 121 001 to 008 Duress at Keypad #1-8

Program Mode Entry 627 000 Program Mode Entered

Program Modes Exit 628 000 Program Mode Exited

Output 1 or 2 Tamper 323 001 or 002 O/P 1 or 2 wires cut.

Time & Date Changed 625 000 Time & Date has been changed

Keypad Buss Trouble 330 001 to 008 Keypad device 1-8 offline

RF Receiver jam detected 344 000 RF Jamming Detected

Dialler Failure 354 000 Failure to get Kiss-Off

Listen-In Request 606 000 Hold line open after alarm


143

SIA RepSIA RepSIA RepSIA Reporting Code Summaryorting Code Summaryorting Code Summaryorting Code Summary

Most of the SIA Event Codes are fixed within the panel but some locations such as zones at P196E (1-16E) and Panic/Fire/Medical at P197E (1-3E) can have a user defined report code from the table below. To follow are the default SIA reporting codes.

Event Type SIA Alarm Code SIA Restore Code

Armed, 24 hour & Near Zone Alarms (programmable P196E) BA BH

Zone Verified Alarm Activated BV BH

Zone Bypassed BB BU

Zone Tamper Activated BT BJ

Sensor-Watch Fail NA NS

Radio Zone Supervise Fail BZ BR

Pendant or Radio Zone Low Battery XT XR

Keypad or Pendant Panic Alarm (programmable P197E1E) PA PH

Keypad Fire Alarm (programmable P197E2E) FA FH

Medical Alarm (programmable P197E3E) MA MH

Duress Alarm HA HH

Panel or Keypad Tamper Switch Activated TA TR

Panel Battery Low YT YR

Panel AC Fail AT AR

Output Tamper Alarm (O/P 1 & 2 only) YA YH

12V Output Failure YP YQ

Phone Line Fail LT LR

Automatic Test Message RP

Manual Test Call RX

Area Delinquency Alarm CD CT

Excessive Code Attempts Alarm JA JP

Armed by User, Pendant, ARM button, DTMF or PC CL OP

Area Armed by Key-Switch CS OS

Area Armed by Time Zone CA OA

Stay Mode Armed by User, Pendant, KS, STAY Button CG OG

Fail to Arm by Time-Zone CI

Program Mode Entry/Exit LB LX

Checksum Fail (Corrupt EEPROM Data) YF

Time Changed JT

Keypad Buss Trouble IA IR

Dialler Failure (No Kiss off) YC

RF Interference (jamming) Detected XQ XH

Listen-In Request L30


144

CHART FOR THE PROGRAMMABLE SIA EVENT CODES

Event

Description

Program

Number

Alarm Restore Bypass Un-Bypass

Trouble Trouble Restore

Near Alarm

Verified Alarm

Burglary 1 BA BH BB BU BT BJ BA BV

Un-typed Alarm 2 UA UH UB UU UT UJ - -

Hold-up 3 HA HH HB HU HT HJ - -

Fire 4 FA FH FB FU FT FJ FA FM

Medical 5 MA MH MB MU MT MJ - -

Panic 6 PA PH PB PU PT PJ - -

Emergency 7 QA QH QB QU QT QJ - -

Gas 8 GA GH GB GU GT GJ - -

Sprinkler 9 SA SH SB SU ST SJ - -

Water 10 WA WH WB WU WT WJ - -

Heat 11 KA KH KB KU KT KJ - -

Freeze 12 ZA ZH ZB ZU ZT ZJ - -

Equipment 13 IA IR - - - - - -

Equip. Tamper 14 TA TH TB TU TT TJ - -

When you program one of the numbers in column 2 above at any of the addresses at P196E or P197E then all of the SIA codes associated with that event type will automatically be loaded, e.g. if Zone 10 (P196E10E) was programmed with a “4”, then when zone 10 activates it will send the fire alarm (FA) and the fire alarm restore (FH) and if zone 10 was bypassed it will send the fire bypass (FB) and the fire un-bypass (FU). See page 133 for more details.


145

Software change Update Software change Update Software change Update Software change Update

NoticeNoticeNoticeNotice

Software Update V9.03 August 2006

The following new features have been added in V9.03

1 - P4E option 8 and P25E13E option 1: Code required Viewing memory

2 - P8E option 4: Radio pendant only works during entry delay for disarm.

3 - P8E option 5: User codes 21-100 can be a unique duress code.

4 - P25E13E option 2: Cancel handover feature in Stay mode only.

5 - P25E13E option 3: Keypad output control disabled when armed.

6 - P25E13E option 4: User codes disabled during entry delay.

7 - P25E13E option 5: Blank keypad display when armed.

8 - P36E option 4 and P124E option 7: Pulse an output on kiss-off of a zone alarm.

9 - P37E option 2: Output Chime timer can be in minutes (was previously only reset time).

10 - P72E option 8: Stay mode armed confirmation beep to keypad.

11 - P123E option 6: Zone lockout function has been removed.

12 - P124E option 7 and P36E option 4: Zone can pulse output on kiss-off.

13 - P124E option 8: A zone can be used to terminate the exit delay.

14 - P146E: The zone re-trigger timer has been replaced with a re-trigger count.

15 - P182E option 10: A new SIA reporting format has been added.

16 - P189E options 6 and 7: Some new dialler reporting options have been added.

17 - P196E and P197E1E, 2E, 3E: SIA reporting codes can be edited.


146

Software Update V9.04 November 2006

The following new features were added in V9.04

1 - P25E3E: The “Dial Report Delay” timer only worked for zone alarms in full arm

mode. In version 9.04 the dial report delay also now applies to zone alarms in Stay

Mode.

2 - P25E10E Option 5: was modified to include “RF Jammed” as part of the arm

lockout.

3 - P25E10E Option 7: was modified to include AC fail as part of the arm lockout.

4 - P25E11E Option 5: was added. Option 5 inhibits arming during a missing keypad

alarm.

5 - P25E11E Option 6: was added. Option 6 inhibits arming during a telephone line

fault or Comms fault (failure to get a kiss-off).

6 - P25E11E Option 7: was added. Option 7 increase the wrong code keypad tamper

count from 4 to 10 and locks out the keypad for 90 seconds.

7 - P72E Option 8: was added. Option 8 allows Stay Armed Beep to Keypad.

8 - P175E2E Option 5: was added. Option 5 changes the test time period (P175E5E)

from hours to days.

9 - P182E Option 11: A new monitoring format was added. The new option is SIA Slow

format.

10 - P189E Option 8: was added. Option 8 allows reporting of the RF jammed alarm.

Software Update V9.05 January 2007


1 - P25E13E Option 6: was added to allow Monitored KP Buss Output Board.

2 - P25E13E Option 8: was added to Limit Events & Dialler to 3 of any one type.

3 - P37E Option 4: was added to disable outputs during two way voice mode.

4 - P46E Option 7: was added. Option says: Cannot Arm if Zone Unsealed at end of

Exit Delay.

5 - P123E Option 6: was removed. Option says: Zone is a One-Shot Zone.

6 - P175E2E Option 8: was added to allow the panel to auto-answer after 1 ring if set

up to do full duplex two way voice using the call-back option.

7 - P183E Option 5: was added to allow for direct on-line two way voice following

reporting of an alarm event.

8 – P200E 13E: Installer Code is blanked out (confidential).


147

Software Update V9.08 April 2008


1. 1. 1. 1. P200E Option 14: RSSI PresentP200E Option 14: RSSI PresentP200E Option 14: RSSI PresentP200E Option 14: RSSI Present

In this mode, the control Panel presents the RSSI (Received Signal Strength Indicator) of assigned

wireless detectors and remotes. Supported by: Receiver ver 3.9 and Keypad ver 2.10.

2.... P73E 1 P73E 1 P73E 1 P73E 1----8E Option 7: Turn off Backlight after 10Sec and LEDs indication at Arm mode8E Option 7: Turn off Backlight after 10Sec and LEDs indication at Arm mode8E Option 7: Turn off Backlight after 10Sec and LEDs indication at Arm mode8E Option 7: Turn off Backlight after 10Sec and LEDs indication at Arm mode

3. 3. 3. 3. In DIn DIn DIn Disarm Modeisarm Modeisarm Modeisarm Mode,,,, if a Sysif a Sysif a Sysif a System Tamper or Zone Tamper is tem Tamper or Zone Tamper is tem Tamper or Zone Tamper is tem Tamper or Zone Tamper is activatactivatactivatactivated,ed,ed,ed, Outputs 1 & 2 Outputs 1 & 2 Outputs 1 & 2 Outputs 1 & 2 will will will will NNNNot ot ot ot

activate activate activate activate but but but but System Tamper System Tamper System Tamper System Tamper & & & & Zone Tamper Zone Tamper Zone Tamper Zone Tamper alarms will still be reported via Dialleralarms will still be reported via Dialleralarms will still be reported via Dialleralarms will still be reported via Dialler....

4. 4. 4. 4. P25E 13E option 7: Enable Keypad Tamper.P25E 13E option 7: Enable Keypad Tamper.P25E 13E option 7: Enable Keypad Tamper.P25E 13E option 7: Enable Keypad Tamper.

Keypad Tamper is disabling by Default.

5. 5. 5. 5. P122E Option 3: Not an P122E Option 3: Not an P122E Option 3: Not an P122E Option 3: Not an Exit Delay ZoneExit Delay ZoneExit Delay ZoneExit Delay Zone....

Define Instant Zones. On the previous versions during the exit delay were following the Exit

delay.

6. P25E 3E 6. P25E 3E 6. P25E 3E 6. P25E 3E 0 0 0 0----255 :255 :255 :255 :Dialer Report DelayDialer Report DelayDialer Report DelayDialer Report Delay

Delay of the dialer report if during Entry/Exit delay an Instant Zone activated.

7.7.7.7. P36E 5E :P36E 5E :P36E 5E :P36E 5E : Disa Disa Disa Disable Outputs 1&2 During dial Delayble Outputs 1&2 During dial Delayble Outputs 1&2 During dial Delayble Outputs 1&2 During dial Delay.

8.8.8.8. Exit from Walk Test Mode will stay in Programming mode.Exit from Walk Test Mode will stay in Programming mode.Exit from Walk Test Mode will stay in Programming mode.Exit from Walk Test Mode will stay in Programming mode.

9. While learning wireless devices a messages "Code In Use" and "Not Found" accordingly.9. While learning wireless devices a messages "Code In Use" and "Not Found" accordingly.9. While learning wireless devices a messages "Code In Use" and "Not Found" accordingly.9. While learning wireless devices a messages "Code In Use" and "Not Found" accordingly.

10. From the main display Pressing Enter will present the open zones ,pre10. From the main display Pressing Enter will present the open zones ,pre10. From the main display Pressing Enter will present the open zones ,pre10. From the main display Pressing Enter will present the open zones ,pressing Enter again will ssing Enter again will ssing Enter again will ssing Enter again will

present the open zones by name.present the open zones by name.present the open zones by name.present the open zones by name.

11. Listen11. Listen11. Listen11. Listen----In time extended to 3min.In time extended to 3min.In time extended to 3min.In time extended to 3min.

12. Beeps from Keypad turn off during the Listen 12. Beeps from Keypad turn off during the Listen 12. Beeps from Keypad turn off during the Listen 12. Beeps from Keypad turn off during the Listen ––––In.In.In.In.

13. Report in Stay mode also at Voice Mode.13. Report in Stay mode also at Voice Mode.13. Report in Stay mode also at Voice Mode.13. Report in Stay mode also at Voice Mode.

14. Default Changes:14. Default Changes:14. Default Changes:14. Default Changes:

P4E 1-100E : USER CODE ACCESS OPTIONS

User 1-40 = 1,2,3,4,8

User 41,45,49,53,57 = 1,3,4,8

User 42,46,50,54,58 = 2,4,8

User 43,47,51,55,59 = 8,(Delay Panic – see P8E)

User 44,48,52,56,60 = 8,(Output-4 control – see P12E 4E, P13 4E, P14E 4E)

User 61,66,71,76,81,86,91,96 = 3,4,8

User 62,67,72,77,82,87,92,97 = 1,8

User 63,68,73,78,83,88,93,98 = 2,8

User 64,69,74,79,84,89,94,99 = 8,(Output-4 control – see P12E 4E, P13 4E, P14E 4E)

User 65,70,75,80,85,90,95,100 = 8, (Delay Panic – see P8E)

P8E 21-100E: RADIO USER PRIVILEGES

User 21-42 + 45,46,49,50,53,54,57,58 = 1

User 61,66,71,76, 81,86,91,96 = 1

User 43,47,51,55,59 = 3

User 65,70,75,80, 85,90,95,100 = 3

1. Code can Arm AreaCode can Arm AreaCode can Arm AreaCode can Arm Area

2. Code can arm Stay ModeCode can arm Stay ModeCode can arm Stay ModeCode can arm Stay Mode

3. Code can Disarm AreaCode can Disarm AreaCode can Disarm AreaCode can Disarm Area

4. Code can Disarm Code can Disarm Code can Disarm Code can Disarm Stay ModeStay ModeStay ModeStay Mode

8888.... User can View Event MemoryUser can View Event MemoryUser can View Event MemoryUser can View Event Memory

1111.... Pendant Can Disarm at All TimesPendant Can Disarm at All TimesPendant Can Disarm at All TimesPendant Can Disarm at All Times

2222.... Pendant Causes Immediate PanicPendant Causes Immediate PanicPendant Causes Immediate PanicPendant Causes Immediate Panic 3333.... Pendant Causes DelPendant Causes DelPendant Causes DelPendant Causes Delayed Panic ( 1.5 Sec)ayed Panic ( 1.5 Sec)ayed Panic ( 1.5 Sec)ayed Panic ( 1.5 Sec)


148

PPPP25E 10E = 1,2,625E 10E = 1,2,625E 10E = 1,2,625E 10E = 1,2,6

Panel Tamper requires 2k2 EOL.

P182E 1P182E 1P182E 1P182E 1----8E8E8E8E

Telephone No 1, 2 = 1

Telephone No 3-8 = None

1 Panel Tamper Requires 2k2 EOL

2 Direct access to program mode for the installer code

6. Send output information to keypad BUSS.

1. Contact ID 1. Contact ID 1. Contact ID 1. Contact ID

2222.... Domestic DialDomestic DialDomestic DialDomestic Dial


149

Runner Runner Runner Runner 8/16 Quick Start8/16 Quick Start8/16 Quick Start8/16 Quick Start Guide Guide Guide Guide

The default settings of this panel have been chosen to allow the system to be up and running

with a minimum of programming. Because of this there are normally only a handful of

program addresses that need to be changed to get the system fully functional.

As a guide to getting the system up and running as quickly as possible we, have summarised

the most commonly used addresses for you below.

CODES:

P1E 1-100E

Code 1 is P1E1E and is defaulted to “123”. Code 2 is P1E2E, etc up to P1E100E for code 100.

Enable DiallerEnable DiallerEnable DiallerEnable Dialler

P175E 1E

By default the Dialler is turned Off. To turn On the dialler, you must turn on Option 1 at

address P175E1E.


P181E 1-8E

Telephone Number 1 is P181E 1E and can be up to 16 digits long. Number 2 is P182E 2E, etc

up to P181E 8E for Phone number 8.

Telephone FormatTelephone FormatTelephone FormatTelephone Format

P182E 1-8E

There are 9 different reporting formats that can be selected for each telephone number. The

formats are listed on page 123.

Account CodeAccount CodeAccount CodeAccount Code

P62E 1-2E Area “A” Account code is P62E1E and Area “B” Account code is P62E2E.

Armed Entry DelaysArmed Entry DelaysArmed Entry DelaysArmed Entry Delays

P144E 1-16E

Zone 1 entry delay is P144E1E and can be a value of 0-9999 seconds through to Zone 16

entry delay being at address P144E16E. A value of “0” makes the zone instant.

Stay Entry DelaysStay Entry DelaysStay Entry DelaysStay Entry Delays

P145E 1-16E

Zone 1 entry delay when armed in “Stay” Mode is P145E1E and can be a value of 0-9999

seconds through to Zone 16 Stay Mode entry delay being at address P145E16E. A value of

“0” makes the zone instant.

ARMED EXIT DELAY:ARMED EXIT DELAY:ARMED EXIT DELAY:ARMED EXIT DELAY:

P60E 1-2E

Area A exit delay is programmed at P60E1E, Area B at P60E2E and can be a value of 0-255

seconds. A value of “0” makes the area arm instantly with no exit delay.


150

STAY EXIT DELAY:STAY EXIT DELAY:STAY EXIT DELAY:STAY EXIT DELAY:

P61E 1-2E

Area A Stay Mode exit delay is programmed at P61E1E, Area B at P61E2E and can be a value

of 0-255 seconds. A value of “0” arms Stay Mode instantly with no exit delay.


151

Runner Runner Runner Runner 8/16 CONFIGURATION 8/16 CONFIGURATION 8/16 CONFIGURATION 8/16 CONFIGURATION

SUMMARY GUIDESUMMARY GUIDESUMMARY GUIDESUMMARY GUIDE

The following program summary is an abbreviated version of all the panel program

addresses. This is intended as a quick guide to finding a program address. In many address

locations, there is a main address (e.g. “P1E”), then a sub address (e.g. P1E “1E”). You must

enter in the main address number, followed by the sub address, then you can enter the

actual data. The program addresses are in numerical order with page references beside them

so you can get more detailed information if required. This Summary is split into 11 headings.

These are;

1. Users - Page 152

2. Miscellaneous Panel & Clock Settings - Page 157

3. Outputs - Page 160

4. Areas - Page 162

5. Keypads - Page 165

6. Key-Switch - Page 171

7. Zones - Page 172

8. Time Zones - Page 180

9. Dialer - Page 181

10. Telephone Numbers - Page 183

11. Miscellaneous 4+2 Program Options - Page 187

12. Panel Diagnostic & Default Options - Page 187

152

UsersUsersUsersUsers

Programming User Codes P1E 1-100E User Code 1-100 - Default for User Code # 1 (P1E 1E) = 123 Codes

can be 1-6 or 4-6 digits.

(where 1E = User Code #1 to 100E = User Code #100)

NOTE: The 100 Users can be keypad Code, Radio or Access key Users. They can be mixed but

the Maximum is 100 Users.

The User type MUST Either be set to a type “0” or “3” or “4” (P2E User# E) for a code to be

entered at the above addresss.

User Type (Code/Radio/Access Tag-Card) P2E 1-100E User # 1-100 Type -

Defaults for user 1-40 =4 (PIN Code or Access Tag User with Presets to Arm/Disarm & Stay Arm/Stay Disarm)

Defaults for users 41-60 =1 (Radio User with Presets to suit the Blue 4F Freewave Remotes)

Defaults for users 61-100 =1 (Radio User with Presets to suit the Small Grey 9F Freewave Remotes)

0 = Keypad Code User {PIN}

1 = Radio User (Users 21-100 only)

2 = Access Tag/Card User

3 = Both Code and Access Tag/Card User {Tag + PIN }

4 = Either Code or Access Tag/Card User { Tag or PIN }

User Area Assignment P3E 1-100E User # 1-100 Area - (Default = 1)

1 = Assigned to Area “A”

2 = Assigned to Area “B”

User Code Access Options P4E 1-100E Users 1-100 Access Options (Default 1-4)

Default:

User 1-40 = 1,2,3,4,8

User 41,45,49,53,57 = 1,3,4,8

User 42,46,50,54,58 = 2,4,8

User 43,47,51,55,59 = 8,(Delay Panic – see P8E)

User 44,48,52,56,60 = 8,(Output-4 control – see P12E 4E, P13 4E, P14E 4E)

User 61,66,71,76,81,86,91,96 = 3,4,8

User 62,67,72,77,82,87,92,97 = 1,8

User 63,68,73,78,83,88,93,98 = 2,8

User 64,69,74,79,84,89,94,99 = 8,(Output-4 control – see P12E 4E, P13 4E, P14E 4E)

User 65,70,75,80,85,90,95,100 = 8, (Delay Panic – see P8E)

1 = Code can Arm Area 5 = Code is a Security Guard Code

2 = Code can arm Stay Mode 6 = Code will Arm Latchkey Mode

3 = Code can Disarm Area 7 = Call Divert Code

4 = Code can disarm Stay Mode 8 = User Can View Event memory


153

User Code Privileges P5E 1-100E Users 1-100 Privileges

(Default User 1 =,2,3,4,5,6,7,8)

(Default User 2-100 = 1)

1 = User can Change their Code

2 = User can Change All Codes

3 = User can Allow Access to Installer Mode/Edit all Codes

4 = User can Change Telephone Numbers

5 = User can Change the Clock

6 = User can Change DTMF Command Codes

7 = User can Learn New Radio Devices

8 = User can Force a Download to Call-back Number

Radio User Type

P7E 21-100E Radio User 21-100 Type

0 = General Pendant Type

(Default–All = 1) 1 = Crow (Freewave) Pendant

21 = Ness Pendant

Radio User Privileges P8E 21-100E Radio Users 21-100 Privileges

Default:

User 1~40 = 1

User 41,45,49,53,57 = 1

User 42,46,50,54,58 = 1

User 43,47,51,55,59 = 3 (Delay Panic (see P8E))

User 44,48,52,56,60 = None

User 61,66,71,76,81,86,91,96 = None

User 62,67,72,77,82,87,92,97 = None

User 63,68,73,78,83,88,93,98 = None

User 64,69,74,79,84,89,94,99 = None

User 65,70,75,80,85,90,95,100 = 3 (Delay Panic (see P8E))

1 = Pendant Can Disarm at All Times

2 = Pendant Causes Immediate Panic

3 = Pendant Causes Delayed Panic ( 1.5 Sec)

4 = Pendant only works during entry delay

5 = This user is a dedicated Duress code

6 = Spare

7 = Spare

8 = Spare

Time Zone Assigned to a User P9E 1-100E Time Zone to User # 1-100

1 = User Controlled by Time Zone # 1 5 = User Controlled by Time Zone # 5




(Default = All Off)


154

User to Keypad Assignment P10E 1-100E User # 1-100 Keypad Assignment

1 = Can Operate at Keypad # 1 (Default = All On)

2 = Can Operate at Keypad # 2







Radio Pendant Panic Beeps to Keypad P11E 21-100E Radio # 21-100 Panic Beep to Keypad

1 = A Radio panic will Beep at Keypad # 1 (Default = All On)

2 = A Radio panic will Beep at Keypad # 2







Users to Output Mask P12E 1-100E User # 1-100 to Output Mask

User 44,48,52,56,60 = 4

User 64,69,74,79,84,89,94,99 = 4

All Other Users = None

1 = User is Mapped to Output # 1








User Can Turn an Output ON P13E 1-100E User # 1-100 Can Turn On an Output

User 44,48,52,56,60 = 4

User 64,69,74,79,84,89,94,99 = 4


1 = User Can Turn on Output # 1 5 = User Can Turn on Output # 5





155

User Can Turn an Output OFF P14E 1-100E User # 1-100 Can Turn Off an Output

User 44,48,52,56,60 = 4

User 64,69,74,79,84,89,94,99 = 4


1 = User Can Turn off Output # 1








Radio Pendant Panic Alarm to an Output P15E 21-100E Radio # 21-100 Panic Alarm to an O/P

User 21 ~ 100 = 1,2

1 = Radio panic to Output # 1









156

Armed by User # 4+2 Reporting Code P16E 1-100E 4+2 Arm Code for Users 1-100

Disarmed by User # 4+2 Reporting Code P17E 1-100E 4+2 Disarm Code for Users 1-100

Learn Radio Pendant Codes P18E 21-100E Learn Radio Pendant Codes for Users 21-100

(applies if the User Type, P2E, is set to 1)

Delete a Specific Radio Pendant Code P19E 21-100E Delete a Specific Radio Pendant Code for Users 21-100

(applies if the User Type, P2E, is set to 1)

Find Radio Pendant memory Location P20E 0E Enter this address then operate the Radio Pendant to find its user #

(applies if the User Type, P2E, is set to 1). Only press 0E when using LED Keypad.

Learn Access Tag/Card Codes P21E 1-100E Learn Access Tag/Card Codes for Users 1-100

(applies if the User Type, P2E, is set to 2, 3 or 4)

Delete a Specific Access Tag/Card Code P22E 1-100E Delete a Specific Access Tag/Card Code for Users 1-100

(applies if the User Type, P2E, is set to 2, 3 or 4)

Find an Access Tag/Card memory Location P23E 0E Enter this address then operate the Access Tag/Card to find its user #

(applies if the User Type, P2E, is set to 2, 3 or 4). Only press 0E when using LED Keypad.


157

Miscellaneous Panel & Clock SettingsMiscellaneous Panel & Clock SettingsMiscellaneous Panel & Clock SettingsMiscellaneous Panel & Clock Settings

Installer Code

P25E 1E Installer Code - ( Default = 000000)

Duress Digit P25E 2E Duress Digit - Value 1-9 (Default = 0 Duress Function Disabled)

Dial Report Delay P25E 3E Dial Report Delay - Value 0-255 seconds (Default = 0)

Radio Detector Supervised Timer P25E 4E Radio Detector Supervised Timer - 0-9999 Minutes (Default=2880 Min [2 Days])

Two Trigger Timer P25E 5E Two Trigger Timer - Value 0-255 Seconds (Default = 60 Sec)

Mains Fail Reporting Delay P25E 6E Mains Fail Reporting Delay - Value 0-9999 Seconds (Default = 900 Sec)

Receiver Fail Delay P25E 7E Receiver Fail Delay - Value 0-9999 Seconds (Default = 0 Sec-Disabled)

Upload/Download Site Code Number P25E 8E Upload/Download Site Code Number - Up to 8 Characters (Default = None)

Temporary Output Disable P25E 9E Temporary Output Disable - Output 1-8


158

Miscellaneous Panel Options P25E 10E Misc. Panel Options Miscellaneous Options

(Default = 1,2,6)

1 = Panel Tamper is 2k2 EOL

2 = Direct access to program mode for the installer code.

3 = Disable Mains Fail Test

4 = Listen-in to O/P # 1 Low Volume

5 = Receiver Fail/RF Jammed Lockout

6 = Send output information to keypad buss

7 = Cannot arm if the system battery is low or AC has Failed

8 = Installer Lockout

Installer Options P25E 11E Installer Options (Default = All Off)

1 = Option 1 - Entry to Installer Mode (via Client Prog Mode) MUST Reset Confirmed Alarms

2 = Option 2 - Entry to Installer Mode (via Client Prog Mode) MUST Reset Tamper Alarms

3 = Option 3 - Entry to Installer Mode (via Client Prog Mode) MUST Reset Low Battery Alarm

4 = Option 4 - Entry to Installer Mode (via Client Prog Mode) MUST Reset Supervisory Alarms

5 = Cannot Arm if there is a keypad Fault

6 = Cannot Arm if there is a Telephone Line Failure or Comms Fault

7 = 10 Incorrect Code Attempts locks out the keypad for 90 Seconds

8 = User Codes Must be 4-6 digits long

User Options P25E 12E User Options (NOTE: This Option can ONLY be accessed from Client Mode)

(Default = All Off)1 = Hide User Codes from Installer

P25E 13E Miscellaneous User Options

(Default = 2)

1 = Code Required to View Memory

2 = Cancel Handover Zone Function in Stay Mode

3 = Output Control from Keypad is Disabled when Armed

4 = Keypad Codes are Disabled During Entry Delay

5 = No Keypad Indications while Armed

6 = Monitored KP Buss Output Board

7 = Enable Keypad Tamper

8 = Limit Events & Dialler to 3 of any one type

Setting Real Time Clock

P26E 1E Real Time Hour/Minute - Value 0-2359

P26E 2E Real Time Day of Week - Value 1-7 (1=Sunday, 2=Monday ,etc)

P26E 3E Real Time Date/Month/Year - Value DDMMYY (e.g. 020904 = 2nd Sept 2004)

P26E 4E Daylight Saving is Active (If LED #1 is On, Daylight Saving is currently active) Turn this

bit ON if you are in Daylight Saving Time when the panel is installed.


159

Daylight Saving Settings P27E 1E Daylight Saving Start Sunday - Value 0-5 - Default = 1 (0=daylight saving

start time disabled)

2E Daylight Saving End Sunday - Value 0-5 - Default = 3 (0=daylight saving end time disabled)

P28E 1E Daylight Saving Start Month - Value 1-12 - Default = 10

2E Daylight Saving End Month - Value 1-12 - Default = 3

P29E 1E Daylight Saving Start Hour - Value 0-23 - Default = 2

2E Daylight Saving End Hour - Value 0-23 - Default = 2


160


Programming Output Options “A” P34E 1-8E Options “A” for Outputs 1-8

1 = Invert Output (Default for Output-4 = 3, All Other Outputs = Off)

2 = Flash Output

3 = Single Pulse to Output

4 = Lockout Output

5 = DTMF Remote Control can operate Output

6 = User Can operate this Output

7 = “Control” button Can Operate Output

8 = Chime Alarms will Flash this Output (linked to Pulse Timer)

Programming Output Options “B” P35E 1-8E Options “B” for Outputs 1-8

(Default for outputs 1,2,3 =7)

(Default outputs 4-8 = all Off)

1 = Mains Fail to Output (Operates when P25E6E time expires)

2 = Fuse Failure to Output

3 = Battery Low to output

4 = Telephone Line Failure to Output

5 = Supervised Radio Signal Failure

6 = Sensor-Watch Alarm

7 = System Tamper to Output

8 = Receiver Fail

Programming Output Options “C” P36E 1-8E Options “C” for Outputs 1-8

(Default Outputs 1&2 = 1, All Other Outputs = Off)

1 = Walk Test Pulse to Output

2 = Pulse Output every 5 seconds when Disarmed

3 = Pulse Output on Kiss-off Following Arming

4 = Pulse Output on Kiss-off Following a zone alarm

5 = Output Disabled when P25E 3E timer is running

6 = Spare

7 = Spare

8 = Spare


161

Programming Output Options “D” P37E 1-8E Options “D” for Outputs 1-8

(Default for Output 3 = 3 & 4, All other Outputs = Off)

1 = Siren Driver to Output (requires a horn speaker, outputs 1&2)

2 = Output reset timer is minutes (Turn Off this Option to make Timer in seconds)

3 = Output ‘silenced’ for 10 seconds on key-press if alarm

4 = Turn Output OFF during Two Way Voice Mode

5 = Spare

6 = Spare

7 = Spare

8 = Monitored Output (can tell if siren cable is cut, outputs 1&2 only)

Output Delays, Times and Modes

Output ON Delay Time P38E 1-8E Output 1-8 ON Delay Time - 0-9999 Seconds (Default = 0 Sec for All Outputs)

Output Pulse Time P39E 1-8E Output 1-8 Pulse Time - 0-255;1/10th Sec increments (Default for Outputs 1&3 = 3, Default for Outputs 2 = 7, Default for Outputs 4 = 10, All other O/P’s = 0)

Output Reset Time P40E 1-8E Output 1-8 Reset Time - 0-9999 Seconds

(if option 2 at P37E is on the reset time is in minutes)

(Default for Outputs 1,3 =300sec)

(Default for Outputs 2 = 0 = Latching)

(Default for Outputs 4 = 5sec)

Output Chime Mode Time P41E 1-8E Output 1-8 Chime Timer - 0-255;1/10th Sec increments

(Default for All Outputs = 20 (=2sec))

Output Command ControlOutput Command ControlOutput Command ControlOutput Command Control

Start of Output “Command Control” Status Messages P42E 1-8E Start message Number for Outputs 1-8 “Command Control” - 0-99 (Default for All Outputs = 0)

Un-Map an Output P43E 1-8E Un-map Outputs 1-8 (remove ALL Defaults from an Output)

Assigning a Time-zone to an Output P44E 1-8E Time-zones that will control Outputs 1-8 - Value = Time-zone 1-8


162

AreasAreasAreasAreas

Area “A” & “B” Options A

P45E 1-2E Area A&B Options A

(1=Area “A”) (2=Area “B”) (Default = All Options Off)

1 = Arm Button Required Before Code to Set

2 = Stay Button Required Before Code to Set Stay Mode

3 = Code required to Set

4 = Code Required to Bypass Zones

5 = Spare

6 = Send Arm at the end of the Exit Delay

7 = Can Arm only if All Zones are Sealed (Ready)

8 = Can Arm Stay Mode only if All Zones are Sealed (Ready)

Area “A” & “B” Options B

P46E 1-2E Area A&B Options B (1=Area “A”) (2=Area “B”) (Default = All Off)

1 = Use Near and Verified Alarm reporting for All zones in this Area

2 = Area will arm at end of time-zone

3 = Area will disarm at beginning of time-zone

4 = Assign Chirps to Access tags

5 = Spare

6 = Spare

7 = Cannot Arm if Zone Unsealed at end of Exit Delay

8 = Spare

Area “A” & “B” Arm Indication to Output P47E 1-2E Area A&B Arm Indication to Output - Value 1-8 (for Outputs 1-8)

(1=Area “A”) (2=Area “B”) (Default for All Outputs = Off)

Area “A” & “B” Stay Arm Indication to Output P48E 1-2E Area A&B Stay Arm Indication to Output - Value 1-8 (for Outputs 1-8)


Area “A” & “B” Disarm Indication to Output P49E 1-2E Area A&B Disarm Indication to Output - Value 1-8 (for Outputs 1-8)


Area “A” & “B” Pendant (or Access Tag) Arm Chirp to Output P50E 1-2E Area A&B Arm Chirp to Output - Value 1-8 (for Outputs 1-8)

(1=Area “A”) (2=Area “B”) (Default for Outputs 1,2,3 = On, All Other Outputs = Off) (One

chirp to the output for Arm)

Area “A” & “B” Pendant (or Access Tag) Stay Arm Chirp to Output P51E 1-2E Area A&B Stay Arm Chirp to Output - Value 1-8 (for Outputs 1-8)

(1=Area “A”) (2=Area “B”) (Default for Outputs 1,2 = On, All Other Outputs = Off)

(One chirp to the Output for Stay Arm)


163

Area “A” & “B” Pendant (or Access Tag) Disarm Chirp to Output P52E 1-2E Area A&B Disarm Chirp to Output - Value 1-8 (for Outputs 1-8)

(1=Area “A”) (2=Area “B”) (Default for Outputs 1,2,3 = On, All Other Outputs = Off) (Two

chirps to the Output for Disarm)

Area “A” & “B” Pendant Stay (or Access Tag) Disarm Chirp to Output P53E 1-2E Area A&B Stay Disarm Chirp to Output - Value 1-8 (for Outputs 1-8)

(1=Area “A”) (2=Area “B”) (Default for Outputs 1,2 = On, All Other Outputs = Off)

(Two chirps to the Output for disarm)

Area “A” & “B” Arm Pulse to Output P54E 1-2E Area A&B Arm Pulse to Output - Value 1-8 (for Outputs 1-8)

(1=Area “A”) (2=Area “B”) (Default = All Off)

Area “A” & “B” Stay Arm Pulse to Output P55E 1-2E Area A&B Stay Arm Pulse to Output - Value 1-8 (for Outputs 1-8)


Area “A” & “B” Disarm Pulse to Output P56E 1-2E Area A&B Disarm Pulse to Output - Value 1-8 (for Outputs 1-8)


Area “A” & “B” Stay Disarm Pulse to Output P57E 1-2E Area A&B Stay Disarm Pulse to Output - Value 1-8 (for Outputs 1-8)


Area “A” & “B” Armed Mode Exit Delay Beeps to Keypad

P58E 1-2E Area A&B Armed Exit Delay Beeps to Keypad - Value 1-8 (for Keypads 1-8)

(1=Area “A”) (2=Area “B”) (Default for Keypads 1 & 2 = On, All Other Keypads = Off)

Area “A” & “B” Stay Mode Exit Delay Beeps to Keypad

P59E 1-2E Area A&B Stay Exit Delay Beeps to Keypad - Value 1-8 (for Keypads 1-8)

(1=Area “A”) (2=Area “B”) (Default for Keypads 1 & 2 = On, All Other Keypads = Off)

Area “A” & “B” Armed Exit Delay Time

P60E 1-2E Area A&B Exit Delay Time - Value 0-255 seconds

(1=Area “A”) (2=Area “B”) (Default = 60 Seconds for Areas A&B)

Area “A” & “B” Stay Armed Exit Delay Time

P61E 1-2E Area A&B Stay Exit Delay Time - Value 0-255 seconds

(1=Area “A”) (2=Area “B”) (Default = 60 Seconds for Areas A&B)

Area “A” & “B” Monitoring Account Code Number P62E 1-2E Area A&B Account Code - Value 0000-FFFF

(1=Area “A”) (2=Area “B”) (Default = 0000 for Areas A&B)

Area “A” & “B” Remote “Command Control” Code Number P63E 1-2E Area A&B Command Control code - Value 1-4 digit code (1-9999)


Start Message Number for Areas “A” & “B” “Command Control” P64E 1-2E Start Message for Areas A&B Command Control - Value 0-99



164

Area “A” & “B” Armed Mode Exit Delay to Output P65E 1-2E Area A&B Armed Exit Delay to Output - Value 1-8 (for Outputs 1-8)


Area “A” & “B” Stay Mode Exit Delay to Output P66E 1-2E Area A&B Stay Exit Delay to Output - Value 1-8 (for Outputs 1-8)


Area “A” & “B” Delinquency Delay

P67E 1-2E Area A&B Delinquency Delay - value 0-99 Days, (0 = Off)

(1=Area “A”) (2=Area “B”) (Default = 0 for areas A&B)

Area “A” & “B” Auto Arm/Disarm Time-zones P68E 1-2E Area A&B Auto Arm/Disarm Time-zones - Value 1-8 (for Time-zones 1-8)


165

KeypadsKeypadsKeypadsKeypads

Keypad Area Assignment P71E 1-8E Keypads Assigned To Areas

1 = Area “A” (Default for Keypads 1~8 = 1 (All to Area “A” ))

2 = Area “B”

Keypad Button Options P72E 1-8E Keypad Button Options

1 = <CHIME> or <CONTROL><PROGRAM> Button Enabled (Default = All on)

2 = <BYPASS> Button Enabled

3 = <PANIC> Button Enabled

4 = Delayed panic on <PANIC> Button

5 = <1> & <3> Panic Alarm Enabled

6 = <4> & <6> Fire Alarm Enabled

7 = <7> & <9> Medical Alarm Enabled

8 = Stay Armed Beep to Keypad

Alarm Beeps & LED Control to Keypad

P73E 1-8E Keypad Beep/LED Options (Default for All Keypad = 5,8)

1 = Mains Fail Beeps Keypad Buzzer

2 = Fuse Failure Beeps Keypad Buzzer

3 = Battery Low Beeps Keypad Buzzer

4 = Telephone Line Failure Beeps Keypad Buzzer

5 = System Tamper Alarm Beeps Keypad Buzzer

6 = Receiver Fail Beeps Keypad Buzzer

7 = Turn Off Keypad LED’s when Armed / After 10 sec if not touched

8 = Turn Off Keypad & Backlight LED’s on Mains Failure


166

Keypad “ARM” Button Area Assignment P74E 1-8E Keypad “ARM” Button Area

1 = “ARM” Button assigned to Area “A” (Default = 1)

2 = “ARM” Button assigned to Area “B”

Keypad “ARM” Button Area Options P75E 1-8E Keypad “ARM” Button Opts.

1 = “ARM” Button can Arm (Default = 1,7)

2 = “ARM” Button can Stay Mode Arm

3 = “ARM” Button can Disarm at All Times

4 = “ARM” Button can Disarm Stay Mode at All Times

5 = “ARM” Button can Reset Alarms

6 = “ARM” Button can Arm Latchkey Mode

7 = “ARM” Button can Disarm During Exit Delay

8 = “ARM” Button can Disarm Stay Mode During Exit Delay

Keypad “STAY” Button Area Assignment P76E 1-8E Keypad “STAY” Button Area

1 = “STAY” Button assigned to Area “A” (Default = 1)

2 = “STAY” Button assigned to Area “B”

Keypad “STAY” Button Area Options P77E 1-8E Keypad “STAY” Button Opts.

1 = “STAY” Button can Arm (Default = 2,8)

2 = “STAY” Button can Stay Mode Arm

3 = “STAY” Button can Disarm at All Times

4 = “STAY” Button can Disarm Stay Mode at All Times

5 = “STAY” Button can Reset Alarms

6 = “STAY” Button can Arm Latchkey Mode

7 = “STAY” Button can Disarm During Exit Delay

8 = “STAY” Button can Disarm Stay Mode During Exit Delay

Keypad “A” Button (Large LCD KP only) Area Assignment P78E 1-8E Keypad “A” Button Area

1 = “A” Button assigned to Area “A” (Default = 1)

2 = “A” Button assigned to Area “B”

Keypad “A” Button (Large LCD KP only) Area Options P79E 1-8E

Keypad “A” Button Opts.

1 = “A” Button can Arm (Default = 1,7)

2 = “A” Button can Stay Mode Arm

3 = “A” Button can Disarm at All Times

4 = “A” Button can Disarm Stay Mode at All Times

5 = “A” Button can Reset Alarms

6 = “A” Button can Arm Latchkey Mode

7 = “A” Button can Disarm During Exit Delay

8 = “A” Button can Disarm Stay Mode During Exit Delay


167

Keypad “B” Button (Large LCD KP only) Area Assignment P80E 1-8E Keypad “B” Button Area

1 = “B” Button assigned to Area “A” (Default = none)

2 = “B” Button assigned to Area “B”

Keypad “B” Button (Large LCD KP only) Area Options P81E 1-8E Keypad “B” Button Opts.

1 = “B” Button can Arm (Default = 1,7)

2 = “B” Button can Stay Mode Arm

3 = “B” Button can Disarm at All Times

4 = “B” Button can Disarm Stay Mode at All Times

5 = “B” Button can Reset Alarms

6 = “B” Button can Arm Latchkey Mode

7 = “B” Button can Disarm During Exit Delay

8 = “B” Button can Disarm Stay Mode During Exit Delay

Keypad to Output Mask (for Access Control) P82E 1-8E Keypad to Output Mask

1 = The Keypad is linked to Output # 1 (Default for Keypad 1 = To Output-1)








“Control” Button to Output Mask (for Access Control) P83E 1-8E Keypad “Control” Button to Output Mask (Default = All On) (By Default, All Keypads ‘Control’ Buttons can Operate All Outputs)

1 = The Keypad “Control” Button is linked to Output # 1








“Panic” Button or “1&3” Alarm to Outputs P84E 1-8E Keypad “Panic” Button or “1&3” Alarm to Outputs (Default = 1,2,3)

1 = The Keypad-1 “Panic” Button or “1&3” will Activate Output # 1









168

“Fire (4&6)” Alarm to Outputs P85E 1-8E Keypad “Fire (4&6)” Alarm to Outputs (Default = 1,2,3)

1 = The Keypad “Fire (4&6)” Alarm will Activate Output # 1








“Medical (7&9)” Alarm to Outputs P86E 1-8E Keypad “Medical (7&9)” Alarm to Outputs (Default = 2)

1 = The Keypad “Medical (7&9)” Alarm will Activate Output # 1








“Duress” Alarm to Outputs P87E 1-8E Keypad “Duress” Alarm to Outputs (Default = All Off)

1 = The Keypad “Duress” Alarm will Activate Output # 1








Keypad “Tamper Switch” Alarm to Outputs P88E 1-8E Keypad “Tamper Switch” Alarm to Outputs (Default = All Off)

1 = The Keypad “Tamper Switch” Alarm will Activate Output # 1









169

Keypad “Wrong Code” Alarm to Outputs P89E 1-8E Keypad “Wrong Code” Alarm to Outputs (Default = 1,2)

1 = The Keypad “Wrong Code” Alarm will turn on Output # 1








Manually Operated Panic Alarm Beeps to Keypads P90E 1-8E Panic Alarm Beeps to Keypads (Default = All On)

1 = A Panic Alarm at the selected keypad will Beep KP # 1








Manually Operated Fire Alarm Beeps to Keypads P91E 1-8E Fire Alarm Beeps to Keypads (Default = All On)

1 = A Fire Alarm at the selected keypad will Beep KP # 1








Manually Operated Medical Alarm Beeps to Keypads P92E 1-8E Medical Alarm Beeps to Keypads (Default = All On)

1 = A Medical Alarm at the selected keypad will Beep KP # 1









170

Wrong Code or Keypad Tamper Switch Alarm Beeps to Keypads P93E 1-8E Wrong Code or Keypad Tamper Switch Alarm Beeps to Keypads

(Default = All Off)

1 = A Wrong Code or KP Tamper Alarm at Keypad 1-8 will Beep KP # 1








Chime Alarm Beep Time at a Keypad P94E 1-8E The Time the Chime Alarm will sound at Each Keypad - Value =0-255 1/10th sec (Default = 20 which is 2 Seconds)

Proximity Reader LED to Output Mapping P98E 1-8E Proximity Reader LED to Output Mapping (Default = None)

1 = Proximity Reader 1-8 LED will follow the state of Output # 1








Learn Proximity Reader Keypad Address Number P99E 1-8E Learn Proximity Reader Keypad Address Number - Value = Keypad Address 1-8


171

KeyKeyKeyKey----SwitchesSwitchesSwitchesSwitches

Key-switch Area Assignment P111E 1-2E K/S 1 & 2 assigned to Areas A or B -

1 = Assigned to Area “A” (1 = K/S # 1) (Default K/S # 1 = None)

2 = Assigned to Area “B” (2 = K/S # 2) (Default K/S # 2 = None2)

Key-switch Access & Operational Options P112E 1-2E K/S 1 & 2 Access & Operational Options (1 = K/S # 1) (2 = K/S # 2)

1 = K/S can Arm Area (Default = 1,3,7,8)

2 = K/S can arm Stay Mode

3 = K/S can Disarm Area

4 = K/S can disarm Stay Mode

5 = K/S has Security Guard Options

6 = K/S will Arm Latchkey Mode

7 = Key-switch is N/O (If turned off the K/S is N/C)

8 = Key-switch is Momentary (If turned off the K/S is Latching)


172

Runner-8

(Default Zone 1&2 = 1,6,7)

(Default Zone 3&4 =1,7)

(Default Zone 5~8 =7)

Runner-16 & Runner-Plus

(Default Zone 1&2 = 1,6,7)

(Default Zone 3&4 =1,7)

(Default Zone 5~16 =7)

ZonesZonesZonesZones

Programming Zones to Areas P121E 1-16E Assigning Zones to Areas A or B

1 = Assigned to Area “A” (Default All Zones = 1)

2 = Assigned to Area “B”

Programming Zone Options A P122E 1-16E Programming Zone Options A

1 = Zone is Active

2 = Zone is N/O (Off = N/C)

3 = Not an Exit Delay Zone

4 = Keypad Zone

5 = Zone is a Radio Zone

6 = Zone is a Stay Mode Zone

7 = Zone can be Manually Bypassed

8 = Zone can be Auto-Bypassed

Programming Zone Options B P123E 1-16E Programming Zone Options B

1 = Zone is a Handover Zone (Default = None)

2 = Zone is a Two Trigger Zone

3 = Zone is a 24 Hour Zone

4 = Zone is a 24 Hour Auto-reset Zone

5 = Zone is a 24 Hour Fire Zone

6 = Spare

7 = Zone is a Chime Zone

8 = Zone is a Permanent Chime Zone

Programming Zone Options C

P124E 1-16E Programming Zone Options C

( Default zones 1~16 = 1,2)

1 = Can Arm if Zone is not Ready

2 = Will Send Multiple Reports via Dialler

3 = Sensor-Watch Zone

4 = Zone is on Soak Test

5 = Zone will report to Area B Account Number

6 = Zone will Not Report 24 hour Alarms via Dialler

7 = Pulse output on kiss-off following a zone alarm

8 = Exit terminator zone


173

Runner-8

Default Inputs 1~4 = 3 (2k2 EOL)

Runner-16 & Runner-Plus

Default Inputs 1~8 = 3 (2k2 EOL)

Programming Zone EOL (End-of-line) Options P125E 1-8E Programming Zone EOL Options

0 = Short Circuit (Default For All Zone Inputs = 3 (=2k2 Single EOL))

1 = 1k (Single EOL, Must Connect in Series)

2 = 1k5 (Single EOL, Must Connect in Series)










12 = 2k2 / 4k7 (2k2 Tamper EOL Must be in Series & 4k7 in Parallel Across Zone Relay)

13 = 3k3 / 6k8 (2k2 Tamper EOL Must be in Series & 4k7 in Parallel Across Zone Relay)

14 = 2k2 / 4k7 / 8k2 (2k2 Zn Tamp EOL=Series+4k7 Across Lo-Zn Relay & 8k2 Across Hi-Zn Relay)

15 = 4k7 / 8k2 (4k7 Across Lo-Zn Relay & 8k2 Across Hi-Zn Relay – No Tamper)

Programming Zone Response P126E 1-8E Programming Zone Response

1 to 8 Vibration mode (Default = 9) (Zone EOL-P125E, for Vibration Mode MUST be type 3 only ) 1 = highest and 8 is lowest sensitivity level.

9 to 26 Normal zone mode Response time = approx 200ms –1sec

Programming the Radio Zone Detector Type

P127E 1-16E Programming the Radio Zone Type from the List - Value = 1-35

(Default for All Wireless Zones = 3)

0 = Generic

1 = CROW Merlin PIR (supervised signal ignored – 433MHz AM)

2 = CROW Merlin PIR (supervised signal active – 433MHz AM)

3 = CROW Freewave with checksum (supervised signal active – 433 & 916MHz FM)

4 = CROW Freewave with checksum (non-supervised – 433 & 916MHz FM)

5 = CROW AE series battery Low (304MHz AM)

6 = CROW AE series Radio Reed Switch (304MHz AM)

11 = Ness Radio devices Battery Low (304MHz AM)

12 = Ness Radio Reed Switch (304MHz AM)

21 = Electronics Line Radio PIR (433MHz AM)

31 = Visonic K900 Radio PIR

32 = Visonic Power code (supervised signal ignored - 433MHz AM)

33 = Visonic Power code (supervised signal active - 433MHz AM)

34 = Siemens (Supervised Signal Ignored)

35 = Siemens (Supervised Signal Active)

Armed Zone Alarms to Outputs P128E 1-16E Armed Zone Alarms to Output (Default = 1,2,3)

Refer to pages 12~15 for EOL Wiring

Examples in accordance with the Zone

EOL Resistor Options you have chosen.

You can choose different EOL Options

for Each Zone Input.


174

1 = A Zone Alarm will Turn On Output # 1








Armed Stay Mode Zone Alarms to Outputs

P129E 1-16E Armed Stay Mode Zone Alarms to Output (Default = 1,2,3)

1 = A Stay Mode Zone Alarm will Turn On Output # 1








24 Hour Zone Alarms to Outputs P130E 1-16E 24 Hour Zone Alarms to Output (Default = 1,2,3)

1 = A 24 Hour Zone Alarm will Turn On Output # 1








Chime Zone Alarms to Outputs P131E 1-16E Chime Zone Alarms to Output (Default = All Off)

1 = A Chime Zone Alarm will Turn On Output # 1








Zone Tamper Alarms to Outputs P132E 1-16E Zone Tamper Alarms to Output (Default = 1,2,3)


175

1 = A Zone Tamper Alarm will Turn On Output # 1








Armed Zone Alarm Beeps to Keypads

P134E 1-16E Armed Zone Alarm Beeps to Keypads (Default = 1,2)

1 = An Armed Zone Alarm will Beep Keypad #1








Stay Mode Zone Alarm Beeps to Keypads P135E 1-16E Stay Mode Zone Alarm Beeps to Keypads (Default = 1,2)

1 = A Stay Mode Zone Alarm will Beep Keypad #1








24 Hour Zone Alarm Beeps to Keypads P136E 1-16E 24 Hour Zone Alarm Beeps to Keypads (Default = 1,2)

1 = A 24 Hour Zone Alarm will Beep Keypad #1








Chime Zone Alarm Beeps to Keypads P137E 1-16E Chime Zone Alarm Beeps to Keypads (Default = 1,2)

1 = A Chime Zone Alarm will Beep Keypad #1


176








Zone Tamper Alarm Beeps to Keypads

P139E 1-16E Zone Tamper Alarm Beeps to Keypads (Default = 1,2)

1 = A Zone Tamper Alarm will Beep Keypad #1








Radio Supervise Alarm Beeps to Keypads P140E 1-16E Radio Supervise Alarm Beeps to Keypads (Default = None)

1 = A Radio Supervise Alarm will Beep Keypad #1








Zone Sensor-watch Alarm Beeps to Keypads P141E 1-16E Zone Sensor-watch Alarm Beeps to Keypads (Default = None)

1 = A Zone Sensor-watch Alarm will Beep Keypad #1








Armed Zone Entry Delay Beeps to Keypads P142E 1-16E Armed Zone Entry Delay Beeps to Keypads (Default = 1,2)

1 = Armed Zone Entry Delay will Beep Keypad #1



177







Stay Mode Entry Delay Beeps to Keypads

P143E 1-16E Stay Mode Entry Delay Beeps to Keypads (Default = 1)

1 = Stay Mode Entry Delay will Beep Keypad #1








Armed Zone Entry Delay Times P144E 1-16E Armed Zone Entry Delay Times - Value 0-9999 seconds

(Default Zone # 1 = 20 Seconds, Zones # 2-16 = 0)

Stay Mode, Lockout & 4+2 Reporting Codes

Stay Mode Entry Delay Times P145E 1-16E Stay Mode Entry Delay Times - Value 0-9999 seconds

(Default Zones # 1-2 = 20 Seconds, Zones # 3-16 = 0)

Zone Lockout (re-trigger) Times P146E 1-16E Zone Re-Trigger Times - Value 0-255 minutes

(Default = 0 Minutes) Only applies to panel Ver:9.0 ~ 9.02. (Not applicable to Ver:9.03+)

Zone Alarm 4+2 Reporting Codes P147E 1-16E Zone Alarm 4+2 Reporting Code - Two digit value from 00-FF

Zone Alarm 4+2 Restore Reporting Codes P148E 1-16E Zone Alarm Restore 4+2 Code - Two digit value from 00-FF

Zone Near Alarm 4+2 Reporting Codes P149E 1-16E Zone Near Alarm 4+2 Reporting Code - Two digit value from 00-FF

Zone Near Alarm 4+2 Restore Reporting Codes P150E 1-16E Zone Near Alarm Restore 4+2 Code - Two digit value from 00-FF

Zone Intrusion Verified Alarm 4+2 Reporting Codes P151E 1-16E Zone Intrusion Verified Alarm 4+2 Reporting Code - Two digit value from 00-

FF Page 88

Zone Intrusion Verified Alarm 4+2 Restore Reporting Codes P152E 1-16E Zone Intrusion Verified Alarm Restore 4+2 Code - Two digit value from 00-FF

Zone Bypass Alarm 4+2 Reporting Codes P155E 1-16E Zone Bypass Alarm 4+2 Reporting Code - Two digit value from 00-FF


178

Zone Bypass 4+2 Restore Reporting Codes P156E 1-16E Zone Bypass Restore 4+2 Code - Two digit value from 00-FF


179

Alarm CID Reporting CodesAlarm CID Reporting CodesAlarm CID Reporting CodesAlarm CID Reporting Codes

Zone Alarm Contact ID Reporting Codes P157E 1-16E Zone Alarm Contact ID Reporting Code - (Default = 130)

Zone Near Alarm Contact ID Reporting Codes P158E 1-16E Zone Near Alarm Contact ID Reporting Code - (Default = 138)

Zone Intrusion Verified Alarm Contact ID Reporting Codes P159E 1-16E Zone Intrusion Verified Alarm Contact ID Reporting Code - (Default = 139)

Zone Alarm Voice Message Number P160E 1-16E Zone Alarm Voice Message Number - Value-0-99 (Default = 1)

Entry Delay to OutputsEntry Delay to OutputsEntry Delay to OutputsEntry Delay to Outputs

Away Zone Entry Delay to Outputs P161E 1-16E Away Zone Entry Delay to Outputs (Default = All Off)

1 = Armed Zone Entry Delay to output #1








Stay Mode Entry Delay to Outputs P162E 1-16E Stay Mode Entry Delay Beeps to Outputs (Default = All Off)

1 = Stay Mode Entry Delay to output #1








WatchWatchWatchWatch----Dog TimerDog TimerDog TimerDog Timer

Sensor-Watch Timer P163E 1-16E Sensor-Watch Timer - 0-9999 Minutes (Default = 7200 minutes [120

Hours])


180

Radio CodesRadio CodesRadio CodesRadio Codes

Enrolling Radio Zone Codes P164E 1-16E Learn Radio Zone Codes

Delete a Specific Radio Zone Code P165E 1-16E Delete a Specific Radio Zone Code

Find Radio Zone Memory Location P166E 0E This will find the zone # of any Radio Zone code stored in the panel

Only press 0E when using LED Keypad.

Time ZonesTime ZonesTime ZonesTime Zones

Programming Holidays P170E 1-8E Holidays 1-8 Days - Value = DDMMYY

Programming Time Zone Days P171E 1-8E Time Zones 1-8 Days (Default = All Off)

1 = Sunday

2 = Monday

3 = Tuesday

4 = Wednesday

5 = Thursday

6 = Friday

7 = Saturday

8 = Invert

Programming Time Zone Start & End Times

P172E 1-8E Time Zones 1-8 Start Time - Value 0000-2359 (Default = 0000)

P173E 1-8E Time Zones 1-8 End Time - Value 0000-2359 (Default = 0000)

Time Zone Options P174E 1-8E Time Zone 1-8 Options (Default = All Off)

1 = Ignore Holidays

2-8 = Spare


181

DiallerDiallerDiallerDialler

Dialler Programming Options P175E 1E Dialler options (Default = 2,6,7)

1 = Dialler is Enabled

2 = Fax Defeat

3 = Disable Telephone Line Monitoring

4 = DTMF or Pulse Dial (For DTMF, 4&5 must both be OFF)

5 = DTMF or Reverse Pulse Dial (For DTMF, 4&5 must both be OFF)

6 = Send long DTMF tones during dialling

7 = Auto Detect Modem Mode

8 = Force V21 Mode

Dialler Programming Options 2 P175E 2E Dialler options 2 (Default = 6)

1 = Step number on each call

2 = Upload/Download use call-back

3 = Upload/Download only if disarmed

4 = Test calls only if armed

5 = Test Time Period is in days

6 = Hold line open following Domestic/Voice report for DTMF control

7 = First to Open Last to Close Reporting

8 = Answer After 1 ring for Two Way Voice Call-back Mode

Auto-Answer Ring Count P175E 3E Auto-Answer Ring Count - Value 0-99 (Default = 17)

Time to the First Dialler Test Call P175E 4E Time to the First Dialler Test Call - Value 0000-2359 (Default = 04:30)

Test Call Time Period P175E 5E Test Time Call Period - Value 0-255 Hours: 0 = No Test (Default = 168)

Keypad Listen-in Options P175E 6E Keypad Listen-in Options (Default = 1,2,3,4,5,6,7)

1 = Enabled During Dialling in Disarm State only

2 = Enabled During Dialling in Armed State only

3 = Enabled During Dialling in Stay Mode State only

4 = Enabled Throughout the call in Disarm State only

5 = Enabled Throughout the call in Armed State only

6 = Enabled Throughout the call in Stay Mode State only

7 = Listen-in Enabled when the panel answers a call

8 = Enabled at All Times


182

Output # 1 Listen-in Options P175E 7E Output # 1 Listen-in Options (Default = All Off)

1 = Enabled During Dialling in Disarm State only

2 = Enabled During Dialling in Armed State only

3 = Enabled During Dialling in Stay Mode State only

4 = Enabled Throughout the call in Disarm State only

5 = Enabled Throughout the call in Armed State only

6 = Enabled Throughout the call in Stay Mode State only

7 = Listen-in Enabled when the panel answers a call

8 = Enabled at All Times

Dialling Pre-fix Number P175E 8E Dialling Pre-fix Number - Value 1-16 Digits (Default = 0)

“Panic” Alarm Contact ID Reporting Code P175E 9E “Panic” Alarm CID Reporting Code - (Default=120)

“Fire” Alarm Contact ID Reporting Code P175E 10E “Fire” Alarm CID Reporting Code - (Default=110)

“Medical” Alarm Contact ID Reporting Code P175E 11E “Medical” Alarm CID Reporting Code - (Default=100)

Output “Command Control” Code Number P175E 12E Output Command Control code - Value 1-4 digit code (1-9999) (Default = None)

Microphone On/Off “Command Control” Code Number P175E 13E Microphone Command Control code - Value 1-4 digit code (1-9999) (Default = None)

Dialler Acknowledge Code

P175E 14E Voice/Domestic Acknowledge Code - Value 1-4 digit code (1-9999) (Default = None)

Force Test Call Code

P175E 15E Force Test Call Code - Value 1-4 digit code (1-9999) (Default = 0, Feature

disabled)


183

Programming Voice Board Messages P176E 1E Keypad or Radio “Panic” Alarm Voice Message Number - Value 0-99 (Default = 1)

P176E 2E “Fire” Alarm Voice Message Number - Value 0-99 (Default = 1)

P176E 3E “Medical” Alarm Voice Message Number - Value 0-99 (Default = 1)

P176E 4E “Mains Failure” Voice Message Number - Value 0-99 (Default = 1)

P176E 5E “Mains Restore” Voice Message Number - Value 0-99 (Default = 1)

P176E 6E “Battery Low” Voice Message Number - Value 0-99 (Default = 1)

P176E 7E “Battery Restored” Voice Message Number - Value 0-99 (Default = 1)

P176E 8E “Tamper” (Zone/Radio/System) Voice Message Number - Value 0-99

(Default = 1)

P176E 9E “Duress Alarm” Voice Message Number - Value 0-99 (Default = 1)

P176E 10E “Latchkey Disarm” Voice Message Number - Value 0-99 (Default = 1)

P176E 11E “Manual Test Initiated” Voice Message Number - Value 0-99 (Default = 1)

TelephoneTelephoneTelephoneTelephone Numbers Numbers Numbers Numbers

Programming Telephone Numbers P181E 1-8E Programming Telephone Numbers - Value 1-16 Digits (Default = None)

Telephone Number Reporting Formats P182E 1-8E Telephone Number Reporting Formats

Default:

Telephone No 1,2 = 1

Telephone No 3-8 = None

1 = Contact ID (Requires a PSTN (Standard) Phone Line-Not suitable with VoIP Lines)

2 = Domestic Dial (Runner-8 Requires the Crow 90 second Voice Module)

3 = Pager

4 = Speech Dialler (Runner-8 & 16 Requires the Crow 90 second Voice Module)

5 = 4+2 10pps (Handshake 1400/ Tone 1900)




9 = 4+2 DTMF (with Checksum)

10 = SIA

11 = SIA Slow


184

Telephone Number Reporting Options P183E 1-8E Telephone Number Reporting Options (Default for Tel # 1&2 = 1,2,4)

1 = Stop Dialling if Kissed off (Default for Tel # 3&8 = 1,2)

2 = Monitor Call Progress

3 = Blind Dial

4 = Use Group Numbers for Contact ID Reporting

5 = Stay On-line after Alarm report for two way voice

6 = Auto Kiss-off for Voice/Domestic Reporting

7 = Use the Dialling Pre-fix

8 = Is to be used as the “Call-back” Number (Only for Telephone No.8)

Maximum Dial Attempts per Telephone Number P184E 1-8E Maximum Dial Attempts per Telephone Number - Value 0-99 (Default = 3)

Dialler Reporting Options A P186E 1-8E Dialler Options A

1 = Report Mains Failure (Default for All Tel # = All On)

2 = Report Battery low

3 = Report Radio Battery Low

4 = Report Line Fail

5 = Report System Tamper

6 = Report Keypad Tamper

7 = Report Zone Tamper

8 = Report Radio Zone Tamper

Dialler Reporting Options B P187E 1-8E Dialler Options B

1 = Report Duress Alarm (Default for All Tel # = All On)

2 = Report Supervised Radio Alarm

3 = Report Zone Sensor-watch Alarm

4 = Report Manual Panic Alarm

5 = Report Manual Fire Alarm

6 = Report Manual Medical Alarm

7 = Report Radio Pendant Panic Alarm

8 = Report Zone Bypasses

Dialler Reporting Options C P188E 1-8E Dialler Options C

1 = Report Arm/Disarm (Default for All Tel # 1&2 = 1,2,3,4,5,7,8)

2 = Report Stay Mode Arm/Disarm (Default for Tel # 3~8 = 5,7,8)

3 = Report Disarm only after an Activation

4 = Report Stay Mode Disarm only after an Activation

5 = Report Stay Mode Zone Alarms

6 = Report Access to Program Mode

7 = Report 24 Hour Alarms when set to Domestic/Voice mode

8 = Report Zone Restores


185

Dialler Reporting Options D P189E 1-8E Dialler Options D

1 = Report Latchkey Disarm (Default = 3,4,5,7) (Default for Tel # 1 = 3,4,5)

2 = Report Delinquent (Default for Tel # 2~8 = 4,5)

3 = Report Tests

4 = Report Fuse Failure

5 = Report Output 1 or 2 Fail

6 = Report RTC (Real Time Clock) Time changed

7 = Report Keypad Buss Trouble

8 = Report RF Interference (Jamming) Detected

Divert Area Events P192E 1-2E Divert Area Events (1=Area A) (2=Area B) (Default = All Off)

1 = Dial on away arm

2 = Dial on away disarm

3 = Dial on stay arm

4 = Dial on stay disarm

5 = Dial if Key-switch activation

6 = Dial if Time zone activation

7 = Dial if DTMF or PC activation

8 = Dial if keypad “ARM” or “STAY” single button activation

Divert Number Options P193E 1-2E Divert Numbers Options (1=Divert on) (2=Divert off) (Default = All Off)

1 = Spare

2 = Spare

3 = Blind Dial

4 = Spare

5 = Spare

6 = Spare

7 = Use the Dialling Pre-fix

8 = Spare

Divert Numbers P194E 1-2E Divert Numbers - Value 1-16 Digits (Default = 0)

(1=Divert on)

(2=Divert off)

Panic Alarm SIA Reporting Code P197E 1E Value From 1-14

Fire Alarm SIA Reporting Code P197E 2E Value From 1-14

Medical Alarm SIA Reporting Code P197E 3E Value From 1-14


186

Miscellaneous 4Miscellaneous 4Miscellaneous 4Miscellaneous 4+2 Program Options+2 Program Options+2 Program Options+2 Program Options

Mains & Battery 4+2 Reporting Codes

P195E 1E Mains Failure 4+2 Code - Two digit value from 00-FF

P195E 2E Mains Failure restore 4+2 Code - Two digit value from 00-FF

P195E 3E Low Battery 4+2 Code - Two digit value from 00-FF

P195E 4E Low Battery Restore 4+2 Code - Two digit value from 00-FF

System Tamper 4+2 Reporting Codes

P195E 5E 4+2 Alarm Code for System Tamper - Two digit value from 00-FF

P195E 6E 4+2 Alarm Code for System Tamper Restore - Two digit value from 00-FF Page 89

Remote Arm/Disarm 4+2 Reporting Codes

P195E 7E 4+2 Code for Remote Arming (Full Arm or Stay Mode Arm)- Two digit value

from 00-FF Page 89

P195E 8E 4+2 Code for Remote Disarm - Two digit value from 00-FF

Duress Alarm 4+2 Reporting Code

P195E 9E 4+2 Duress Alarm Code - Two digit value from 00-FF

Automatic Test 4+2 Reporting Code P195E 10E 4+2 Automatic Test Code - Two digit value from 00-FF

Armed by “Arm” Button 4+2 Reporting Code P195E 11E 4+2 Arm by “Arm” Button Code - Two digit value from 00-FF

Stay Mode Arming 4+2 Reporting Code P195E 12E 4+2 Stay Mode Arming Code - Two digit value from 00-FF

Disarmed by “Arm” or “Stay” Button 4+2 Reporting Code

P195E 13E 4+2 Disarm by Arm or Stay Button - Two digit value from 00-FF

Armed/Disarmed by “Key-switch” 4+2 Reporting Code

P195E 14E 4+2 Arm by “Key-switch” Code - Two digit value from 00-FF

P195E 15E 4+2 Disarm by “Key-switch” Code - Two digit value from 00-FF

“Time Zone Arm Failure” 4+2 Reporting Code

P195E 16E 4+2 Time Zone Arm Failure - Two digit value from 00-FF

Keypad “Panic” Alarm 4+2 Reporting Code

P195E 17E Keypad Panic Alarm 4+2 Code - Two digit value from 00-FF

Keypad “Panic” Alarm 4+2 Restore Reporting Code

P195E 18E Keypad Panic Alarm Restore 4+2 Code - Two digit value from 00-FF

Keypad “Fire” Alarm 4+2 Reporting Code

P195E 19E Keypad Fire Alarm 4+2 Code - Two digit value from 00-FF

Keypad “Fire” Alarm 4+2 Restore Reporting Code

P195E 20E Keypad Fire Alarm Restore 4+2 Code - Two digit value from 00-FF

Keypad “Medical” Alarm 4+2 Reporting Code

P195E 21E Keypad Medical Alarm 4+2 Code - Two digit value from 00-FF

Keypad “Medical” Alarm 4+2 Restore Reporting Code

P195E 22E Keypad Medical Alarm Restore 4+2 Code - Two digit value from 00-FF


187

Panel Diagnostic & Default OptionsPanel Diagnostic & Default OptionsPanel Diagnostic & Default OptionsPanel Diagnostic & Default Options

Display Panel Software Version Number P200E 1E Display the Panel Software Version Number

Display Keypad Address Number P200E 2E Display Keypad Address Number

Display Areas Assigned to this Keypad P200E 3E Display Areas Assigned to this Keypad

Display Active Time Zones P200E 4E Display Active Time Zones

Display Battery Voltage P200E 5E Display Battery Voltage

Walk Test Mode P200E 6E Walk Test Mode

Write to EEPROM (DTU) Board P200E 7E Write to EEPROM (DTU) Board

Read from EEPROM (DTU) Board P200E 8E Read from EEPROM (DTU) Board

Restore User & Installer Codes plus Telephone Numbers to Defaults P200E 9E Restore User/Installer Codes & Telephone #’s to Default Values

Restore All Factory Defaults P200E 10E Restore All Factory Defaults

Clear Alarm Memory Buffer P200E 11E Clear Alarm Memory Buffer

Initiate a Call to the Call-back P200E 12E Initiate a Call to the Call-back

Enter to Installer Mode P200E 13E Entry to Installer Mode (only through Client Mode)

Enter to RSSI Mode P200E 14E Entry to RSSI (Received Signal Strength Indicator) Mode


188

CROW ELECTRONIC ENGINEERING LTD. (Crow) WARRANTY POLICY CERTIFICATECROW ELECTRONIC ENGINEERING LTD. (Crow) WARRANTY POLICY CERTIFICATECROW ELECTRONIC ENGINEERING LTD. (Crow) WARRANTY POLICY CERTIFICATECROW ELECTRONIC ENGINEERING LTD. (Crow) WARRANTY POLICY CERTIFICATE

This Warranty Certificate is given in favor of the purchaser (hereunder the "Purchaser") purchasing the products directly from Crow or from its authorized distributor.

Crow warrants these products to be free from defects in materials and workmanship under normal use and service for a period of 24 months for control panel and 12 months for modules and accessories that connect to control panel. The 24 month and 12 month periods start from the last day of the week and year whose numbers are printed on the printed circuit board or a label inside these products (hereunder the "Warranty Period").

Subject to the provisions of this Warranty Certificate, during the Warranty Period, Crow undertakes, at its sole discretion and subject to Crow's procedures, as such procedures are from time to time, to repair or replace, free of charge for materials and/or labor, products proved to be defective in materials or workmanship under normal use and service. Repaired products shall be warranted for the remainder of the original Warranty Period.

All transportation costs to and from Crow and in-transit risk of loss or damage related, directly or indirectly, to products returned to Crow for repair or replacement shall be borne solely by the Purchaser.

Crow's warranty under this Warranty Certificate does not cover products that is defective (or shall become defective) due to: (a) alteration of the products (or any part thereof) by anyone other than Crow; (b) accident, abuse, negligence, or improper maintenance; (c) failure caused by a product which Crow did not provide; (d) failure caused by software or hardware which Crow did not provide; (e) use or storage other than in accordance with Crow’s specified operating and storage instructions.

There are no warranties, expressed or implied, of merchantability or fitness of the products for a particular purpose or otherwise, which extend beyond the description on the face hereof.

This limited Warranty Certificate is the Purchaser's sole and exclusive remedy against Crow and Crow's sole and exclusive liability toward the Purchaser in connection with the products, including without limitation - for defects or malfunctions of the products. This Warranty Certificate replaces all other warranties and liabilities, whether oral, written, (non-mandatory) statutory, contractual, in tort or otherwise.

In no case shall Crow be liable to anyone for any consequential or incidental damages (inclusive of loss of profit, and whether occasioned by negligence of the Crow or any third party on its behalf) for breach of this or any other warranty, expressed or implied, or upon any other basis of liability whatsoever. Crow does not represent that these products can not be compromised or circumvented; that these products will prevent any person injury or property loss or damage by burglary, robbery, fire or otherwise; or that these products will in all cases provide adequate warning or protection.

Purchaser understands that a properly installed and maintained product may in some cases reduce the risk of burglary, fire, robbery or other events occurring without providing an alarm, but it is not insurance or a guarantee that such will not occur or that there will be no personal injury or property loss or damage as a result.

Consequently, Crow shall have no liability for any personal injury; property damage or any other loss based on claim that these products failed to give any warning.

If Crow is held liable, whether directly or indirectly, for any loss or damage with regards to its products, regardless of

cause or origin, Crow’s maximum liability shall not in any case exceed the purchase price of THE PRODUCT, BEING AN INDIVIDUAL ITEM, that is said to be the cause of such loss or damage, WHICH SHALL BE THE COMPLETE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY AGAINST CROW.

189

How to Contact UsHow to Contact UsHow to Contact UsHow to Contact Us

Corporate Head Office:

142 Keys Road,

Cheltenham

Vic., 3192

Australia

Please contact us by Mail, Fax or e-mail.

PH: +(61)-1300-761-976

PH: +(61)-0(3)-9553-2488

FAX: +(61)-0(3)-9553-2688

E-MAIL: [email protected]

WEB: www.crowaust.com.au

Tech Support:

Dear Crow Products Installer,

Please contact your Crow Products Supplier for Technical Assistance. In the rare occasion that your supplier is unable to assist you, they will contact Crow for Technical assistance specific to your

concerns and will then be able to assist you themselves.


190

P/N 7113561 REV B G.T

Runner Series - Crow Electronic Engineering Ltd.

Documents

Transcript of Runner Series - Crow Electronic Engineering Ltd.